TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB · 2019. 2. 25. · 10.2014EvoBusGmbH Nottobereprinted,reproducedortranslatedinanyformwithoutpriorpermission. Addressfororders: EvoBusGmbH ServiceDocumentation

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 1

10.2014 EvoBus GmbH

Not to be reprinted, reproduced or translated in any form without prior permission.

Address for orders:EvoBus GmbHService DocumentationD-89231 Neu-Ulm

Printed in Germany

Order no.: A 632 584 04 19

Introduction

The user information supplied witheach bus is intended for use onlyby persons who are qualified tooperate the bus. The userinformation is split into thefollowing parts:

The Driver's Operating Instructionsare intended to answer all import-ant questions concerning operationof the bus in a concise and clearlyunderstandable manner.

More detailed and complete inform-ation, as well as further informationrelevant to safety, can be found inthe Operating Instructions.

The Maintenance Record serves asa guide to the technical care of thebus. It contains all the informationon maintenance intervals and main-tenance tasks as well as pages forconfirming that the maintenancework has been carried out.

Please consult the “Safety” section be-fore starting up the bus for the firsttime, and familiarise yourself with thecontents of these Operating Instructionsbefore setting off.

Items of optional equipment are also de-scribed, if their operation needs explana-tion. The bus delivered to you has beencustomised in accordance with your or-der, therefore some descriptions anddiagrams may differ from the equipmenton your bus.

The Driver's Operating Instructions, theOperating Instructions and the Mainten-ance Record are important documentsand must always be carried in the bus.

Our buses are the subject of ongoingdevelopment. You are therefore askedto appreciate that we reserve the rightto make modifications to the design,equipment and technical features. Forthese reasons, no claims can be madebased upon the contents of this userinformation.

Environmental protection

The declared policy of EvoBus GmbHis one of integrated environmental pro-tection. This policy starts at the rootcauses and encompasses in its manage-ment decisions all the consequences forthe environment which could arise fromproduction processes or the productsthemselves.

The objectives are for the natural re-sources which form the basis of our ex-istence on this planet to be used spar-ingly and in a manner which takes therequirements of both nature and human-ity into account.

Operate your vehicle in an environment-ally responsible manner and you will helpto protect the environment. Fuel con-sumption and wear in the drive train (en-gine, clutch, transmission, axles, brakes,tyres) are extremely dependent on yourdriving style.

We hope you enjoy driving your bus.

EvoBus GmbH

Mercedes-Benz Omnibusse

Table of contents

Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3General safety information . . . . . . . . 4Storage space for hand luggage . . . . . 9Driver's rest area safety precau-tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Windscreen wiper system safetyprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Safety precautions for the air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Operation of auxiliary heating . . . . . 10

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Preparation for the journey - dailytasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Preparation for the journey - weeklytasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Preparation for the journey - monthlytasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Additional maintenance tasksdependent on bus use . . . . . . . . . . 16General bus care and mainten-ance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Running-in guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . 27Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Loading a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed)(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Ball hitch trailer coupling andopen-jaw trailer coupling (detachable)(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Connecting the power supply . . . . . 33Trailer coupling maintenance . . . . . . 33Refuelling (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . 34BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaningsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

AdBlue® service product . . . . . . . . 37Filling with AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . 40Diesel particulate filter regenera-tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Starting regeneration of the dieselparticulate filter manually . . . . . . . . 44Operating/malfunction displays:fuel system/exhaust gas cleaningsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Function description: accident datarecorder (ADR) (option) . . . . . . . . . . 47Brake system safety precautions . . . 49Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Braking and stopping . . . . . . . . . . . 49Brakes with anti-locking protec-tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Applying the parking brake . . . . . . . 51Releasing the parking brake . . . . . . 52Emergency braking in the event offailure of both brake circuits . . . . . . 52EBS brake system (system descrip-tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Acceleration skid control (ASR) . . . . 54Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB I

Table of contents

Electronic Stability Program(ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Operating/malfunction displays:brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Activating the slip increase func-tion of ASR (acceleration skidcontrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Operating/malfunction displays:ABS/ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Electronic Stability Program (ESP)(function description) . . . . . . . . . . . 62Deactivating the Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Operating/malfunction displays:brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Operating 230/400 V systems(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Fitting the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . 71Swivelling the skibox (option) . . . . . 73Additional operating instructions forthe skibox (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Note on maintenance work . . . . . . . 74Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Care/cleaning of light-alloywheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Care and cleaning of covers,upholstery and ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Care/cleaning of fabric covers . . . . 78Care/cleaning of micro-fibrecovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Care/cleaning of leather covers . . . . 81

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Driver's area overview . . . . . . . . . . . 88Switches on the left section of theinstrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Switches on the right section of theinstrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Tachograph (installation posi-tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98DTCO tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Destination display safety precau-tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Destination display control pan-el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Door pushbutton in the driver'sarea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Scope of tools and emergencyequipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Location of the fire extinguish-ers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Location of the first-aid kits . . . . . 107Tow bar location (option) . . . . . . . 108Location of spare mirror (op-tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Emergency hammer (option) . . . . . 108Driver's rest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110On-board kitchenette refrigeratorcontrol panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Tour guide refrigerator controlpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . 116Seat belt reminder display . . . . . . . 117Exterior flaps on the Tourismo 15RHD (example of 2-axle bus) . . . . . 118Design and function description:fire detection system . . . . . . . . . . 119Operating and malfunction displays:fire detection system . . . . . . . . . . 119

Driver's area controls . . . . . . . . . 121Rotary light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Steering column switch for lightand wiper functions . . . . . . . . . . . 124Steering column switch for retarderand cruise control (overview) . . . . . 124Adjustable steering column . . . . . . 129

II TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB

Table of contents

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Parking brake and emergencyrelease device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Basic settings menu on displayscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Brightness setting of the displayscreen and instrument lighting . . . . 132Display screen in the instrumentcluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Calling up and interpreting the fuelconsumption indicator (option) . . . 140Air suspension safety precau-tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Raising/lowering the bus . . . . . . . 142Normal level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Activating/deactivating axle loadtransfer for trailing axle (3-axlebuses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Activating/deactivating the busstop brake (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Activating/deactivating the drive-offlock (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Important information on thesteering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Turning the steering wheel whenthe bus is stationary . . . . . . . . . . . 147Activating the attendant callsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Switch descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 149Master safety switch (emergency-offswitch) (national variant) . . . . . . . . 152Mirror adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Windscreen roller sunblind pushbut-ton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Pushbutton for co-driver's rollersunblind (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Axle load transfer switch (3-axlebuses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Diesel particulate filter (DPF)regeneration start/inhibit . . . . . . . 154Electronic Stability Program (ESP)OFF pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Pushbutton for GO 240-8 trans-mission shift system failsafe mode(option) (2/4 and N) . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Pushbutton for GO 240-8 trans-mission shift system failsafe mode(option) (activation of failsafe modeand R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Creep mode pushbutton . . . . . . . . 155Display control pushbutton . . . . . . 156Driver's area lighting switch . . . . . 156ADR pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Reading lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . 157Passenger-compartment lightingswitch positions I+II . . . . . . . . . . . 157Night lighting switch . . . . . . . . . . . 158Roof hatch pushbutton - air in/airout (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Attendant call system switch . . . . . 159“School bus operation” pushbutton(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Audible reverse warning featureswitch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Driver's power window pushbut-ton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Pushbutton for raising/lowering thebus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Normal-level pushbutton . . . . . . . . 160Passenger stop request systemenabling switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB III

Table of contents

Switch for the driver's windowheating/mirror heating . . . . . . . . . 161Windscreen heating switch(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Horn changeover switch (op-tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Central locking pushbutton for theleft-side luggage compartment . . . . 162Central locking pushbutton forthe right-side luggage compart-ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Kitchenette enabling switch(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Lavatory enabling switch (op-tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Switch for electrical circuits > 100V (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Seat microphone switch . . . . . . . . 164Pushbutton for hanging up theintercom (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Selection pushbutton for intercomin the driver's rest area/kitchenette(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Switch for deactivating pedal-activated continuous braking . . . . . 165Bus stop brake pushbutton(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Hazard warning lamps switch . . . . 166Door I pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Door II pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Bus stop brake emergency releaseswitch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167ADR button (accident data record-er) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Driver’s seat/passengerseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Grammer driver’s seat controlelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172ISRI 6860/875 driver's seatcontrols (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Operation of the jump seat . . . . . . 176Adjusting a passenger seat . . . . . . 177Using the driver's seat belt . . . . . . 178Operating the jump-seat seatbelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Passenger-compartment-seatingseat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Removing a seat squab . . . . . . . . . 179

Fitting a seat squab . . . . . . . . . . . 179Seat belt reminder display . . . . . . . 180Passenger seat service set . . . . . . 182

Transmission shift systems . . . . 185Transmission shift system safetyprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Operating the PSH (pneumatic shiftaid) transmission shift system . . . . 187Transmission shift system GO250-8 (system description) . . . . . . 187GO 250 - 8 gearshift unit (selectorlever) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Operation of the GO 250-8PowerShift transmission shiftsystem (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Operation of the GO 250-8PowerShift failsafe mode (op-tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Automatic speed limiter . . . . . . . . 209Automatic speed limiter (functiondescription) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

IV TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB

Table of contents

Variable speed limiter (Tem-poset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Activating the variable speed limiter(Temposet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Combined drive/brake cruisecontrol (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Activating combined drive/brakecruise control (option) . . . . . . . . . . 214

Heating/ventilation/air-condi-tioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Operating instructions for the air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . 218Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning(HVAC) control panel . . . . . . . . . . 220Manually regulating the blowerspeed in the driver's area . . . . . . . 223Preselecting the passenger-compartment temperature . . . . . . . 224Manually regulating the blowerspeed in the passenger compart-ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Activating the air-conditioning . . . . 227Activating air-recirculation modein the driver's area/passengercompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Activating the reheat function . . . . 228Activating the auxiliary heatingunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Programming auxiliary heatingswitch-on times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Activating a programmed auxiliaryheating switch-on time . . . . . . . . . 233Deactivating an activated switch-ontime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Programming the auxiliary heatingswitch-on duration . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Switches/controllers in the driver'srest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Opening/locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Door pushbutton in the driver'sarea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Anti-entrapment protection (revers-ing) as the doors are closed . . . . . 242Protection against entrapment inthe door opening direction . . . . . . 242Locking the exterior emergencyvalve at door 2 (option) . . . . . . . . . 243Operating/malfunction displays:doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Unlocking the door circuit at thefront right door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Unlocking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Unlocking the door circuit using theradio remote control (option) . . . . . 246Unlocking the luggage compartmentflaps using the pushbuttons in thedriver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Unlocking the luggage compartmentflaps using the remote control(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Locking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Locking door 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Locking using the radio remotecontrol (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Central locking system (option)(system description) . . . . . . . . . . . 251Operating/malfunction displays:central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Emergency operation of the doors(depressurising the doors using theemergency valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Emergency unlocking of the luggagecompartment flaps in the event of acompressed-air supply failure . . . . 257

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB V

Table of contents

Opening/closing the service coverunder the driver's window . . . . . . . 258Opening/closing the roof hatchesmanually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Emergency exit through emergencyoperation of the electric roofhatches (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

On-board kitchenette . . . . . . . . . 263General information . . . . . . . . . . . 266Instructions for operating amicrowave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Use for the intended purpose . . . . 269Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 269First use of the galley . . . . . . . . . . 270Switching on the galley . . . . . . . . . 271Filling the fresh water tank insidethe bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Filling the fresh water tank outsidethe bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Checking and cleaning the freshwater filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Drawing water from the watertap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Switching on the boiler . . . . . . . . . 276Descaling the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Switching on the sausage heat-er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Cleaning the sausage heater . . . . . 282Descaling the sausage heater . . . . 282Switching on the 40-cup coffeemachine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Brewing coffee in winter . . . . . . . . 287Cleaning the 40-cup coffeemachine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Switching on the 2-carafe filtersystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cupsof coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Brewing 2 carafes of coffee (40cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Manual operation of the 2-carafefilter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Descaling the coffee machine . . . . 292Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Draining the fresh water tank . . . . 293Draining the water lines . . . . . . . . 294Draining the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Draining the 40-cup coffeemachine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Draining the 2-carafe filter sys-tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Draining the siphon . . . . . . . . . . . 297Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Restoring boiler operation followinga malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Using the sausage heater againafter a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Using the 40-cup coffee machineagain after a malfunction . . . . . . . 302Using the 2-carafe filter systemagain after a malfunction . . . . . . . 303Other malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Switching off the galley . . . . . . . . . 305

On-board kitchenette (Eltes-an) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307General information . . . . . . . . . . . 308Use for the intended purpose . . . . 309Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 309Switching on the on-board kit-chenette (Eltesan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Drawing water from the tap(Eltesan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

VI TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB

Table of contents

Filling with fresh water (Eltes-an) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Troubleshooting (Eltesan) . . . . . . . 314Winter operation (Eltesan) . . . . . . . 315

On-board kitchenette (integratedin the lavatory cabin) . . . . . . . . . 317Safety precautions/generalinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Use for the intended purpose . . . . 320Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 320First use of the kitchenette . . . . . . 320Switching on the kitchenette . . . . . 321Filling the fresh water tank insidethe bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Filling the fresh water tank outsidethe bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Checking and cleaning the freshwater filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Drawing water from the watertap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Switching on the sausage heat-er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Cleaning the sausage heater . . . . . 328Descaling the sausage heater . . . . 328

Switching on the coffee ma-chine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cupsof coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Descaling the coffee machine . . . . 331Dispensing cups of hot water(alternative to coffee machine) . . . 332Boiler (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Setting the thermostat of the waterheater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Descaling the water heaterboiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Draining the fresh water tank . . . . 337Draining the water lines . . . . . . . . 337Draining the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Draining the siphon . . . . . . . . . . . 339Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Using the sausage heater againafter a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 342Using the coffee machine againafter a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Using the boiler (option) again aftera malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Other malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Switching off the galley . . . . . . . . . 346

Lavatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Enabling the lavatory . . . . . . . . . . 350Switchover between water (WC)and chemical (CC) operation(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Flushing the WC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353Drawing water at the handwashbasin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Filling the soap dispenser . . . . . . . 354Adding paper hand towels . . . . . . . 355Adding toilet paper . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Opening the basin undercabin-et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Changing waste bags . . . . . . . . . . 356Filling the fresh water storagetank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Emptying the fresh water storagetank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Emptying the solid waste contain-er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB VII

Table of contents

Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Checking the residual currentdevice for the 230 V socket(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Greasing the impeller of the CCpump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Overview of the operating, functionand malfunction display screen . . . 368Engine oil level display . . . . . . . . . 376Oil level alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Oil level information . . . . . . . . . . . 379Checking the engine oil level withthe dipstick (option) . . . . . . . . . . . 382Safety precautions for work carriedout in the engine compartment . . . 383Removing the drive belts (OM470) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Fitting the drive belts (OM470) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Checking the coolant level of theengine and heating system . . . . . . 389Tyres - operating safety androadworthiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Tyre condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Tyre age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Invisible tyre damage . . . . . . . . . . 392Tyre load capacity, top speed oftyres and types of tyres . . . . . . . . 393Retreaded tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Tyre pressures table 295/80 R22.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394On-screen tyre pressure monit-or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395Safety measures to be taken inthe event of a flat tyre or a wheelchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Fitting snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . 397Removing the spare wheel from thespare wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . 399Removing the wheel nut cover orwheel trim (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Removing the wheels . . . . . . . . . . 401Fitting the spare wheel . . . . . . . . . 406Fitting the wheel nut cover or wheeltrim (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Inflating tyres using the tyre inflatorconnection (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Pneumatic system test ports underthe driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Pneumatic test ports behind door2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414Other pneumatic test ports . . . . . . 416Charging the compressed-airsystem of another bus (option) . . . 417Operating the bus stop brake/drive-off lock emergency releaseswitch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419Operating/malfunction displays:steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Bleeding the fuel system using theelectric fuel pump (option) . . . . . . 420Replacing the water heater fuelfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421Electrical system safety precau-tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421General safety precautions forbatteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422Safety precautions for handlingbatteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422Measures required for the pre-vention of damage to buses orcomponents during electric weldingwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

VIII TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB

Table of contents

Electrical system (illustration shows15 RHD as an example) . . . . . . . . 426Battery isolating switch (withswitch-off authorisation LED) . . . . . 428Driver's area interior switchpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Main switch panel (under thedriver’s area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432Auxiliary switch panel . . . . . . . . . . 434PDB fuse switch panel . . . . . . . . . 436Ceiling switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . 438Electrical connection for theroof-mounted system (heating,ventilation, air-conditioning) . . . . . . 440Battery compartment . . . . . . . . . . 442Notes on fuse assignments . . . . . . 443Fuse assignment for the driver'sarea interior switch panel, TourismoRHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Fuse assignment for the mainswitch panel (under the driver'sarea), Tourismo RHD . . . . . . . . . . . 446Fuse assignment for the auxiliaryswitch panel, Tourismo RHD . . . . . 448Fuse assignment for auxiliary switchpanel with PDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Fuse assignment for the powerdistribution board (PDB), TourismoRHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456Fuse assignment for the ceilingswitch panel, Tourismo RHD . . . . . 460Fuse assignment for roof-moun-ted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Webasto) . . . 462Fuse assignment for roof-moun-ted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Konvekta) . . . 464Handling fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465Disconnecting vehicle batteries . . . 466Recharging vehicle batteries . . . . . 468Notes on jump-starting . . . . . . . . . 468Jump-start procedure . . . . . . . . . . 469Activation of on-board dia-gnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470Interpreting the on-board dia-gnostics screen display . . . . . . . . . 471Clearing the fault memory of theselected system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472Ending on-board diagnostics . . . . . 472Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472Adjusting the headlamps for drivingon the left or right (only in buseswith bi-xenon headlamps) . . . . . . . 477

Emergency operation of the doors(depressurising the doors using theemergency valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . 478Emergency unlocking of the luggagecompartment flaps in the event of acompressed-air supply failure . . . . 479Removing the exterior mirror, fittingthe emergency mirror (option) . . . . 481Emergency operation for heating indriver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482Emergency operation of thepassenger-compartment heat-ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483Maintenance tasks for the air-con-ditioning system in the bus (filtermaintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484Scopes of maintenance for the air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . 486Cleaning the heating system waterfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489Bleeding the coolant circuit for theheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496Overview of bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB IX

Table of contents

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

X TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB

Vehicle identification

M00_00-0316-01

The vehicle identification plate bearingthe vehicle identification number (VIN)and information regarding permissibleweights is located in the front doorway

Note:

It is very important to identify the vehicleexactly so that the correct “vehicle data”can be assigned. You will also need theVIN when ordering replacement parts andmaking technical enquiries.

M00_00-0315-01

No. Designation Value

1 Vehicle designa-tion

2 Headlamp basicsetting

3 Headlamp basicsetting

4 Vehicle Identi-fication Number(VIN)

5 Permissible grossvehicle weight

No. Designation Value

6 Permissible axleload for front axle

7 Permissible axleload for drivenaxle

8 Permissible axleload for trailingaxle

Decoding a vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) using NMB 632035 13 (xxxxxx) as an example:

NMB World-wide manufac-turer code

NMB MB Turkey

WEB EvoBus Germany

VF9 EvoBus France

VS9 EvoBus Spain


Vehicle identification

63203x Vehicle model designa-tion number

63203x Tourismo RHD

5 Vehicle length

5 12.96 m

6 12.14 m

7 13.99 m

1 Steering

1 Left-hand-drivevehicle

2 Right-hand-drivevehicle

3 Body type

3 Complete bus

M00_00-0082-01

The vehicle identification number (ar-rowed) is also marked on the skeletonin the forward section of the bus. It canbe accessed via the spare wheel cover(to open, use the lever in the entrance ofthe front right door).

2 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB

Safety

Table of contents

General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Storage space for hand luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Driver's rest area safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Windscreen wiper system safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Safety precautions for the air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Operation of auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10


Safety

General safety information


The use of symbols and theirmeanings

Safety precautions and other importantinformation are highlighted by symbols.

In addition to the instructions providedherein, all generally applicable safety andaccident prevention regulations mustalso be observed, e.g. in Germany, therules and regulations of the institutionsfor statutory accident insurance and pre-vention.

Instructions and information printed onthe packaging for components, tools andservice products must also be observed.

Where information and instructions areto be observed, it is assumed that theuser information is intended for personswho are suitably qualified to carry outthe tasks by nature of their education,training and experience.

These persons should, at the same time,be able to identify risks that may arise inthe undertaking of their tasks and takethe necessary measures to avoid them.

Meaning of symbols:

Note:

Notes about important additional informa-tion

Caution:

Warning notes about damage that mayoccur in the event of non-compliance

Danger.

Warning notes for risks to persons


Notes about environmental protectionmeasures

Reference to more detailed and addi-tional user information

Notes on vehicle safety

We recommend that you:

Use only genuine parts that areOMNIplus quality tested and con-version parts and accessories thathave been expressly approved byEvoBus for the bus model concernedin order to rule out the possibilityof jeopardising road safety andinvalidating the warranty and generaloperating permit. These parts havebeen specially tested for their safety,reliability and suitability.

You can obtain further information fromany OMNIplus Service Partner.

Operating safety

Important information:

Any work or modifications that havebeen carried out incorrectly on thebus may result in malfunctions.

Tampering with electronic compon-ents and their software may causemalfunctions. As electronic compon-ents are networked, these malfunc-


Safety


tions may also cause other, indir-ectly related systems to malfunction.These malfunctions may jeopardisethe operating safety and reliability ofthe bus.

Retrofitted electrical or electronicdevices must possess type-approvalcomplying with Directive 95/54/ECor ECE Directive 10/02.

Materials that are fitted in the busduring the course of installation, con-version or modification work andthat are subject to mandatory fire-testing requirements must satis-fy the requirements of EU Directive95/28/EC.

Materials and components of seatsand seat fixtures that are also fittedin the bus during the course of in-stallation, conversion or modificationwork must satisfy the requirementsof the following directives: 76/115/EEC as amended by 96/38/EC,74/408/EEC as amended by 96/37/EC, 77/541/EEC as amended by96/36/EC.

At the time of purchase or installa-tion, it must be checked that thesematerials and components have beencertified accordingly. The use of ma-terials or components that have notbeen granted the relevant certificatemay result in the operating permitbeing invalidated.

We recommend that you have workor modifications carried out by anOMNIplus Service Partner.

EU Directive 2001/85

Registration as class 1: city bus

Vehicles constructed with areas forstanding passengers, to allow fre-quent passenger movement.

Registration as class 2: interurban bus

Principally for the carriage of seatedpassengers. Designed to allow thecarriage of standing passengers inthe gangway and/or in an area whichdoes not exceed the space providedfor two double seats.

Registration as class 3: tourist coach

Exclusively for the carriage of seatedpassengers.

Important information for buses clas-sified in accordance with EU Directive2001/85 into class 2 and 3 (mixed ap-proval):

Note:

The operator of the bus is responsible forensuring that the bus is restored to thecondition consistent with the permissibletype of operation of the class concerned.

Note:

For instance, this means that, in the caseof a bus being used in accordance withclass 2, it is necessary to ensure that thebus is operated with seating having noaisle-side sideways adjustment.


Safety


Navigation and global positioningsystem

If your bus is equipped with a navigationsystem, please observe the followinginstructions and information:

Danger.

Please devote your attention primarily toroad and traffic conditions. Do not at-tempt to operate the navigation and pos-itioning system unless the bus is station-ary. Please bear in mind that your buswill cover a distance of 14 metres everysecond at a speed of only 50 km/h. Thenavigation system is unable to take intoconsideration the maximum load-bear-ing capacity of bridges or the requiredheadroom clearance for underpasses.The driver is responsible for checking theload-bearing capacity of bridges and head-room clearances encountered en route.

Operation of radio and mobilecommunications equipment

(e.g. telephone, two-way radio, fax ma-chine, etc.)

Danger.

Please devote your attention primarilyto road and traffic conditions. Do notoperate the display unit, radio or mobilecommunications equipment unless thetraffic situation permits this to be donesafely. Please bear in mind that your buswill cover a distance of 14 metres everysecond at a speed of only 50 km/h.

Danger.

Please observe local legal requirementsgoverning the use of mobile phones oron-board telephones/intercoms in force inthe country of vehicle operation.

Operation of mobile phones andtwo-way radios without an exterioraerial

We advise against making or receivingtelephone calls in buses not equippedwith an exterior aerial as the operationof radio transmitters, which include butare not limited to radio telephones (mo-bile phones), may cause inadequately

shielded equipment (cardiac pacemakersincluded) to malfunction.

Note:

If a mobile phone, radio system or faxmachine is retrofitted in the bus in amanner that does not comply with EvoBusinstallation specifications, the operatingpermit for the bus could be invalidated(EU Directive 95/54/EC).

Note:

Older peripherals (e.g. ticket-printing ma-chines, ticket-cancelling machines, destin-ation displays, etc.) that are still used innew buses must comply with the technic-al requirements of EC Directive 72/245EEC.

Danger.

Please observe local legal requirementsgoverning the use of mobile phones oron-board telephones/intercoms in force inthe country of vehicle operation.


Safety


Stickers

There are various warning stickers af-fixed to your bus. These are intended tomake you and others aware of variousdangers. Therefore, do not remove anywarning stickers unless it is expresslystated on the sticker that you may doso.

Danger.

If you remove warning stickers, this couldresult in you or other persons failing torecognise dangers. You or others couldbe injured as a result.

Data stored in the vehicle

A host of electronic components in yourvehicle contain a data memory. Thesedata memories store information,temporarily or permanently, relating to

Vehicle condition

Events

Faults

These items of technical informationgenerally document the state of acomponent, module, system or theenvironment. These could be, forexample:

Operating states of system compon-ents. These include fill levels, etc.

Status messages relating to thevehicle and its individual compon-ents. These include, for example,wheel rotation speed/driving speed,deceleration, lateral acceleration, ac-celerator pedal position.

Malfunctions and defects in import-ant system components. These in-clude lights, brakes, etc.

Responses and operating states ofthe vehicle in specific driving situ-ations. These include, for example,triggering of an airbag, interventionof stability control systems.

Environmental states. These includeoutside temperature, etc.

The data are exclusively technical innature and can be used for

assisting the detection and rectifica-tion of faults and defects,

analysing vehicle functions, e.g. afteran accident,

optimising vehicle functions.

Motion profiles on driven routes cannotbe generated from these data. Wheneveryou arrange for a particular vehicle ser-vice, these items of technical informationcan be read out from the event and faultdata memories.

Services include, for example:

Repairs

Customer service processes

Warranty claims

Quality assurance

This read-out is performed by employ-ees in the ServiceNetwork (includingmanufacturers) with the use of specialdiagnostic testers. They enable you toobtain further information as and whennecessary. After faults have been recti-


Safety


fied, the information in the fault memoryis cleared or continuously overwritten.During use of the vehicle, certain situ-ations could arise in which these tech-nical data could become personal datawhen combined with other information -where applicable under the direction ofan independent expert.

Examples include:

Accident logs

Damage to the vehicle

Witness statements

Other auxiliary functions that arecontractually agreed with the customersimilarly permit the outgoingcommunication of vehicle data from thevehicle. Example:

FleetBoard telematics system

Washing the outside of the bus inan automatic vehicle wash

M88_00-0004-01

Before the bus is washed, make surethat the roof hatches, driver's windowand the doors are closed. Set the heat-ing/ventilation/air-conditioning systemto air-recirculation mode (Smog button).

Before the bus is washed, fold both in-tegral mirrors inwards towards the wind-screen by means of the hinge pin on themirror arm.

After the washing process, fold the integ-ral mirrors outwards again.

Remove any attachment parts that maybe fitted (e.g. satellite receiver on theroof) before the bus is washed.


Safety

Storage space for hand luggage

Storage space for hand luggage

T68_00-0018-31

The storage spaces above the passengerseats are suitable for light hand luggageitems only.

Danger.

Occupants may be injured if the bus isbraked sharply, changes direction sud-denly or is involved in an accident dueto objects being thrown around the bus.Heavy or hard objects should thereforenot be carried inside the bus without be-ing secured.

Driver's rest area safety precau-tions

The driver's rest area must only be usedby the bus driver (second driver).

The on-board telephone may only beused by the driver in accordance withlegal requirements. Observe the legalrequirements of the country concerned.

Windscreen wiper system safetyprecautions

M54.00-2004-71

Danger.

RISK OF INJURY. The battery isolatingswitch (01S01) must always be switchedoff before any work is carried out on thewindscreen wiper system (wiper bladecleaning, replacement of wiper blades orwiper motor etc.).


Safety

Safety precautions for the air-conditioning system

Safety precautions for the air-conditioning system

Air-conditioning systems that are op-erated with refrigerant R 134 a are la-belled with appropriate stickers and/orplates on the compressor.

Never mix R 134 a refrigerant and thecorresponding Triton SE 55 refrigeratoroil with other products.

In accordance with current good engin-eering practices, it is prohibited to allowrefrigerant to escape into the environ-ment when operating, servicing or de-commissioning air-conditioning systems.

Refrigerants and refrigerator oils mustbe disposed of or recycled separately bytype and nature.

Only persons having the relevant andnecessary specialist knowledge, technic-al equipment and official approval (byhealth and safety inspectorate, local au-thority, TÜV or equivalent) are permittedto carry out maintenance work on air-conditioning systems and take back refri-gerants and oils.

The operator must maintain a logbookauditing the consumption of refrigerantand refrigerator oils.

Danger.

In automatically controlled air-conditioningsystems, the ventilation blowers of con-denser or evaporator units may start upat any time. Therefore, always switchthe ignition starter switch to OFF be-fore any cleaning work is carried out.Do not reach into the fan blades or fanrollers. Avoid any contact with refriger-ant as there is a risk of frostbite. Treataffected skin areas as for frostbite, andseek medical attention immediately. Carryout maintenance and repair tasks with theengine switched off whenever possible.Keep a safe distance from moving parts(e.g. belt drive) when the engine is run-ning.

Operation of auxiliary heating

Danger.

Risk of fire and burns. There is a risk offires and burns due to the high exhausttemperatures and the hot exhaust pipefor the auxiliary heating. For this reason,do not stop or park the bus over ignitablematerials (e.g. grass) when the auxiliaryheating is in operation, has recently beenin operation or has been operated by theimmediate heating button/preset clock.

Danger.

Risk of poisoning and suffocation. Theauxiliary heating must not be used in en-closed spaces such as garages or work-shops due to the risk of poisoning andsuffocation. It must also not be used intimer or preselection mode.


Safety

Operation of auxiliary heating

Danger.

Risk of explosion. The auxiliary heatingmust be switched off at filling stationsand fuel dispensing systems due to therisk of explosion.

Danger.

Risk of fire. The auxiliary heating mustremain switched off in places where ignit-able vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g.in the vicinity of filling stations, fuel, coal,sawdust and grain stores or similar).



GeneralTable of contents

Preparation for the journey - daily tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Preparation for the journey - weekly tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Preparation for the journey - monthly tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Additional maintenance tasks dependent on bus use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

General bus care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17


GeneralPreparation for the journey - daily tasks

Preparation for the journey - dailytasks

Check the windscreen washer fluidlevel and test the windscreen washersystem and windscreen wipers.

Check the fuel level for the engineand water heater

Danger.

Switch off the engine and auxiliary heat-ing before refuelling.

Check the AdBlue additive level inthe BlueTec exhaust gas cleaningsystem

Check the electrical system, payingparticular attention to the headlamps,turn signals, tail lamps, brake lampsand licence plate lamps.

Note:

Under certain weather and operating con-ditions, moisture may form on the insideof the headlamps and other lights whenthe bus is stationary. This does not in-dicate a fault or defect. The ventilationopenings in the headlamps allow thismoisture to evaporate soon after the bushas pulled away.

Check the luggage compartmentflaps for secure locking

Check the emergency exits

Insert the driver card.

Note:

The indicator lamp in the tachographlights up if no driver card is inserted.

Check that the emergency equip-ment is accessible and complete, e.g.first-aid kit, fire extinguisher, warningtriangle, emergency hammer for sidewindows, jack.

Check the position of the rear-viewmirrors, clean the mirrors, test themirror heating.

Check tyre pressures and tyre con-dition (including the spare wheel).Check that the wheel nuts are firmlyseated.

M40_00-0115-71

Check wheel hubs (1) on all wheelsfor leaks inside and out (visualcheck).


GeneralPreparation for the journey - weekly tasks

Note:

If the wheel hubs are leaking, there maybe grease or oil residue on the tyresthemselves or deposits on the parkingarea on which the bus is standing. Con-sult an OMNIplus Service Partner in theevent of a leak.

Preparation for the journey - weeklytasks

Check the coolant level in the cool-ing system and top it up if necessary.Check the corrosion inhibitor/anti-freeze concentration each time thecoolant has been topped up and cor-rect if necessary.

Note:

See the Specifications for ServiceProducts

Check the oil level in the hydraulicsteering system and top it up if ne-cessary.

Caution:

If the oil level is low, have the steeringsystem checked at an authorised special-ist workshop.

Check the belt tension of all beltdrives.

Carry out a visual check to ensurethere are no leaks in the engine,transmission, driven axle, steeringor the cooling and heating systems.

Drain the fuel prefilter in the enginecompartment.

Note:

Refer to the “Practical advice” section.

Check the acid level in the starterbatteries (only on buses with lead-acid batteries).

Danger.

Observe the safety precautions in the“Practical advice” section.

Check the seat belts (belt arrester).Check the belt straps for damage(visual check).


GeneralPreparation for the journey - monthly tasks

Preparation for the journey -monthly tasks

Check the residual current devicefor the 230 V socket (option) in thelavatory.

Additional maintenance tasksdependent on bus use

The bus operator must plan furthermaintenance tasks for the heating/ventilation/air-conditioning system(driver’s area and passenger com-partment) in addition to those indic-ated in the Maintenance Record.

Note:

Refer to the “Practical advice” section.

General bus care and maintenanceCarry out the work specified in theMaintenance Record

Caution:

Regular maintenance of the chassis anddrive train is essential to maintainingthe operating safety and roadworthinessof the bus. The time intervals and thescope of work required are specified inthe Maintenance Record supplied with thebus.

Caution:

It is strongly recommended that the spe-cified maintenance intervals be observed.


GeneralCare and cleaning

Note:

Warranty claims based on our terms andconditions of sale and delivery may berejected if the periodic maintenance taskshave not been carried out at the specifieddistances (odometer readings) or times.Have confirmation of the completed workrecorded in the Maintenance Record byan OMNIplus Service Partner.

Care and cleaning

You will find further instructions forand notes on cleaning and caring foryour bus in the “Operation” section

Note:

The following stipulations for exteriorcleaning must be observed: Use a suffi-cient amount of fresh water. Dry rubbingbetween washing brushes and the vehiclemust not be allowed to occur. Precleanheavily soiled components. The polishingof lighting equipment with commerciallyavailable care products is not permitted.The use of polyethylene fibres as a brushmaterial is not permitted. Recommenda-tion: Use brushes made with textile fibresor foam.



Operation

Table of contents

Running-in guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Loading a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Ball hitch trailer coupling and open-jaw trailer coupling (detachable) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Connecting the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Trailer coupling maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Refuelling (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

AdBlue® service product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Filling with AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39


Operation

Table of contents

Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Diesel particulate filter regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Starting regeneration of the diesel particulate filter manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Operating/malfunction displays: fuel system/exhaust gas cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Function description: accident data recorder (ADR) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Brake system safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Braking and stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Brakes with anti-locking protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Applying the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Releasing the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Emergency braking in the event of failure of both brake circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

EBS brake system (system description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Acceleration skid control (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55


Operation

Table of contents

Operating/malfunction displays: brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Activating the slip increase function of ASR (acceleration skid control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Operating/malfunction displays: ABS/ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (function description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Deactivating the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Operating/malfunction displays: brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Operating 230/400 V systems (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Fitting the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Swivelling the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Additional operating instructions for the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Note on maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Care/cleaning of light-alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Care and cleaning of covers, upholstery and ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77


Operation

Table of contents

Care/cleaning of fabric covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Care/cleaning of micro-fibre covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Care/cleaning of leather covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81


Operation

Running-in guideline

Running-in guideline

Running in the chassis and drive train

Note:

The way in which the chassis and drivetrain of the new bus are treated duringthe first 3,000 miles (5,000 km) is crit-ical to the bus' future performance andservice life.

Note:

The load to which the bus is subjectedduring this period should be increasedonly gradually. The maintenance and lub-rication tasks specified in the Mainten-ance Record should be carried out con-scientiously.

Caution:

Do not place the engine under full loadduring the running-in period. Up to1,200 miles (2,000 km): run in withcare. Drive at no higher than 3/4 of themaximum rpm in each gear. After 1,200miles (2,000 km): slowly increase to the

economic rpm in each gear. During therunning-in period, do not drive the bus forlong distances at the same road speed =same rpm. Varying engine speeds andtherefore varying loads demanded of theentire drive train are favourable to therunning-in of the bus.

Starting the engine

The parking brake must be applied.Transmission in neutral.

Note:

Do not depress the clutch pedal whilestarting the engine.

Note:

At outside temperatures of below -20 °C,preheat the engine with the water heater(see heating/ventilation/air-conditioningcontrol panel).

Note:

The bus is equipped with an immobiliser.The engine cannot be started without oneof the authorised keys.


Operation

Starting the engine

M54_00-0083-01

Turn the ignition switch to position2, the bus carries out an indicatorlamp check (all indicator lamps mustlight up briefly), then turn the igni-tion switch to position 3 but do notdepress the accelerator pedal.

If necessary, cancel the startingprocedure after a maximum of 15seconds and wait for about 1 minutebefore repeating the starting proced-ure. Turn the key fully back beforemaking a further attempt to start theengine.

Note:

After a maximum of 3 starting attempts,wait (about 15 minutes) before tryingagain.

If this icon appears on the screen inconjunction with a yellow warninglevel malfunction and a warning sig-nal sounds, you have made 5 startingattempts using an invalid key. Theimmobiliser has been activated.

Note:

Use a valid key or valid spare key.

Note:

Each further starting attempt with an in-valid key increases the waiting period by1 further minute.

Note:

For emergencies, we recommend that youalways carry a spare key to which youhave access at all times.

Release the key when the enginestarts.

Caution:

It is not permitted to increase the enginespeed while the “Oil pressure too low”symbol is shown on the display screen.If the “Oil pressure too low” symbol ap-pears for more than 10 seconds, turn offthe engine immediately and establish thecause.

Observe the screen display: if mal-function messages appear, determinethe cause and rectify it.


Operation

Driving

Danger.

If there is insufficient pressure in thecompressed-air supply system (reservoirpressure operating displays remain on thescreen), a warning signal sounds until therequired pressure has been reached. Donot release the parking brake until thereis sufficient operating pressure.

Driving


Never warm up the engine while the busis stationary. Instead, drive off and runthe engine at moderate speeds.

Note:

The engine should not be placed underfull load until it has reached normal op-erating temperature (75 °C - 90 °C de-pending on operating conditions and theoutside temperature).

Danger.

All doors must be unlocked before thebus is driven off.

Danger.

The freedom of movement of the ped-als must not be restricted. The operat-ing safety and roadworthiness of the buswould otherwise be at risk. Objects couldfall and get caught between the pedals ifyou were to accelerate or brake suddenly,with the result that you would no longerbe able to brake, depress the clutch ped-al or accelerate. You could cause an acci-dent and put yourself and other people indanger.

Check the freedom of movement ofthe pedals

Danger.

Where floormats and carpets are fitted,ensure that they are safely securedagainst slipping and that there issufficient space for the pedals.


Operation

Stopping the engine

Danger.

Do not put any objects in the driver'sfootwell.

Danger.

Stow and secure all loose objects insuch a way that they cannot get intothe driver's footwell when the bus is inmotion.

Always pull away in 1st gear at 600 -800 rpm.

Danger.

Test the function of the service brakeimmediately after pulling away.

Observe the rev counter while driv-ing.

Note:

Keep within the economical operatingrange. Make sure that the engine speeddoes not enter the danger zone (redzone).

Danger.

If a warning buzzer sounds when you areshifting gear, too low a gear has beenselected. Make sure that you keep theclutch pedal depressed and select a suit-able gear for the current speed.

Stopping the engine

M54.00-2270-71

Stop the bus - Shift the transmis-sion into neutral - Apply the park-ing brake. Turn the ignition starterswitch from position 2 (drive posi-tion) back to position 1.


Operation

Towing and tow-starting

Danger.

There is a risk of fire and burns due tothe high exhaust temperatures and thehot exhaust pipe for the auxiliary heating.For this reason, avoid parking the buswhere ignitable material (e.g. dry grass,leaves, etc.) is in close proximity to theexhaust system, engine and auxiliary heat-ing exhaust system.

Note:

Before you switch off the engine, allowit to continue running at idling speed forapproximately 1-2 minutes (to allow theexhaust turbochargers to cool down if thecoolant temperature is high or if you havebeen driving at full engine output (e.g. onhilly roads)).


Danger.

Only authorised specialists (recovery ser-vice) are permitted to tow away broken-down buses. The rules and regulations inthe country concerned must be observed.

Danger.

The ignition switch of the vehicle beingtowed must always be in position 1. Thesteering lock must not be engaged. Fail-ure to comply with this guideline couldresult in the steering locking.

Danger.

In buses with the Electronic Stability Pro-gram (ESP), this function must be deac-tivated without exception - refer to the“Operation” section

Caution:

Special measures are required in orderto protect the transmission if the bus isto be towed: for safety reasons the pro-peller shaft must always be removed. Thepropeller shaft securing screws at theaxle flange must be removed and thoseat the transmission flange secured againstdisplacement.

For notes on safety and operation re-lating to the trailer coupling, refer to the“Operation” section.


Operation


M00_00-0358-71

Front/rear towing hitch:

Note:

To tow the bus, there are some towingjaws in the vehicle tool kit that have tobe screwed into locating bore (1) providedbehind the front flap or in the rear mem-ber.

Note:

For notes on charging the compressed-airsystem of a bus to be towed, refer to the“Practical advice” section.

Screw the towing coupling into locat-ing bore (1).

M00_00-0340-71

Insert the rigid tow bar into towingcoupling (3) and secure with thelinchpin. Turn linchpin (1) towardsthe rear until it engages in lock (2).

Note:

Linchpin (1) must always remain engagedin lock (2) when the bus is being towed.


Operation


Removal of the rigid tow bar in re-verse order

Note:

Pull lock (2) up slightly in order to disen-gage linchpin (1) towards the front.

Towing with a raised front axle

Danger.

The ignition switch must not be switchedto position 2 while the front axle israised. The wheels on the driven axlemay lock. Failure to comply could resultin brake intervention by the ABS/ASRsystem, which could cause the rear axleto skid.

Tow-starting (only for manual trans-mission)

Note:

The bus cannot be tow-started unless thebatteries are fully charged (at least 21 V).

Caution:

The bus must not be tow-started unlessthe batteries are connected. Turn theignition switch to the drive position. De-press the clutch pedal fully. Select 2ndor 3rd gear. Tow-start the bus, releasethe clutch pedal and depress the acceler-ator pedal until the engine is running.

Note:

Vehicles with automated manual transmis-sion (option) cannot be tow-started.

Note:

For notes on the jump-start procedure,refer to the “Practical advice” section.

The following warning must be ob-served in the event of towing.

Caution:

There is a risk of damage to the left-hand exterior mirror caused by the towingvehicle as the bus is being towed throughtight left-hand bends. There is a risk ofdamage to the bus caused by the tow baras the bus is being towed through tightright-hand bends. Observe the informa-tion/instructions on the sticker on thetow bar.


Operation

Trailer towing

Trailer towing

Danger.

Proceed with utmost care and cautionwhen hitching up the trailer. Make surethat no persons are present between thetrailer and vehicle as the vehicle is be-ing reversed into engagement with thetrailer. The overrun brake of a trailer canrebound uncontrollably when in overrunmode. To reduce the risk of serious injur-ies, do not uncouple any trailer that hasan overrun brake if the trailer has over-run and the overrun brake is applied. Atrailer that has been coupled to the tow-ing vehicle incorrectly could break away.A correctly coupled trailer must stand ho-rizontal behind the vehicle. Use a trailerwith a height-adjustable drawbar if ne-cessary. The maximum permissible nose-weight and rear axle load of the bus mustnot be exceeded.

Note:

Observe the operating instructions issuedby the trailer manufacturer.

Note:

If the trailer coupling is a detachablecoupling, the operating instructions is-sued by the trailer coupling manufacturermust be observed.

Note:

Trailers having a maximum gross weightof higher than 3.5 t require that appro-priate body reinforcement measures beimplemented during vehicle manufacture.In this case, ESP (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) would no longer be available (evenwith no trailer coupled).

Note:

It is prohibited to a couple a turntabletrailer or any trailer equipped with ESP.


Operation

Loading a trailer

Loading a trailer

Observe the following values whenloading the trailer:

the permissible gross weight of thetrailer

the permissible trailer load of thevehicle and the trailer tow hitch

the permissible noseweight

the permissible rear axle load of thetowing vehicle

the permissible gross weight of boththe towing vehicle and the trailer

The definitive maximum permissible val-ues are listed in the vehicle documentsand on the identification plates of thetrailer tow hitch, trailer and vehicle. Ifthere are discrepancies between any ofthese sources, always consider the low-est value to be valid.

Driving with a trailer

The following changes in handlingcharacteristics can be observed whendriving with a trailer attached:

acceleration and gradient-climbingcapability are reduced

braking distance is increased

sensitivity to crosswinds is increased

directional stability is adversely af-fected

fuel consumption is increased

Avoid driving a vehicle/trailer combina-tion faster than 80 km/h, even in coun-tries where higher speeds are permitted.

Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front than you would whendriving without a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking where possible.Brake gently at first to allow the trail-er to run on and quickly increase yourbraking force.

If the trailer begins to swing from side toside:

release the accelerator pedal

do not countersteer

brake if necessary

do not attempt to draw the vehicle/trailer combination out by accelerat-ing

The gradient-climbing capabilities from astandstill refer to sea level. When driv-ing in mountainous areas, you shouldbear in mind that the power output ofthe engine and thus its gradient-climb-ing capability decrease with increasingaltitude.

On long and steep downhill gradients,select a lower gear/shift range in goodtime. This makes use of the braking ef-fect of the engine, reducing the amountof braking effort required to maintain asafe speed. The load on the brake sys-tem is therefore reduced, which helps toprevent the brakes from overheating andwearing too rapidly. If additional brak-ing effort is required, do not depress the


Operation

Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed) (option)

brake pedal with one continuous press,but operate it at intervals.

Danger.

While the vehicle is in motion, never keepthe brake pedal continuously depressed,e.g. by allowing the brakes to rub byresting your foot on the pedal. This wouldcause the brake system to overheat, in-crease the braking distance and may res-ult in a complete loss of braking effect.

Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed)(option)

Note:


Secure the trailer against rollingaway.

Reverse the vehicle until the towingball on the trailer drawbar is posi-tioned precisely above the ball endon the vehicle.

Hitch the trailer as described in theoperating instructions issued by thetrailer manufacturer.

Ball hitch trailer coupling and open-jaw trailer coupling (detachable)(option)

Note:


Note:

Observe the operating instructions issuedby the trailer coupling manufacturer.

Secure the trailer against rollingaway.

The trailer coupling is fitted to themounting on the end cross member.

To gain access to the mounting, re-move the cover from the bumper andstow the cover inside the bus.


Operation

Connecting the power supply

M00_00-0512-71

Installation: slide catch (2) back-wards and hold in this position. Turncover (3) through approximately 30°and remove. Fit the trailer couplingin reverse order.

Note:

Removal in reverse order. The trailercoupling must be removed whenever itis not in use.

Connecting the power supply

Note:

Before connecting the cable, check thatthe voltage of the consumers on the trail-er is the same as the voltage of the con-sumers on the towing vehicle.

To gain access to the trailer socket,remove the cover from the bumperand stow the cover inside the bus.

Insert the trailer connector into thesocket on the bus.

Note:

Route the cable in such a way that ityields to any movement without tension,kinking or friction, including movementsassociated with cornering.

Check that the lights on the trailerare clean and working correctly.

Trailer coupling maintenance

Clean the trailer coupling and lubric-ate it with multipurpose grease.

Check the bolts securing the trailercoupling to the end cross memberfor firm seating and retighten them ifnecessary.


Operation

Refuelling (diesel fuel)

Refuelling (diesel fuel)

The vehicle has a two-tank system fittedto the front of the front axle. The fueltanks are interconnected through theirbases by a fuel line. The bus can berefuelled from either side. If the fueltanks on your bus are interconnected, itis necessary to remove the fuel cap fromeach of the fuel tanks.

The addition of flow improvers is notpermitted.

Switch off the engine and auxiliary heat-ing before refuelling. Park the bus on alevel surface.

Cleanliness is of utmost importancewhen refuelling. Do not leave cottonrags or cloths in the vicinity of the openfiller neck.

Caution:

Refuel using only commercially available,sulphur-free diesel fuel complying withEuropean standard EN 590 as revisedfrom 2010 onwards (max. 0.001 % sul-phur by weight). Fuels containing morethan 0.001 % sulphur by weight or other

types of fuel such as marine diesel fuel,heating oils or fatty acid methyl esterFAME (biodiesel fuel) are not permitted.These types of fuel would cause irrevers-ible damage to the engine and BlueTec®6exhaust gas aftertreatment system andconsiderably reduce expected service life.

Danger.

Risk of injury and explosion. Fuel ishighly flammable. Fire, naked flames andsmoking are therefore prohibited whenfuel is being handled.

Danger.

Before refuelling, switch off the auxiliaryheating to prevent fuel vapours from ig-niting on the auxiliary heating exhaustsystem.

Danger.

Fuel is toxic and harmful to health. Forthis reason, make sure that the fuel doesnot come into contact with skin, eyesor clothing, that you do not inhale fuelvapours and that children are kept awayfrom the fuel.

Danger.

If you or others have come into contactwith fuel: In case of contact with theeyes, rinse them immediately and copi-ously with clean water and seek medicalattention. Clean affected areas of skinimmediately with soap and water. Imme-diately change out of clothing that hascome into contact with fuel. If fuel hasbeen swallowed, seek medical attentionimmediately.


Operation

BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning system


If handled improperly, fuels constitute ahazard to health and the environment.Fuels must not be allowed to enter thesewerage system, surface water, ground-water or soil.

BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaningsystem

M47_00-0055-71

The BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning sys-tem essentially comprises a supply tank,a catalytic converter and an AdBlue®metering system. It is monitored andcontrolled electronically. Pollutants inthe exhaust gas are converted into en-vironmentally friendly substances by theaddition of AdBlue® and the catalyticconverter integrated into the silencer.

The illustration above shows filler open-ing (1) for the AdBlue® supply tank (nextto the diesel tank).

Note:

AdBlue® is consumed at a rate of ap-proximately 3 % of the rate of diesel fuelconsumption. It is recommended that theAdBlue® supply tank also be refilled atevery regular refuelling stop.

To function correctly, the BlueTec® ex-haust gas cleaning system requires theaddition of a reducing agent (AdBlue®).The addition of AdBlue® does not formpart of the routine scope of bus main-tenance – it is the responsibility of thevehicle operators to ensure that the Ad-Blue® supply tank is regularly replen-ished. Filling and operating the bus withAdBlue® is mandatory for compliancewith emission regulations and is thusone of the conditions for the road trafficapproval of the bus. The road traffic ap-proval of the bus will be invalidated ifthe bus is operated without AdBlue®. Itwould then be against the law to operatethe bus on public roads. In some coun-tries, operation of the bus without Ad-Blue® may be considered to be a crimin-al offence or a violation of administrative


Operation

BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning system

law punishable by fine. Support in thepurchase or operation of the bus, i.e. taxrelief, road tax, may also be invalidatedretrospectively. This may be the caseboth in the country in which the vehicleis registered and in other countries inwhich the vehicle is operated.

Danger.

It is essential that work relevant to safetyor work on safety-related systems be car-ried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Danger.

Always have maintenance work carriedout at a qualified specialist workshopwhich has the necessary knowledge andtools.

Note:

AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of ap-proximately -11 °C. The bus is equippedwith an AdBlue® preheating system asstandard. Winter operation is thereforeguaranteed, even at temperatures of be-low -11 °C.


AdBlue® is biologically degradable. Un-less it is handled properly, however, Ad-Blue® constitutes an environmental haz-ard. Do not allow AdBlue® to enter thesewerage system, surface water, ground-water or soil in significant volumes.

Danger. Risk of poisoning andinjury.

AdBlue® is not classified as a hazardoussubstance by German regulations govern-ing hazardous substances. Nevertheless,certain points should be observed whenhandling AdBlue®.

The AdBlue® line system and the systemcomponents connected to it are pres-

surised while the engine is warm. Thereis a risk of scalding from hot AdBlue®spraying out if the line system is suddenlyopened. There is also the risk of skin ir-ritation or damage to the eyes if AdBlue®comes into contact with the skin or eyes.

Wear gloves

Wear protective clothing

Wear safety goggles

Work on the exhaust gas aftertreat-ment system should not be com-menced until approximately 4 minuteshave passed as individual lines con-tinue to be flushed even after theengine has been switched off.

Switch the ignition starter switch tothe “OFF” position and remove thekey before work is carried out on theSCR system.

Allow the AdBlue® line system tocool down

Open line connections and systemcomponent covers/caps slowly.

Capture any AdBlue® that escapes ina suitable container and dispose ofit in an environmentally responsiblemanner.


Operation

AdBlue® service product

Do not pour AdBlue® into drinks con-tainers.

Wipe up any spilled AdBlue®, espe-cially as there is a risk of slipping.

AdBlue® collected in this way mustnot be poured back into the AdBlue®supply tank.

Rinse affected areas of skin copiouslywith clean water.

Quickly change out of clothing thathas come into contact with the sub-stance.

In case of contact with the eyes,rinse them immediately and copiouslywith clean water and seek medicalattention if necessary.

If AdBlue® enters the mouth or isswallowed, rinse the mouth out withclean water and then drink plenty ofwater.

Seek medical attention if symptomspersist.


AdBlue® is a non-flammable, colourless,odourless water-soluble liquid.

Caution:

Use only AdBlue® complying with DIN70070/ISO 22241. Special additives arenot permitted.

Caution:

If, during a top-up, AdBlue® comes intocontact with painted or aluminium sur-faces, rinse down these surfaces with wa-ter immediately.

Note:

Avoid inhaling ammonia vapours. Fill theAdBlue® reservoir only in well-ventilatedareas.

Note:

AdBlue® should not be swallowed or al-lowed to come into contact with skin,eyes or clothing. Keep AdBlue® out ofthe reach of children.

Note:

If you do come into contact with Ad-Blue®, observe the following: Wash Ad-Blue® off skin immediately with soap andwater. If AdBlue® gets into the eyes,rinse them immediately and copiouslywith clean water. Seek medical atten-tion without undue delay. If you haveswallowed AdBlue®, immediately rinseyour mouth out with water and then drinkplenty of water. Seek medical atten-tion without undue delay. Change outof clothing contaminated with AdBlue®immediately.

Properties of AdBlue® at high temperat-ures


Operation


Note:

Ammonia vapours may be released as aproduct of the decomposition of AdBlue®if the content of the AdBlue® tank heatsup to over 50 °C for a lengthy period(e.g. as a consequence of direct sunlight).

Note:

Ammonia vapours have an acrid odour.For this reason, you should avoid inhalingany ammonia vapours that may escapewhen you remove the AdBlue® filler cap.Ammonia vapours are an irritant mainly toskin, eyes and mucous membranes.

Properties of AdBlue® at low temperat-ures

Note:


AdBlue® additives

Caution:

Do not add any additives to AdBlue®. Donot dilute AdBlue® with tap water. Doingso could destroy the exhaust gas clean-ing system. Damage to the exhaust gascleaning system caused by additives/tapwater will invalidate the warranty.

Storage

Caution:

For the storage of AdBlue®, use only con-tainers made from polypropylene, poly-ethylene or high-alloy CrNi steels or Mo-CrNi steels complying with DIN EN10088-1/2/3. Containers made of aluminium,copper, cupriferous alloys and non-alloyedor galvanised steels are not suitable forthe storage of AdBlue®. If stored in suchcontainers, AdBlue® could dissolve outconstituents of these metals and des-troy the exhaust gas cleaning system.The vehicle warranty will be invalidatedif damage to the exhaust gas cleaningsystem is found to have been caused

by constituents dissolved out of non-ap-proved storage containers.

Disposal of AdBlue®

Note:

Observe country-specific legislation andrequirements governing the disposal ofAdBlue®.

AdBlue® purity

Note:

It is prohibited to return to the tank anyAdBlue® that has been pumped out, e.g.during a repair, because the purity of theliquid would no longer be guaranteed.


Operation

Filling with AdBlue®

Filling with AdBlue®

Note:

An accidental filling of the AdBlue® sup-ply tank with diesel fuel and vice versa isprevented by various technical precaution-ary measures.

Note:

It is recommended that the AdBlue® sup-ply tank also be refilled at every regularrefuelling stop.

Caution:

Use only AdBlue® complying with DIN 70070. Special additives are not permitted.

Caution:

If, during a top-up, AdBlue® comes intocontact with painted or aluminium sur-faces, rinse down these surfaces with wa-ter immediately.

Note:


M54.00-2057-71

Read AdBlue® fill level (1)

Note:

To read the AdBlue® level, call up therelevant operating display using the dis-play control pushbutton on the instrumentpanel.


Operation

Diesel particulate filter

M54.00-2056-71

If the level in the AdBlue® supplytank falls to approximately 33 %, icon(1) appears on the screen to remindthe driver that an AdBlue® top-up isdue.

The driver is informed by an icon onthe display screen (see illustration)in conjunction with a yellow alert ifthe AdBlue® supply tank runs emptyor if there is a malfunction in theBlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning sys-tem. In this event, it is necessary totop up the AdBlue® level immedi-ately or remedy the fault.

M47_00-0055-71

Add AdBlue® to supply tank (1).

Note:

AdBlue® supply tank (1) is located nextto the diesel tank.

Note:

An accidental filling of the AdBlue® sup-ply tank with diesel fuel and vice versa isprevented by various technical precaution-ary measures.


Under normal circumstances, automaticregeneration of the diesel particulate fil-ter is sufficient to avoid heavy soot load-ing of the filter. However, if the bus ispredominantly driven short distances orwith the engine under low load, it mightnot be possible for automatic regenera-tion to finish successfully.

An indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster warns that the diesel particu-late filter is nearing a high load state andindicates that appropriate action needsto be taken.

The on-board computer gives promptwarnings of emission-relevant malfunc-tions or user errors and displays theirrespective priority by means of yellow orred alerts.

If these messages are disregarded, thereis a risk of engine power output beingreduced and a need to exchange thediesel particulate filter prematurely.


Operation


Note:

As long as no flashing yellow or constantred malfunction alert appears, it can alsobe sufficient to alter the load profile (e.g.take the bus for a drive on the motor-way) in order to ensure that automaticregeneration of the diesel particulate filterfinishes successfully.

Note:

In the event of a malfunction in theBlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatmentsystem, have the system checkedand repaired at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Danger.

Exhaust fumes are produced during theautomatic and manual regeneration pro-cesses. If you were to inhale these ex-haust fumes, you could suffer harmfuleffects such as poisoning. For this reas-on, the bus should always be parked out-doors. If, however, the bus is parked inan enclosed room, adequate ventilationmust be ensured.

Danger.

Very hot exhaust fumes are expelled fromthe exhaust tail pipe during the automaticand manual regeneration processes. Keepwell clear of the exhaust tail pipe. Other-wise, you could be burned by the fumes.

Danger.

Make sure that no highly flammable ma-terials, e.g. dry grass or fuels, come intocontact with the exhaust system duringthe automatic and manual regenerationprocesses. Do not leave the bus parked

up at a filling station, on dry grass or onharvested crop fields. The hot exhaustsystem could otherwise cause the highlyflammable material to ignite and set thebus on fire.

If the diesel particulate filter load statebecomes critical, a yellow indicator lamplights up in the instrument cluster. Theon-board computer displays a yellowevent window prompting you to startmanual regeneration. The manual regen-eration process lasts approximately 30to no more than 60 minutes.

Note:

The time needed for manual regenerationis dependent on the temperature of theexhaust system.

Note:

If the yellow event window and its mes-sage are disregarded, there is a risk ofengine power output being reduced anda need to exchange the diesel particulatefilter prematurely.


Operation

Diesel particulate filter regeneration

Danger.

Exposure to diesel soot and soot particlesthrough contact or inhalation is harmfulto health and can lead to death. If youneed to exchange a diesel particulate fil-ter yourself due to technical problems,be sure to observe the information andinstructions in the workshop informationand all applicable occupational safety andaccident-prevention regulations. Weargloves and a dust mask. Seal and packa particle-laden diesel particulate filter inthe original packaging immediately afterremoval. A particle-laden diesel partic-ulate filter must be labelled and mustnot under any circumstances be left un-covered indoors.


Functions:

Automatic regeneration of the dieselparticulate filter

Inhibiting automatic regeneration ofthe diesel particulate filter

Catalytic converter protection func-tion

Automatic regeneration of thediesel particulate filter

Whenever the green “Particulate fil-ter” indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up, this means that thediesel particulate filter is undergoingautomatic regeneration.

Note:

Automatic regeneration does not start un-less all necessary operating conditionshave been fulfilled, e.g. engine oil or ex-haust gas temperatures sufficiently highand engine running.

Note:

In addition, automatic regeneration is notpossible with the engine idling or runningat an elevated idling speed. It cannot fin-ish without a good period of actual drivingbecause this is the only time in which thenecessary temperatures are reached inthe exhaust gas aftertreatment system.

Note:

If regeneration is in progress and one ofthe operating conditions is subsequentlyno longer fulfilled, the green indicatorlamp goes out prematurely and re-generation is aborted.

Note:

It restarts automatically when all neces-sary operating conditions are fulfilledagain. If you possibly can, therefore,avoid interrupting a journey while thegreen “Particulate filter” indicator lamp

is lit. This will prolong the period ofregeneration.


Operation


Note:

If the elevated exhaust gas temperaturesassociated with regeneration may presenta danger, e.g. where the heat producedmay jeopardise safety, it is possible to in-hibit the automatic regeneration process.

Inhibiting automatic regenerationof the diesel particulate filter

M54.00-2129-71

If the elevated exhaust gas temperat-ures associated with regeneration maypresent a danger, e.g. where the heatproduced may jeopardise safety, it ispossible to inhibit the regeneration pro-

cess. Neither automatic nor manual re-generation can then be initiated and re-generation is stopped if it is already inprogress.

Press the lower section of pushbutton(1).

Note:

The LED in the “Inhibit regeneration”pushbutton comes on and no regenera-tion can be started.

Caution:

Leave the regeneration inhibitor activatedonly for as long as the danger exists.Whenever you activate the regenerationinhibitor, regeneration will continue to beinhibited even after the next engine start.

To deactivate, press the lower section ofinhibit pushbutton (1) again.

Note:

The LED in the pushbutton goes out.

Catalytic converter protectionfunction

In very rare cases (e.g. frequent lowload operation with relatively low exhausttemperatures), there is a possibility ofunburnt fuel collecting in the exhaustsystem. The exhaust system could sufferdamage as a result.

To prevent this, the engine speed isautomatically increased for approxim-ately 20 to 30 minutes by the exhaustgas aftertreatment control module underspecific circumstances. This raises theexhaust temperature and burns off thefuel.


Operation

Starting regeneration of the diesel particulate filter manually

Note:

A corresponding message appears on thedisplay screen to indicate that the catalyt-ic converter protection function is active.

Note:

It is possible to interrupt this function byswitching off the engine, engaging a gearor releasing the parking brake.

Starting regeneration of the dieselparticulate filter manually

Pull over safely with regard for othertraffic and leave the engine running.Park well clear of other vehicles, ob-jects and all flammable materials.

Note:

Under normal circumstances, automaticregeneration of the diesel particulate filteris sufficient to avoid heavy soot loadingof the filter. However, if the bus is pre-dominantly driven short distances or withthe engine under low load, it might notbe possible for automatic regeneration tofinish successfully.

Note:

If the diesel particulate filter load statebecomes critical, an indicator lamplights up in the instrument cluster. Theon-board computer displays a yellowevent window prompting you to startmanual regeneration. The manual regen-eration process lasts approximately 30 tono more than 60 minutes, depending onthe temperature of the exhaust system.

Apply the parking brake.

Shift the transmission to neutral N.

Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

If active, deactivate the regenerationinhibitor.

Note:

refer to “Inhibiting automatic regenerationof the diesel particulate filter”.


Operation

Starting regeneration of the diesel particulate filter manually

M54.00-2129-71

Press and hold the upper section of“Manual regeneration” pushbutton (1)for approximately 3 seconds.

Note:

Manual regeneration cannot be startedunless the engine oil and exhaust gastemperatures are sufficiently high, theAdBlue® is not frozen and the system isfunctioning normally.

The indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster comes on and enginespeed is increased.

When regeneration has finished, theindicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out and engine speeddrops to idling speed.

Note:

Regeneration will be aborted automaticallyif you engage a gear, release the parkingbrake or activate the regeneration inhib-itor by pressing the lower section of the“Regeneration inhibitor” pushbutton.

Note:

Engine speed drops to idling speed if theprocess is aborted.

Note:

Regeneration cannot be started unlessall necessary operating conditions havebeen fulfilled, e.g. engine oil or exhaustgas temperatures sufficiently high. If theon-board computer prompts manual re-generation at low outside temperatures,start the regeneration process before thevehicle is parked. If you were to park

the vehicle without initiating regenera-tion, you would not be able to start theregeneration process manually until aftera subsequent engine warm-up phase. Ifyou were to park the vehicle without initi-ating regeneration and the AdBlue® werefrozen, you would not be able to start theregeneration process manually until aftera thawing period of up to 60 minutes.


Operation

Operating/malfunction displays: fuel system/exhaust gas cleaning system

Operating/malfunction displays:fuel system/exhaust gas cleaningsystem

Fuel reserve

Fuel level below approximately 10% oftank capacity

AdBlue level

If the level in the AdBlue supply tankfalls to approximately 33%, the iconabove appears on the screen in conjunc-tion with a yellow warning level malfunc-tion message to remind the driver thatan AdBlue top-up is due.

Exhaust gas cleaning malfunction

The malfunction indicator lamp lights upin the event of a malfunction in the ex-haust gas cleaning system (SCR system).

Note:

The indicator lamp is located above thedisplay screen in the instrument cluster.

Danger.

Have the malfunction rectified by anOMNIplus Service Partner immediately.

Fault in the exhaust gas cleaningsystem

The malfunction indicator lamp flashesin the event of a fault in the exhaust gascleaning system (display if permissibleNOx values exceeded) or if the AdBluesupply tank runs empty. If the mal-function message was triggered by theAdBlue supply tank running empty, it isnecessary to top up the AdBlue level im-mediately. If the AdBlue supply tank hasrun empty, the driver must have activelyacknowledged the AdBlue level operatingdisplay (see above) at some time previ-ously.


Operation

Function description: accident data recorder (ADR) (option)

Note:

The indicator lamp is located above thedisplay screen in the instrument cluster.

Danger.

Have NOx faults rectified immediately byan OMNIplus Service Partner.

Engine torque reduction

Engine torque is reduced to approxim-ately 60 % in the event of a NOx fault(display if permissible NOx values ex-ceeded). In this situation, a fault is alsopresent in the exhaust gas cleaningsystem, i.e. the malfunction indicatorlamp flashes. If the fault was caused bythe AdBlue supply tank running empty,the AdBlue level operating display (seeabove) is also displayed. The AdBluesupply tank must be filled immediately.

Danger.

Have NOx faults rectified immediately byan OMNIplus Service Partner.

Function description: accident datarecorder (ADR) (option)

The accident data recorder (ADR) isa system for detecting and record-ing accidents and driving events, e.g.pulling away against a kerb or sud-den braking.

The ADR is activated automaticallywhen the ignition is switched on.

Note:

The ADR remains active for 3 days afterthe ignition has been switched off andcontinues to register all vehicle move-ments (e.g. parking collisions).


Operation

Function description: accident data recorder (ADR) (option)

M54_00-1502-71

As soon as the ignition is switchedon, the ADR carries out a self-testand provides audible notification ofthe current operating status or thepresence of a hardware fault.

Note:

A brief, one-off audible signal (buzzer inthe control panel) (4) indicates that theADR is ready for operation.

Note:

Indicator lamp (2) lighting up and a brief,one-off buzzing sound means that at leastone event is stored.

Note:

A sequence of four long buzzes indicatesthat the ADR has detected a parking colli-sion. Check your vehicle for damage.

Note:

Eight short buzzes mean that the memoryof the ADR is almost full to capacity. Ex-port the events and have the memorycleared.

Note:

Ten short buzzes mean that the ADR hasmalfunctioned. Similarly, a malfunction ispresent if no signal sounds.

Following any critical traffic or acci-dent situation, it is possible to recordan entry manually.

Note:

When pushbutton (1) is pressed follow-ing an accident, the event (approximately43 seconds before, during and after theaccident) is stored and remains write-pro-tected for an extended period.


Operation

Brake system safety precautions

Brake system safety precautions

Caution:

The braking characteristics of the busmay change if a yellow warning level mal-function in the brake system appears onthe instrument cluster display screen. Ad-opt a particularly cautious driving style.Have the malfunction rectified as soon aspossible by an OMNIplus Service Partner.

Danger.

The braking characteristics of the bushave changed if a red warning level mal-function in the brake system is displayed.Pedal travel may increase under brak-ing. ABS has been disabled. Stop the busimmediately and disable it (traffic condi-tions permitting). Have the malfunctionrectified by an OMNIplus Service Partnerimmediately.

Emergency braking

In the event of danger, depress thebrake pedal fully.

Note:

If you brake heavily at a speed of over30 mph (50 km/h) and Brake Assist isactive, the brake lamps will flash rapidly.This provides a warning to road usersbehind the vehicle.

Braking and stopping

Whenever the bus is driven over longdownhill stretches, you should makeuse of the braking effect of the en-gine by shifting into a lower gear. Torelieve the service brake of load, usethe integrated retarder in accordancewith the manufacturer's operatinginstructions.

Note:

Except for emergencies, the service brakedoes not usually need to be appliedsharply.

Danger.

Always apply the parking brake beforeyou disembark. On uphill and downhillgradients, you must also chock thewheels and turn the steering towards thekerb.


Operation

Brakes with anti-locking protection

Switch off the engine using the igni-tion switch.

Brakes with anti-locking protection

In the event of danger, the brakepedal should be fully depressed. Thisguarantees that all wheels are regu-lated and the bus decelerates optim-ally.

On a slippery road surface, youshould also declutch so that thebraking effect of the engine cannotaffect the ABS control intervention.

Note:

The retarder is deactivated automaticallyfor the duration of an ABS control inter-vention.

Danger.

The anti-locking protection of ABS doesnot relieve the driver of the responsib-ility for adopting a driving style whichtakes traffic and road conditions into ac-count. While the directional stability andsteerability of the bus are improved underbraking, ABS is not able to avert the con-sequences of, for example, driving at an

unsafe distance behind a vehicle in frontor driving too fast through bends.

Danger.

If the bus is towing a trailer that does nothave ABS, this trailer could be overbrakedif the brakes were applied with maximumforce. In this event, the driver must keepthe trailer in view by checking the rear-view mirror. The bus equipped with ABSremains steerable, thereby enabling thedriver to keep the entire vehicle combina-tion stable.


Operation

Applying the parking brake

Applying the parking brake

M42.00-0854-71

Pull hand lever (1) out of releasedposition (a) and into engagement inapplied position (b).

Danger.

Do not apply the parking brake unless thebus is stationary. Always apply the park-ing brake before you leave the driver'sarea. On steep uphill and downhill gradi-ents, you should also chock the wheelsand turn the steering towards the kerb.

Danger.

With the parking brake applied, ABS canno longer perform its intended function -risk of skidding.

Note:

A warning tone sounds if the ignition isswitched off without the parking brakeengaged.

Danger.

Check the hand lever for full engage-ment. To do so, attempt to press thehand lever in the “release” direction (a)without pulling release ring (1.1) out ofthe detent position. The lever must notmove.

The parking brake indicator lamplights up on the instrument panel

and this operating symbol appears onthe screen at the same time.


Operation

Releasing the parking brake

Releasing the parking brake

M42_00-0323-01

Pull release ring (1.1) out of the de-tent position (b) and move hand lever(1) as far as the stop towards the“Release” position (a).

The indicator lamp and operatingsymbol must go out.

Note:

To guarantee a faultless release of theparking brake, the supply pressure mustbe at least 6.3 bar. If the parking brakeindicator lamp does not go out even ifthere is sufficient supply pressure avail-able, there is a defect in the brake springcylinder circuit or emergency release cir-cuit. Have the brake system checked byan OMNIplus Service Partner immediately.

Emergency braking in the event offailure of both brake circuits

Danger.

A failure in brake circuits 1 and 2 willjeopardise the operating safety and road-worthiness of the bus. Stop the vehicleimmediately (traffic conditions permitting).Have the brake system checked by anOMNIplus Service Partner immediately.

Note:

In the event of a failure in brake circuits1 and 2, it is possible to initiate emer-gency braking using the parking brakelever.


Operation

EBS brake system (system description)

M42_00-0323-01

Pull release ring (1.1). Pull lever (1)slowly towards applied position (b)and hold it in the desired position toprevent it from automatically return-ing to released position (a).

Danger.

If it is necessary to perform emergencybraking using the parking brake, do notallow the parking brake lever to engagein the parking position. Keep release ring(1.1) in the applied position.

The bus is braked at the rear wheelsonly.

Note:

Parking brake lever (1) can be movedrearwards to any position to enable thedriver to prevent the rear wheels fromlocking and to moderate the braking ef-fect.

Danger.

Risk of accident. Applying the parkingbrake deactivates the anti-lock brakingsystem (ABS). You should exercise evenmore caution when driving on slipperyroads because there would be a risk ofrear wheels locking.

EBS brake system (system descrip-tion)

The electronic brake system (EBS) con-trols the vehicle's braking behaviour. Theanti-lock braking system (ABS) and ac-celeration skid control (ASR) functionsare part of the electronic brake system(EBS).

EBS helps to achieve a more rapid brak-ing effect at the wheels. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking above a speedequivalent to walking pace, regardless ofthe road conditions.

EBS comprises two circuits: a purelypneumatic brake circuit and a superim-posed electropneumatic brake circuit.

Each wheel is equipped with sensorsthat continuously record the rate ofbrake pad wear. An overly worn brakepad is indicated on the display screenby a service notification and by a yellowalert with the “Brake pad” symbol.

Under partial braking, the braking pres-sures are adapted between the front axleand rear axle as a function of the brake


Operation

Acceleration skid control (ASR)

pad thickness to ensure even wear ofthe brake pads.

Acceleration skid control (ASR)

Acceleration skid control prevents thedrive wheels from spinning when pullingaway or accelerating, regardless of roadsurface conditions.

Danger.

Acceleration skid control does not relievethe driver of the responsibility for adopt-ing a driving style which takes traffic androad conditions into account. The busmay skid out of control if ASR has beenswitched off and the drive wheels start tospin.

Brake AssistBrake Assist interprets a dangerous situ-ation from the speed with which thebrake pedal is depressed and immedi-ately generates maximum braking force.Brake Assist acts to minimise brakingdistances.


Operation

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Dynamic handling control (FDR) acts toprevent the bus from skidding or tilting(subject to the laws of physics), regard-less of vehicle load and road surfaceconditions, and particularly in criticaldriving situations (e.g. sudden evasivemanoeuvre or high cornering speed).This is achieved by selective braking ofindividual wheels or, where necessary,all wheels. Combined with accelerationskid control (ASR), this system is calledthe Electronic Stability Program (ESP).ESP remains operational even when theservice brake is applied or a continuousbrake is active.

Danger.

RISK OF ACCIDENT. The Electronic Sta-bility Program (ESP) does not relieve thedriver of the responsibility for adopting adriving style which takes traffic and roadconditions into account. The ability ofESP to restabilise the bus is subject tothe laws of physics. The bus may skidout of control if the Electronic Stability

Program (ESP) has been deactivated andthe drive wheels start to spin.

Note:

In wintry conditions, optimum perform-ance of the Electronic Stability Program(ESP) cannot be achieved unless wintertyres (M+S) are fitted.

M42.00-0852-71

Note:

It is recommended that the ElectronicStability Program (ESP) be deactivatedusing ESP OFF pushbutton (1) if tractionproblems are experienced when drivingwith snow chains fitted or over loose sur-faces (e.g. sand or gravel).


Operation

Operating/malfunction displays: brake system

Operating/malfunction displays:brake system

Circuit 1 supply pressure

If the supply pressure in circuit 1 fallsbelow 6.8 bar, a red warning level mal-function is shown on the screen. At thesame time, the red parking brake indic-ator lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster. The malfunction warning is notcleared until the pressure has risen backabove 7.2 bar.

Danger.

The braking characteristics of the bushave changed if a red warning levelmalfunction is displayed. Pedal travel mayincrease under braking. ABS has beendisabled. Stop the bus immediately anddisable it (traffic conditions permitting).Have the malfunction rectified by anOMNIplus Service Partner immediately.



Danger.


Brake circuit 1 or 2 pressuresensor malfunction

The supply pressures in circuits 1 and 2are monitored by sensors. A red warninglevel malfunction is shown on the screenif a sensor in at least one circuit fails.The display of the supply pressure af-fected alternates between the minimumvalue (0 bar) and the maximum value (12bar) in a 1 second cycle. At the sametime, the red parking brake indicatorlamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Danger.



Operation



If the supply pressure in circuit 3 fallsbelow 6.3 bar, a yellow warning levelmalfunction is shown on the screen. Thismalfunction warning is not cleared untilthe pressure has risen back above 6.6bar.

Danger.


Parking brake applied

If the parking brake is applied, this isindicated by this icon in the “Betrieb-sanzeige Fahren” (Driving operating dis-play) menu on the screen. At the sametime, the red parking brake indicatorlamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Continuous braking OFF

The bus is equipped with a retarder,which provides additional braking forceto supplement the service brake and isactivated whenever the brake pedal isdepressed (brakes management). Theproportion of braking output contributedby the retarder during this combinedbraking action is reduced if the speedof the bus falls below 20 km/h. The

braking effect of the retarder is restoredwhen the bus is subsequently braked atspeeds of over 25 km/h. This functioncan be switched off using the continuousbrake OFF switch on the instrument pan-el. This is indicated by this icon in the“Betriebsanzeige Fahren” (Driving operat-ing display) menu on the screen.

Bus stop brake active

This symbol is shown on the instrumentcluster display screen whenever the busstop brake is active. It is also shownwhenever the drive-off lock is active (oneor more doors are open).

Note:

Neither the bus stop brake nor the drive-off lock can be deactivated unless thedoors are closed and the bus stop brakeswitch has been switched off. The “Readyto depart” symbol is shown on the displayscreen.


Operation

Activating the slip increase function of ASR (acceleration skid control)

Danger.

Always apply the parking brake correctlybefore you leave the driver's area. Risk ofaccident. To park the bus, always applythe parking brake. If necessary (e.g. onsteep uphill or downhill gradients), chockthe wheels as an additional measure toprevent the bus from rolling away.

Ready to depart

This symbol appears as soon as all thedoors are closed (drive-off lock with dooropen) or if the bus stop brake is act-ive. The symbol goes out and the busstop brake/drive-off lock is deactivatedas soon as the accelerator pedal is de-pressed.

Bus stop brake malfunction oremergency release switch operated

This symbol appears on the instrumentcluster screen if the sealed emergencyrelease switch (red, sealed security cap)is operated or if control of the bus stopbrake/drive-off lock is interrupted.

Danger.

Have the brake system checked as soonas possible by an OMNIplus Service Part-ner.

Activating the slip increase functionof ASR (acceleration skid control)

Note:

This function is available only in vehicleswithout Electronic Stability Program (ESP)(option).

M42_00-0540-71

Press pushbutton (1) with the ignitionswitch switched on in position 2.


Operation

Operating/malfunction displays: ABS/ASR

Slip increase is activated. This iconappears on the instrument clusterdisplay screen.

Danger.

Risk of accident. When the slip increasefunction is active, the bus may becomeunstable at the driven axle in the event ofunfavourable road conditions: acceleratecarefully.

Danger.

Risk of accident. The slip increase doesnot relieve the driver of the responsibilityfor adopting a driving style which takestraffic and road conditions into account.

Note:

It is recommended that slip increase beactivated under specific conditions (e.g.snow chains, pulling away under extremeconditions) because the wheel speed atwhich engine torque is reduced in theevent of spinning wheels on the drivenaxle will be increased.

Pressing pushbutton (1) again orswitching the ignition switch off andthen back on again deactivates slipincrease.

Operating/malfunction displays:ABS/ASR

Brake pad wear

An overly worn brake pad is indicated onthe screen by a service notification anda yellow warning level malfunction alert.

Danger.



Operation


Brake pad wear indicatorelectronics

This icon and a yellow warning level mal-function are displayed if the connectionto the electronics system (control unit)of the brake pad wear indicator is mal-functioning or not available.

ABS/ASR malfunction

In the event of an ABS/ASR failure ormalfunction, a red or yellow warninglevel malfunction, depending on faultseverity, is displayed.

Danger.

The wheels could lock, especially on aslippery surface - risk of skidding.

Danger.


Danger.


Acceleration skid control (ASR)active

ASR is activated automatically if thedrive wheels on one or both sides startto spin. An active ASR intervention isindicated by this icon in the "Betrieb-sanzeige Fahren" (Driving operating dis-play) menu on the screen. If the drivewheels on one side start to spin, theywill be braked automatically. - If thedrive wheels on both sides start to spin,engine power output will be reducedautomatically.

Danger.

RISK OF ACCIDENT. Acceleration skidcontrol does not relieve the driver of theresponsibility for adopting a driving stylewhich takes traffic and road conditionsinto account.


Operation


ASR (acceleration skid control) slipincrease

Pressing the “ASR slip increase” push-button when pulling away increases thewheel speed threshold above which en-gine torque is actively reduced to pre-vent the wheels on the driven axle fromspinning. This results in improved trac-tion in specific situations (e.g. snowchains, pulling away under extreme con-ditions).

Note:

This icon appears on the instrumentcluster display screen.

Danger.

RISK OF ACCIDENT. When the slip in-crease function is active, the bus maybecome unstable at the driven axle in theevent of unfavourable road conditions: ac-celerate carefully.

Brake pad wear sensor fault (2-axlebus)

This icon appears on the display screenin conjunction with a yellow warninglevel malfunction if the brake pad wearsensor has a fault.

Note:

If the icon does not go out even if youswitch the ignition starter switch to OFFand back to ON, have the malfunctionrectified by an OMNIplus Service Partner.

Note:

Example of an icon for a fault on theright-hand side of the driven axle on a2-axle bus.

Brake pad wear sensor fault (3-axlebus)

This icon appears on the display screenin conjunction with a yellow warninglevel malfunction if the brake pad wearsensor has a fault.

Note:

If the icon does not go out even if youswitch the ignition starter switch to OFFand back to ON, have the malfunctionrectified by an OMNIplus Service Partner.


Operation

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (function description)

Note:

Example of an icon for a fault on the left-hand side of the trailing axle on a 3-axlebus.

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)(function description)

Functions:

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)function description

Initialisation phase

Handling in the event of understeer-ing

Handling in the event of oversteering

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)function description

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)is an extension of the Electronic BrakeSystem (EBS), which already features theanti-lock braking system (ABS) and ac-celeration skid control (ASR). If the Elec-tronic Stability Program (ESP) detects acritical driving situation, automatic con-trol interventions stabilise the bus by:

– reducing engine power output

– selectively braking individual wheels

– applying the brakes at all wheels

Note:

The yellow ESP indicator lamp lights upwhile the Electronic Stability Program(ESP) is intervening.

Note:

Dynamic handling control (FDR) is activeonly at speeds of over 10 km/h. Dynam-ic handling control (FDR) is deactivatedwhenever reverse gear is selected.

Note:

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) isdeactivated automatically in the event ofan ESP malfunction or a technically re-lated malfunction in the Electronic BrakeSystem.


Operation

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (function description)

Initialisation phase

M54.00-2109-71

Whenever the ignition starter switch isswitched to ON, the Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) undergoes an initialisa-tion process that lasts until the first fewmetres have been driven and the sensorsare checked for correct function. Dy-namic handling control (FDR) is not yetfunctional during the initialisation phase,although acceleration skid control (ASR)is operational. If the system determinesthat correct operation is guaranteed, ini-tialisation is completed and the systemis ready for operation. The initialisation

phase is indicated by symbol (2) as anoperating display with no warning lamp.

Handling in the event ofundersteering

M42_25_0003_01

The front axle of the bus deviates fromsteered course (1) towards the offsideof the road (2). Selective braking of therear wheel on the nearside (3) restabil-ises the bus.

Note:

The illustration shows a 2-axle bus asan example. In the case of 3-axle busesequipped with RAS, the 3rd axle is regu-lated separately as necessary.

Handling in the event ofoversteering

M42_25_0002_01

The bus breaks out at the rear axle. Thebus deviates from steered course (4) andturns towards the near side of the road(5). Selective braking of the front wheelon the offside (6) restabilises the bus.


Operation

Deactivating the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Note:

The illustration shows a 2-axle bus asan example. In the case of 3-axle busesequipped with RAS, the 3rd axle is regu-lated separately as necessary.

Deactivating the Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP)

M42.00-0852-71

Press ESP OFF pushbutton (1).

Note:

Pressing “ESP OFF” pushbutton (1) againor switching the ignition starter switchto OFF and back to ON reactivates theElectronic Stability Program (ESP).

Danger.

RISK OF ACCIDENT. The bus may skidout of control if the Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) has been deactivated andthe drive wheels start to spin.

Note:

It is recommended that the ElectronicStability Program (ESP) be deactivatedusing ESP OFF pushbutton (1) if tractionproblems are experienced when drivingwith snow chains fitted or over loose sur-faces (e.g. sand or gravel).

The control functions of the dynamicdrive control (FDR) and accelerationskid control (ASR) are disabled. The“ESP OFF” icon appears on the dis-play screen.


Operation


Operating/malfunction displays:brake system

Brake pad wear

An overly worn brake pad is indicated onthe screen by a service notification anda yellow warning level malfunction alert.

Danger.


Brake system malfunction

If a speed sensor fault was detected dur-ing the last drive cycle, a yellow warn-ing level malfunction is displayed on thescreen together with this icon. This con-tinues to be shown until the static anddynamic system tests have been com-pleted.

Danger.


ABS/ASR malfunction

In the event of an ABS/ASR failure ormalfunction, a red or yellow warninglevel malfunction, depending on faultseverity, is displayed.

Danger.

The wheels could lock, especially on aslippery surface - risk of skidding.

Danger.



Operation


Danger.


Acceleration skid control (ASR)active

ASR is activated automatically if thedrive wheels on one or both sides startto spin. An active ASR intervention isindicated by this icon in the "Betrieb-sanzeige Fahren" (Driving operating dis-play) menu on the screen in conjunc-tion with the yellow warning lamp. If thedrive wheels on one side start to spin,they will be braked automatically. - Ifthe drive wheels on both sides start to

spin, engine power output will be re-duced automatically.

Danger.

RISK OF ACCIDENT. Acceleration skidcontrol does not relieve the driver of theresponsibility for adopting a driving stylewhich takes traffic and road conditionsinto account.

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)active

If the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)is active, the control intervention andtherefore the critical driving conditionis indicated on the instrument clusterscreen by this icon in conjunction withthe yellow warning lamp.

Note:

This symbol appears in the event of anintervention by dynamic handling control(FDR) and by acceleration skid control(ASR).

Note:

During the initialisation phase of dynam-ic handling control, this icon appears onthe screen as a normal operating display(without the warning lamp). At this time,dynamic handling control is not yet func-tional even though acceleration skid con-trol (ASR) is ready for operation.

Danger.

RISK OF ACCIDENT. The Electronic Sta-bility Program (ESP) does not relieve thedriver of the responsibility for adopting adriving style which takes traffic and roadconditions into account. The ability ofESP to restabilise the bus is subject tothe laws of physics.


Operation


Deactivating ESP

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)can be deactivated using the ESP OFFpushbutton on the instrument panel. Thedynamic handling control (FDR) and ac-celeration skid control (ASR) functionsare also disabled. This is indicated in the"Betriebsanzeige Fahren" (Driving operat-ing display) menu on the screen by thisicon:

Note:

Press the pushbutton again or switch theignition starter switch to OFF and back toON to reactivate the Electronic StabilityProgram (FDR and ASR).

Danger.

RISK OF ACCIDENT. The bus may skidout of control if the Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP) has been deactivated andthe drive wheels start to spin.

ESP malfunction

A malfunction in the dynamic handlingcontrol system (FDR) is indicated on theinstrument cluster screen by this iconin conjunction with the yellow warninglamp.

Note:

Other brake system functions may con-tinue to work correctly. If any of thesefail, a separate fault message will be dis-played.

Danger.





Operation


Danger.




Danger.


Brake circuit 1 or 2 supplypressure sensor malfunction

The supply pressures in circuits 1 and 2are monitored by sensors. A red warn-ing level malfunction is shown on thescreen if a sensor in at least one circuitfails. The display of the supply pressureaffected alternates between the minim-um value (0 bar) and the maximum value(12 bar) once every second. At the sametime, the red parking brake indicatorlamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Danger.



If the supply pressure in circuit 3 fallsbelow 6.3 bar, a yellow warning levelmalfunction is shown on the screen. Thismalfunction warning is not cleared untilthe pressure has risen back above 6.6bar.


Operation


Danger.



If the parking brake is applied, this isindicated by this icon in the "Betrieb-sanzeige Fahren" (Driving operating dis-play) menu on the screen. At the sametime, the red parking brake indicatorlamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Continuous braking OFF

The bus is equipped with a retarder,which provides additional braking forceto supplement the service brake and isactivated whenever the brake pedal isdepressed (brakes management). Theproportion of braking output contributedby the retarder during this combinedbraking action is reduced if the speedof the bus falls below 20 km/h. Thebraking effect of the retarder is restoredwhen the bus is subsequently braked atspeeds of over 25 km/h. This functioncan be switched off using the continuousbrake OFF switch on the instrument pan-el. This is indicated in the "Betriebsan-zeige Fahren" (Driving operating display)menu on the screen by this icon.

Bus stop brake active

This symbol is shown on the instrumentcluster display screen whenever the busstop brake is active. It is also shownwhenever the drive-off lock is active (oneor more doors are open).

Note:

The bus stop brake or the drive-off lockcannot be deactivated unless the doorsare closed. The “Ready to depart” symbolis shown on the display screen.

Danger.

Always apply the parking brake correctlybefore you leave the driver's area. Risk ofaccident. To park the bus, always applythe parking brake. If necessary (e.g. onsteep uphill or downhill gradients), chockthe wheels as an additional measure toprevent the bus from rolling away.


Operation

Operating 230/400 V systems (option)

Ready to depart

This symbol is displayed as soon as allthe doors are closed. The symbol goesout and the bus stop brake/drive-offlock is deactivated as soon as the accel-erator pedal is depressed.

Bus stop brake OFF

This symbol appears on the instrumentcluster screen if the sealed emergencyrelease switch (red, sealed security cap)is operated or if control of the bus stopbrake/drive-off lock is interrupted.

Danger.

Have the brake system checked as soonas possible by an OMNIplus Service Part-ner.

Operating 230/400 V systems(option)

Special safety precautions must be takenwhen operating 230/400 V systems;these will be described below:

Danger.

Maintenance and repair work may only becarried out by personnel who have under-gone the appropriate special training.

The system manufacturer's safety andoperating information must be observedwithout fail.

Danger.

Residual current devices fitted in the busmust be function-tested at regular inter-vals.

The following safety precautions are anabsolute requirement if the 230/400 Vsystem is to be supplied by an outsidefeed:


Operation

Fitting the skibox (option)

Note:

Check any extension lead used for dam-age before plugging it in.

Note:

The networks to which the 230/400 Vsystem is connected must have protectionin the form of a residual current device.Otherwise, plug in an external RCD as anadapter.

Note:

Check the correct operation of this RCDby pressing the test button. Only thenshould you connect the 230/400 V sys-tem of the bus to the mains supply.


Danger.

The skibox may only be transported,stored and assembled by using the sub-assemblies and fastening elements thatare designed for that purpose.

Danger.

The installation of a skibox changes thebus length and any installed reversingmonitor (park pilot) no longer functions.

M88_00-0019-01

The skibox is fitted to the bus bypinning the four swivel bearings onthe left and right-hand side of theouter frame to the bearing pedestalson the bus using pins secured withsplit pins (1).

Note:

A fork lift truck should be used to raisethe box to the correct height to ease as-sembly onto the bus.


Operation


M88_00-0021-01

Only ever stake the lower locatingeyes with one pin at a time - nevertwo at once.

Danger.

Risk of injury. Make sure that the reargas strut (1) prestresses the bar.

M88_00-0019-01

The skibox can only be fitted tobuses upon which the correct brack-ets are installed.

Note:

The electrical connection must be estab-lished between the bus and skibox oncethe skibox has been mounted.

Danger.

Before the bus is driven, it is necessaryto check that all pins (1) are firmly seatedand correctly secured by split pin (2).

Danger.

All lighting equipment must be checkedfor correct operation before the bus isdriven. In addition, it is necessary tocheck that the rear foglamp only workson the skibox and no longer on the bus.

Danger.

The skibox cover must be closed andlocked when the bus is being driven.


Operation

Swivelling the skibox (option)

Swivelling the skibox (option)

Caution:

Before the box is swivelled it must firstlybe unloaded (follow instructions on thesticker on the skibox frame).

M88_00-0019-01

Pull both locating pins (1) on the left-hand side when viewed in the direc-tion of travel (after removing secur-ing split pin (2)) and swivel the boxto the right side until the gas struthas reached its end position and thecatch for preventing the box fromswivelling back unintentionally hassnapped in place.

M88_00-0021-01

This catch (2) (orange-yellow pushhandle on the gas strut (1)) mustfirstly be raised to allow the box toswivel back.

Reinsert the locating pins and securewith securing split pins.


Operation

Additional operating instructions for the skibox (option)

Additional operating instructions forthe skibox (option)

Danger.

The permissible gross vehicle weight mustnot be exceeded. (Observe the instruc-tions on the sticker inside the skibox.)

Danger.

After the skibox has been loaded, thebelts over the support arms must belashed firmly over the retaining framesin order to secure the load.

Caution:

The use of corrosive soaps for skiboxcleaning and care is not permitted (ob-serve the manufacturer's instructions). Ifan unacceptable amount of dirt has accu-mulated on the skibox, you should cleanit using water and a car shampoo. Theuse of a high-pressure cleaner is permit-ted provided you operate it and treat theskibox with care.

To adjust the height of the supportarms, remove the fasteners first.

Danger.

Whenever the height has been adjusted,the respective fastener must be refittedto the support arm and clipped into thewall rail.

Pull the folding step for loading andunloading out of the retaining tubes,hook it in using the hooks and fold itout.

If there are defective bulbs in thelamp holders, they must be replacedby pulling out the connector socketsand unscrewing the bayonet fitting.

Note on maintenance work

Note:

All maintenance work is described in aseparate manual. For further information,please consult your EvoBus Service Part-ner.


Operation

Care and cleaning

Care and cleaning

Note:

Observe the laws and regulations in allcountries concerned.

Danger.

Risk of injury. Whenever work is carriedout on the bus, all applicable safety regu-lations must be observed (e.g. operatinginstructions, environmental laws and reg-ulations, occupational safety and accidentprevention regulations, etc.).

Danger.

Risk of poisoning. Observe the instruc-tions for use of the care and cleaningproducts.

Danger.

Risk of poisoning. Always keep care andcleaning products sealed and out of thereach of children.

Danger.

Risk of poisoning. Diesel, regular andpremium-grade fuels are harmful tohealth. They should not be used as acleaning product.

Danger.

Risk of fire. Diesel, regular and premium-grade fuels are highly flammable. Theyshould not be used as a cleaning product.

Danger.

Do not use round-spray jets to clean tyresor suspension air bags. The pulsating jetof water could cause concealed damageto the tyre substructure or suspensionair bags. This damage would not become

apparent until much later and could causethe tyre or suspension air bag to burst.You could then lose control of your busand cause an accident, which could resultin injury to yourself and others.

Caution:

Do not work with high-pressure cleanersor steam cleaners in the region of axleseals (e.g. hubs, drive flange) and axlebreathers. In automatic vehicle washes,make sure that these areas will not beseverely subjected to jets of water.

Caution:

We recommend that only tested and ap-proved care products should be used. In-formation about acceptable care productscan be obtained from your OMNIplus Ser-vice Partner.


Operation

Care/cleaning of light-alloy wheels

Caution:

For cleaning work in the engine compart-ment, the use of cleaning agents contain-ing acetone or chloroethylene is prohib-ited.

Caution:

If you are using a steam cleaner to per-form cleaning work in the engine com-partment, do not aim the jet directly atbelt tensioners or idler pulleys.

Caution:

Stone chips and impurities, especially in-sect remains, bird droppings, tree res-ins, oils and greases, fuels and tar stains,should be remedied immediately with theuse of approved care products.

Caution:

The bus must be cleaned more frequentlyin winter to remove salt residues fromroad gritting.


Dispose of empty containers, cleaningcloths and polishing wads in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Care/cleaning of light-alloy wheels

Danger.

Observe the general information/safetyprecautions in this section.

Caution:

Clean light-alloy wheels regularly.

Clean the light-alloy wheels regu-larly with warm water (preferably witha high-pressure cleaner) and a softsponge.

Danger.

Do not use round-spray jets for cleaningtyres. The pulsating jet of water couldcause concealed damage to the tyre sub-structure. Damage to the tyre substruc-ture would not become apparent untilmuch later and could cause the tyre toburst. You could then lose control of yourbus and cause an accident, which couldresult in injury to yourself and others.


OperationCare and cleaning of covers, upholstery and ceiling

For heavy soiling, use a cleaner forlight-alloy wheels.

Note:

Alcoa Dura-Bright® wheels need onlysoap and water to retain their sheen.These wheels should not be polished us-ing a standard polish such as ALpolish.

Note:

Further information: Alcoa WheelProducts Europe, www.alcoawheels.com.

Caution:

We recommend that only tested and ap-proved care products should be used. In-formation about acceptable care productscan be obtained from your OMNIplus Ser-vice Partner.

Caution:

Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.They can cause corrosion to the wheelbolts (wheel nuts) or the retaining springsof the balance weights.

Care and cleaning of covers,upholstery and ceiling

Special notes on care and cleaningof covers and upholstery

Note:

Observe the information about your up-holstered furnishings and covers con-tained in the detailed description of thebus.

Caution:

Do not use cleaning products containingsolvents (e.g. petroleum ether, acetone,alcohol, etc.). This would damage coversand equipment parts made of plastic orfoam beyond repair.

Caution:

To avoid a bleaching out of colours, useonly pH-neutral care and cleaning agents.


Operation

Care/cleaning of fabric covers

Note:

These notes on care also apply to clean-ing of the ceiling.


Danger.


Note:

Regular care and basic cleaning help tomaintain the value and high-quality ap-pearance of fabric covers. For this reas-on, carry out basic cleaning regularly.Carry out basic cleaning more regularlyif necessary, depending on use and thelevel of dirt.

Basic cleaning - weekly

Vacuum the covers thoroughly alongthe nap of the fabric.

Caution:

Do not use rubber vacuum nozzles orrubber attachments. These could pullthreads out of the upholstered covers.

Using a soft brush, brush the fabricalong the nap.

Basic cleaning - every six months

First carry out the weekly basiccleaning.

Work up a foam from a mild, luke-warm soap solution (e.g. from amild-action detergent).

Apply the foam evenly over all thecovers using a soft, slightly dampsponge.

Wait until the freshly cleaned coversare completely dry.


Operation


Caution:

The covers must be completely dry beforethey are sat on again. Permanent pres-sure marks could otherwise form.

Brush along the nap of the fabricusing a soft brush, without applyingpressure.

Removing stains

Caution:

Remove dirt as soon as possible to pre-vent permanent stains or damage to thecovers.

Remove as much dirt as possibleusing a lint-free cloth.

Using a soft sponge, work a mild,lukewarm soap solution into the dirtin circular movements from the out-side in. Apply light pressure whendoing this.

Note:

Always clean up the dirt from the outsidein to prevent it from being dispersed inthe fabric.

Mop up the soap solution using aclean, soft sponge.

Wait until the freshly cleaned areasare completely dry.

Caution:


Finally, brush the cover and thecleaned areas using a soft brushalong the nap of the fabric.

Caution:

If in any doubt, use a professional textilecleaning company.


Operation

Care/cleaning of micro-fibre covers

Care/cleaning of micro-fibre covers

Danger.


Note:

Regular care and basic cleaning help tomaintain the value and high-quality ap-pearance of micro-fibre and wool covers.For this reason, carry out basic cleaningregularly. Carry out basic cleaning moreregularly if necessary, depending on useand the level of dirt.

Basic cleaning - weekly

Vacuum the covers along the nap ofthe fabric, without applying pressure.

Caution:

Do not use rubber vacuum nozzles orrubber attachments. These could pullthreads out of the upholstered covers.

Using a soft brush, gently brush theupholstery down along the nap of thefabric.

Basic cleaning - every six months

First carry out the weekly basiccleaning.

Work up a foam from a mild, luke-warm soap solution (e.g. from amild-action detergent).

Apply the foam evenly over all thecovers using a soft, slightly dampsponge.

Wait until the freshly cleaned coversare completely dry.

Caution:


Brush along the nap of the fabricusing a soft brush, without applyingpressure.

Removing stains

Caution:


Caution:

Do not use cleaning products containingsolvents (e.g. petroleum ether, acetone,alcohol, etc.). This would damage themicro-fibre covers and equipment partsmade of plastic or foam beyond repair.

Remove as much dirt as possibleusing a lint-free cloth.


Operation

Care/cleaning of leather covers

Using a soft sponge, work a mild,lukewarm soap solution into the dirtin circular movements from the out-side in. Apply light pressure whendoing this.

Note:

Always clean up the dirt from the outsidein to prevent it from being dispersed inthe fabric.

Caution:

Do not use cleaning products containingsolvents (e.g. petroleum ether, acetone,alcohol, etc.). This would damage themicro-fibre covers and equipment partsmade of plastic or foam beyond repair.

Mop up the soap solution using aclean, soft sponge.

Wait until the freshly cleaned areasare completely dry.

Caution:


Finally, brush the cover and thecleaned areas using a soft brushalong the nap of the fabric.

Caution:

If in any doubt, use a professional textilecleaning company.


Danger.


Caution:

To avoid leaving chalky outlines or watermarks, use only distilled water for clean-ing.

Caution:

Minimise exposure to direct sunlight toavoid colour fading.


Operation


Note:

Regular care and basic cleaning help tomaintain the value and high-quality ap-pearance of leather covers, as well as thelong-term durability and suppleness of theleather. For this reason, carry out basiccleaning at least four times a year. Carryout basic cleaning more regularly if neces-sary, depending on use and the level ofdirt.

Basic cleaning - every quarter

Remove coarse dirt with a very softbrush or a vacuum cleaner.

Caution:

Do not use a sharp-edged vacuumingnozzle or too hard a brush, otherwise youcould damage the leather beyond repair.

Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth withdistilled water.

Wipe leather upholstery down with adamp cloth.

Caution:

Do not use a cloth or sponge with arough surface as this could scratch theleather upholstery or damage it beyondrepair.

Caution:

To prevent the formation of permanentpressure marks, leather upholstery has tobe dried off fully before subsequent use.

Removing stains

Caution:


Remove as much dirt as possibleusing a soft, lint-free cloth.

Gently work a mild, lukewarm soapsolution into the dirty area.

Then wipe the dirt up using a cleancloth.

Remove the soap solution used usingclean, distilled water.

Note:

All dirt and soap residues must be com-pletely removed. If in doubt, rinse again.

Note:

To avoid the formation of outlines, notonly should the mark be treated but alsothe wider area around it.

Then dry the cleaned areas using ahairdryer set to medium heat, keep-ing it moving in a circular motion at adistance of 30 cm to 40 cm.

Caution:

The leather covers must be completelydry before they are sat on again. Perman-ent pressure marks could otherwise form.


Operation


Caution:

If in any doubt, use a professional leathercleaning company.

Leather care products

Note:

Information about suitable leather careproducts can be obtained from yourOMNIplus Service Partner or from aprofessional leather cleaning company.



At a glance

Table of contents

Driver's area overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Switches on the left section of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Switches on the right section of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Tachograph (installation position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

DTCO tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Destination display safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Destination display control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Door pushbutton in the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Scope of tools and emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Location of the fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Location of the first-aid kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Tow bar location (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Location of spare mirror (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Emergency hammer (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108


At a glance

Table of contents

Driver's rest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

On-board kitchenette refrigerator control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Tour guide refrigerator control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Seat belt reminder display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Exterior flaps on the Tourismo 15 RHD (example of 2-axle bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Design and function description: fire detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Operating and malfunction displays: fire detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119


At a glance


At a glance

Driver's area overview

Driver's area overview


At a glance

Switches on the left section of the instrument panel

No. Description Page

A Switches on theleft section of theinstrument panel

89

B Switches on theright section ofthe instrumentpanel

94

C Instrument cluster

D Steering columnswitch for lightand wiper func-tions

124

E Steering columnswitch for retarderand cruise control(option)

F Adjustable steer-ing column

129

G Ignition switch 129

H DTCO tachograph 100


I Parking brake andemergency releasedevice

130

J Mastersafety switch(emergency-offswitch) (nationalvariant)

152

Switches on the left section of theinstrument panel

Note:

The overview shows the maximum utilisa-tion of the instrument panel with switchesin their designated position. To accom-modate the customisation requirementsof the customer, the switches may havebeen assigned to different positions onthe instrument panel.


At a glance



At a glance



0 Mirror adjuster 153

1 Windscreen rollersunblind pushbut-ton (option)

153

2 Pushbutton forco-driver's rollersunblind (option)

153

3 Diesel particulatefilter (DPF) re-generation start/inhibit

154

4 Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP)OFF pushbutton

154

5 Pushbutton for GO240-8 transmis-sion shift systemfailsafe mode (op-tion) (2/4 and N)

155


6 Pushbutton for GO240-8 transmis-sion shift systemfailsafe mode (op-tion) (activation offailsafe mode andR)

155

7 Display controlpushbutton

156

8 Driver's area light-ing switch

156

9 ADR button (acci-dent data record-er) (option)

168

10 Reading lampsswitch

157

11 Passenger-com-partment lightingswitch positionsI+II

157


12 Night lightingswitch

158

13 Front roof hatchpushbutton - airin/air out (option)

14 Rear roof hatchpushbutton - airin/air out (option)

15 Attendant call sys-tem switch

159

16 “School bus oper-ation” pushbutton(option)

159

17 Audible reversewarning featureswitch (option)

159

18 Driver's powerwindow pushbut-ton

160


At a glance



19 Pushbutton forraising/loweringthe bus

160

20 Normal-level push-button

160

21 Passenger stoprequest systemenabling switch

161

22 Switch for thedriver's windowheating/mirrorheating

161

23 Windscreen heat-ing switch (option)

162

24 Horn changeoverswitch (option)

162

25 Central lockingpushbutton for theleft-side luggagecompartment

162


26 Central lockingpushbutton for theright-side luggagecompartment

163

27 Creep mode push-button

155

28 Kitchenette en-abling switch (op-tion)

163

29 Lavatory enablingswitch (option)

163

30 Switch for elec-trical circuits >100 V (option)

164

31 Seat microphoneswitch

164

32 Pushbutton forhanging up theintercom (option)

164


33 Selection pushbut-ton for intercomin the driver's restarea/kitchenette(option)

165

34 Rotary light switch 123


At a glance


At a glance

Switches on the right section of the instrument panel

Switches on the right section of theinstrument panel


At a glance

Switches on the right section of the instrument panel


35 Infrared sensorfor DVD changerremote control

36 Infrared sensor forTV tuner

37 Control panel foraudio/video sys-tem in driver’sarea and passen-ger compartment

38 Control panel foraudio/video sys-tem in driver’sarea and passen-ger compartment

39 Heating/ventila-tion/air-condition-ing (HVAC) controlpanel

220

40 Cigarette lighter(option)


41 Switch for deac-tivating pedal-ac-tivated continuousbraking

165

42 Bus stop brakepushbutton (op-tion)

166

43 Hazard warninglamps switch

166

44 Door I pushbutton 167

45 Door II pushbutton 167

46 Bus stop brakeemergency releaseswitch (option)

167


At a glance

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster


At a glance

Instrument cluster


1 Indicator lamp forthe left-hand turnsignals

2 Dipped-beam in-dicator lamp

3 Main-beam indic-ator lamp

4 Front foglamp in-dicator lamp

5 Red warning levelmalfunction lamp

6 Yellow warninglevel malfunctionlamp

7 ESP indicatorlamp

8 Parking brake andbrake system mal-function indicatorlamp


9 Tyre pressurewarning lamp

10 Indicator lamp forthe right-hand turnsignals

11 ESP lamp OFF

12 ABS warning lamp

13 Diesel particulatefilter (DPF) indicat-or lamp

14 Indicator lamp forDPF regenerationin progress

15 Active Brake As-sist OFF warninglamp

16 Tachograph indic-ator lamp

17 Exhaust gas clean-ing malfunctiondisplay


18 Exhaust gas clean-ing system (SCRsystem) malfunc-tion display

19 Selector but-ton for tripmeter/time

20 Button for on-board diagnostics- “System”

21 Button for on-board diagnostics- “Quit”

22 Button for on-board diagnostics- “Reset”

23 Button for on-board diagnostics- “Info”

24 Button for screenbrightness


At a glance

Tachograph (installation position)


25 Total distancereading and clockdisplay

26 Screen (display)

Tachograph (installation position)

Tachograph (1) is located in the lowersection of the centre console to the rightof the driver's area.

M68_00-0215-71


At a glance


At a glance

DTCO tachograph

DTCO tachograph


At a glance

DTCO tachograph

1 Display screen: Screen dis-plays vary according to theoperating state of the bus.

refer to “Display variants”in the manufacturer's operat-ing instructions.

2 Key panel, driver 1

Note:

Activity button, driver 1/cardslot ejector button, driver 1

3 Card slot, driver 1: Driver 1,the current driver of the bus,inserts his driver card intocard slot 1.

Note:

Insert the card with the chipfacing upwards in the direc-tion of the printed arrow.

4 Download/calibration inter-face: There is an interfaceunder the cover. This in-terface cannot be enabledwithout an inserted companycard, control card or work-shop card.

For details, refer to “Accessrights for tachograph cards”in the manufacturer's operat-ing instructions.

5 Key panel, driver 2

Note:

Activity button, driver 2/cardslot ejector button, driver 2

6 Card slot, driver 2: Driver2, who is not currently driv-ing the bus, inserts his drivercard into card slot 2.

Note:

Insert the card with the chipfacing upwards in the direc-tion of the printed arrow.

7 Printer drawer release but-ton: This button is used torelease the printer drawer, forexample, for inserting a newroll of paper.

8 Tear-off edge

9 Menu buttons: Buttons forentering, displaying or printingdata.

Refer to “Calling up menufunctions” in the manufac-turer's operating instructions.


At a glance

Tachograph

Tachograph

M68_00-0121-01

8 Speed display

9 Warning lamp

When lit, this means that there is a mes-sage on the tachograph display screen.Driver symbol + fault code = operator er-ror (card missing or inserted incorrectly).Fault code = system fault (contact a ser-vice centre).

10 Display field for total distancerecorder, time, trip meter

11 Selection button for time, tripmeter

Press this button briefly to change thedisplay (10) between the time and tripmeter. Press and hold to reset the tripmeter to 0.

Destination display safety precau-tions

For notes on safety and operation,also refer to the manufacturer's operat-ing instructions.


At a glance


At a glance

Destination display control panel



At a glance


Route and/or destination numbers (3or 4-digit numbers) are entered by thedriver using the control panel for thedestination display. Button 1 can beused to toggle between the route anddestination numbers protocol. The act-ive protocol is displayed on the controlpanel's display screen. Each digit can beincreased or decreased. Pressing button2 sends the set number in the protocolselected to the displays (front, side andrear). This number represents the routeand/or destination number of the bus.

Note:

Switch on the ignition switch before oper-ation.

Note:

The data last displayed are stored so thatthe last settings are retained following apower supply interruption.

Button 1

Route/destination protocol selection

Button 2

Confirmation of the selected message

Button 3

To increase the thousands digit

Button 4

To increase the hundreds digit

Button 5

To increase the tens digit

Button 6

To increase the ones digit

Button 7

To decrease the thousands digit

Button 8

To decrease the hundreds digit

Button 9

To decrease the tens digit

Button 10

To decrease the ones digit

Load slot (11)

Using the PCMCIA card (short: PC card),which is inserted into the load slot, it ispossible to load customer-specific dataor software and store it to the controlunit. The following message appears onthe control panel's display screen follow-ing a successful transfer: DOWNLOADOK. The following message appears ifthe data could not be transferred: NOVALID DATA.


At a glance

Door pushbutton in the driver's area

Door pushbutton in the driver'sarea

Door pushbutton for front right door (I)and centre right door (II) (10) with integ-rated warning lamps (locator lighting alsoON when Lights ON).

Note:

The warning lamp lights up when: - adoor is open - a door is not fully closed(door not in the catches).

Note:

The warning lamp flashes in the follow-ing situations: - the emergency switch isactivated - the operating pressure is toolow (depressurised bus door) - the dooris open and the speed of the vehicle ismore than 3 km/h - the door malfunc-tions.

Danger.

The doors do not operate if the displayflashes. Do not move the bus if a warn-ing lamp in the door pushbutton lightsup or a yellow or red warning is shownon the display screen. Otherwise, a redwarning appears on the display screenand the warning buzzer sounds.

Note:

A door cannot be operated unless theignition is ON, the bus is stationary andthe doors have been unlocked.

M72_00-0332-71


At a glance

Scope of tools and emergency equipment

Scope of tools and emergencyequipment

Tools and emergency equipment:

Warning triangle

Hydraulic jack 10 t maximum loadwith base board (observe the manu-facturer's operating instructions).

Hydraulic jack 5 t maximum load(3-axle buses only) (observe the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).

Ramp

Wheel chock

WAF 27/32 socket spanner

Towing bolt/towing coupling

Crank for emergency operation of thedriver's window

Tool box (containing spare bulbs,valve connector, tyre inflation hose,torch and warning lamp etc.) (option)

Location of the fire extinguishers

M86_00-0055-01

A hand fire extinguisher (1) is locatedunder the first row of seats on the rightwhen viewed in the direction of travel.

Note:

Check the inspection plate and have thefire extinguisher tested by an authorisedperson if necessary.

Location of the first-aid kits

M86_00-0126-01

First-aid kits (1) are fitted behind thedriver's seat on the left-hand side.

Note:

Check the expiry dates of the contentsof the first-aid kit every year, and replacethem if necessary.


At a glance

Tow bar location (option)

Tow bar location (option)

The tow bar is bolted into the left-sideluggage compartment to the rear of thefront axle.

Location of spare mirror (option)

M88_00-0009-01

There is a replacement mirror (1) in theleft-side luggage compartment immedi-ately to the rear of the front axle. It isdesigned to act as an emergency mirroronly.

Loosen 4 screws (2) to enable you toremove the mirror.

For “Removing the exterior mirror/fit-ting the emergency mirror”, refer to the“Practical advice” section of the Operat-ing Instructions.

Emergency hammer (option)

M86_00-0304-71

Pull out emergency hammer (1) withthe tamper-evident seal from bracket(2).

The emergency hammer is ready foruse.

If the vehicle is equipped with anelectronic anti-theft alarm system(option), this symbol appears on thedisplay screen in conjunction with


At a glance

Emergency hammer (option)

a yellow alert when an emergencyhammer has been removed.


At a glance

Driver's rest area

Driver's rest area


At a glance

Driver's rest area

1 Ventilation flaps

2 Intercom (connection to thedriver)

3 Interior light

4 Not assigned

5 Not assigned

6 Not assigned

7 Switch for ventilation blowerspeed I and II

8 Heating controller


At a glance

On-board kitchenette refrigerator control panel

On-board kitchenette refrigeratorcontrol panel


At a glance

On-board kitchenette refrigerator control panel

1 Refrigerator control panel

2 Display

3 Refrigerator on/off button

4 Refrigerator ON LED

5 Desired temperature selectorbuttons

6 Button for activating temper-ature adjustment

Note:

Press and hold until the de-sired value currently set isdisplayed. Then adjust thetemperature using buttons(5).


At a glance

Tour guide refrigerator control panel

Tour guide refrigerator controlpanel


At a glance

Tour guide refrigerator control panel

1 Refrigerator on indicator lamp

2 Malfunction lamp

3 Thermostat controller

4 Catch


At a glance

Windscreen washer reservoir

Windscreen washer reservoir


At a glance

Seat belt reminder display

1 Windscreen washer reservoirfiller opening

Note:

The windscreen washer reser-voir is accessible through aflap in the front right door-way. To remove the cover,loosen the 4 quick-releaselocks anti-clockwise.



M54_00-0978-01

With the ignition switched on and thedoors closed, “Fasten seat belts” symbol(1) on the right-hand side at the front ofthe passenger compartment is displayedfor 5 minutes after the bus has pulledaway.


At a glance

Exterior flaps on the Tourismo 15 RHD (example of 2-axle bus)

Exterior flaps on the Tourismo 15RHD (example of 2-axle bus)


At a glance

Design and function description: fire detection system

1 Spare wheel

2 Fuel tank / AdBlue reservoir

3 Stowage compartment /vehicle tool kit (in 3-axlebuses, above the driven axle)

4 Luggage compartment/lavat-ory

5 Luggage compartment/multi-purpose room/driver's restarea

6 Auxiliary switch panel (in 3-axle buses, above the trailingaxle)

7 Auxiliary heating, stowagecompartment

8 Radiator, fan

9 Main switch panel

10 Batteries (in 3-axle buses,above the trailing axle), elec-trics

11 Luggage compartment

12 Stowage compartment

13 Exhaust system

14 Engine air intake

15 Engine compartment

Design and function description:fire detection system

The main components of the fire detec-tion system are the detection agent tankand the detection line. The detectionagent tank is filled with nitrogen gas andGlysantin. The detection line is connec-ted to the detection agent tank. The endof the detection line is sealed. The pres-sure (approximately 24 bar) of the de-tection agent tank therefore acts on thedetection line at all times. The pressureof the detection agent tank is monitoredby a pressure switch. In the event of afire in the engine compartment, the de-tection line melts and the nitrogen gasand Glysantin escapes from the detec-tion agent tank. The pressure switch onthe detection agent tank triggers a warn-ing signal that is displayed to the driverin the form of a fire alarm notification.

Operating and malfunction displays:fire detection system

Fire detection system malfunction

In the event of a fire detection systemfailure or malfunction, a yellow warn-ing level malfunction is displayed on thescreen in conjunction with this icon.

Caution:

If a yellow warning level malfunction isdisplayed, it is permissible to drive oncarefully but the bus should be checkedby an OMNIplus Service Partner at theearliest opportunity.

Fire detection system triggered

A triggering of the fire detection system(e.g. due to a fire in the engine compart-


At a glance

Operating and malfunction displays: fire detection system

ment) is indicated by this icon on thescreen in conjunction with a red warninglevel malfunction. A signal sounds.

Danger.

Risk of accident. If this alert is displayed,bring the vehicle to an immediate halt(road and traffic conditions permitting),open all the doors and urge the pas-sengers to disembark. Then operate themaster safety switch and apply the park-ing brake. Disembark and implement orarrange further measures.


Driver's area controlsTable of contents

Rotary light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Steering column switch for light and wiper functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Steering column switch for retarder and cruise control (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Adjustable steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Parking brake and emergency release device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Basic settings menu on display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Brightness setting of the display screen and instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Display screen in the instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Calling up and interpreting the fuel consumption indicator (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Air suspension safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Raising/lowering the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Normal level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Activating/deactivating axle load transfer for trailing axle (3-axle buses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Activating/deactivating the bus stop brake (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Activating/deactivating the drive-off lock (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146


Driver's area controlsTable of contents

Important information on the steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Turning the steering wheel when the bus is stationary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Activating the attendant call system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148


Driver's area controlsRotary light switch

Rotary light switch

combines the following functions:

M54_00-1248-71

0 Lights switched off/daytimedriving lights switched on(country-specific)

Note:

Buses with daytime driv-ing lights (country-specific):as soon as the engine isswitched on, the side lamps,the dipped-beam headlampsand the licence plate lampsswitch on automatically.

1 Side lamps

2 Headlamps: Dipped-beamheadlamps/main-beam head-lamps (depending on thesteering column switch po-sition) with the ignition switchin position 2 (drive position)

Note:

In countries where trafficdrives on the other side ofthe road to that in the coun-try where the vehicle wasregistered, there is a riskof oncoming traffic beingdazzled by the asymmetric-al dipped-beam headlamps.When driving in these coun-tries, observe country-specificregulations (mask headlampsif necessary).

3 Front foglamps (pull switchto 1st detent): In additionto the side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps or main-beam headlamps if the igni-tion switch has been switchedto ON. Indicator lamp (3.1)lights up.

4 Rear foglamp (pull switch to2nd detent). In addition tothe front foglamps. Indicat-or lamp (4.1) lights up. Whena trailer or skibox is connec-ted, the rear foglamp on thetowing vehicle is disabled andonly the rear foglamp connec-ted via the trailer socket isenabled.


Driver's area controlsSteering column switch for light and wiper functions

Steering column switch for lightand wiper functions

M54_00-0081-01

1 Horn: Press button

2 Indicate left and right withautomatic reset: Push theswitch stalk beyond the pointof resistance until it clicksinto position.

3 One-touch indicators for alane change: Press the switchstalk only briefly (not beyondthe pressure point). The turnsignals flash five times.

4 Headlamp flasher: Pull thestalk upwards

5 Main-beam and dipped-beamheadlamps: Stalk in basicposition = dipped-beam head-lamps, stalk down = main-beam headlamps

6 Windscreen wipers: Turn thesleeve on the switch stalk:speed 0 = off, speed INT = in-termittent, speed I = normal,speed II = rapid

7 Wipe and wash: Push sleeveon the switch stalk towardsthe steering column. Withwindscreen wipers switchedoff = windscreen wipe andwash

Steering column switch for retarderand cruise control (overview)

The “General information/Safety pre-cautions” in the “Driving systems” sec-tion of the Operating Instructions mustbe observed.


Driver's area controlsSteering column switch for retarder and cruise control (overview)

Combined drive/brake cruisecontrol

M54_00-1003-01

Note:

Precondition: bus speed must be great-er than 10 mph (15 km/h). The clutchand service brake pedals must be fully re-leased and the continuous brakes mustnot be active.

Note:

The speed is maintained constant onlyfor as long as the braking performance ofthe retarder remains sufficient for this tobe possible. If necessary, shift down andreduce speed.

1.1 Tap briefly (< 0.5seconds) = current speed isset and shown on the displayscreen.

Note:

Tap briefly again (< 0.5seconds) = set speed isincreased by 0.3 mph (0.5km/h).

Note:

Press and hold (> 0.5seconds) = bus speedincreased until switchreleased. When the steeringcolumn switch is released, thecurrent speed is set as thenew value.

1.2 Tap briefly (< 0.5seconds) = current speed isset and shown on the displayscreen, or resumption of laststored speed.

Note:

Tap briefly again (< 0.5seconds) = set speed isreduced by 0.3 mph (0.5km/h).

Note:

Press and hold (> 0.5seconds) = bus speedreduced until switch released.When the steering columnswitch is released, the currentspeed is set as the newvalue.

1.3 Cruise control is switchedoff and the last stored valueremains stored in the controlunit (until the ignition switchis switched off).



Note:

The combined drive/brakecruise control is deactivatedautomatically as soon as theservice brake is applied withcruise control operational atthis time.

Note:

If the clutch pedal is de-pressed, cruise control willremain active when the clutchpedal is subsequently re-leased. However, cruise con-trol will be deactivated if theclutch is depressed for morethan 5 seconds. A short sig-nal sounds to indicate thatcruise control is in standbymode.

For detailed operating informa-tion, refer to “Activating combineddrive/brake cruise control” in the “Driv-ing systems” section of the OperatingInstructions.

Variable speed limiter (Temposet)

M54_00-1003-01

1.4 Tap briefly = functionchangeover to speedlimiter (LIM). The functionchangeover is indicated bythe “LIM” symbol on thedisplay screen. If the steeringcolumn switch (A) is nowmoved to position (1.1) or(1.2), the current speed willbe set as the limit speed. Theset value is shown on thedisplay screen. The drivermust continue to use theaccelerator pedal.

Note:

Press and hold (1.1): the limitspeed that was set will beincreased by increments of 3mph (5 km/h) for as long asthe switch is pressed.



Note:

Press and hold (1.2): thelimit speed set will be de-creased by increments of 3mph (5 km/h) for as long asthe switch is pressed.

Note:

To deactivate: combinationswitch to position 1.3 oractivate cruise control (bypressing button (1.4)).

Note:

The speed limiter can be ac-tivated at speeds above 6mph (10 km/h); between 6mph (10 km/h) and 10 mph(15 km/h) it is always lim-ited to 10 mph (15 km/h).It is possible to exceed theset speed temporarily by de-pressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the stop (kickdown).If the driver takes his footoff the acceleration pedal,the limit speed set will applyonce more.

Note:

The retarder is automatic-ally activated if the set limitspeed is exceeded by morethan 4 km/h in overrunmode.

For detailed operating information,refer to “Activating the variable speedlimiter (Temposet)” in the “Driving sys-

tems” section of the Operating Instruc-tions.

Continuous braking

M54_00-0082-01

Activating continuous braking:

Danger.

Do not activate the continuous brake (re-tarder) on a slippery road surface. Thewheels could lock - risk of skidding.



Danger.

If the accelerator pedal is operated whilethe continuous brakes are active, the con-tinuous brakes are deactivated and brak-ing output is reduced to zero.

Caution:

Always move the combination switchthrough each of the available stages toachieve the required braking torque (donot move it directly to the required po-sition). It is not permitted to move thecombination switch directly to the re-quired position except in an emergency.However, it is acceptable to skip sever-al stages at once if you are reducing thebraking torque. For the optimum brakingtorque to be achieved, the engine shouldbe turning within its upper speed rangeso that the coolant does not overheat.

Danger.

When the ABS system is working cor-rectly, an activated continuous brakeis automatically deactivated if one orboth of the wheels on the driven axlethreatens to lock. If an ABS malfunctionmessage is present, there is no guaranteethat this function will be carried out - riskof skidding.

2.1 - 2.2 Retarder stage 1 - 2active2.3 - 2.5 Engine brake, con-stantly open throttle, retarderstages 3 and 4 active

Note:

The interaction between theengine brake and the con-stantly open throttle valvedepends on the brake torquecurrently available.

Engine speed increase

M54_00-0082-01

Precondition: bus stationary, engine run-ning.

1.1 The engine speed can beincreased up to a maximumof 750 rpm.1.3 Engine speed increase off,normal idling speed


Driver's area controlsAdjustable steering column

Adjustable steering column

Set the steering column to the releaseposition by pressing the lower section ofpushbutton (1).

Danger.

Do not make adjustments unless the busis stationary. Lock the steering column inplace after you have adjusted the steeringwheel to match the driver's requirements.To do this, press the upper section ofpushbutton (1).

Danger.

After the adjustable steering column hasbeen adjusted, the driver must check thatall instruments and indicator lamps arestill visible.

Note:

The steering column is automaticallylocked in place if pushbutton (1) is notpressed for approximately 12 (+/- 5)seconds.

M46_00-0030-01

Ignition switch

Danger.

Never lock the steering while the bus isin motion.

Danger.

Whenever you disembark, even for a shorttime, always remove the key so that thebus cannot be started by children or oth-er unauthorised persons.

M54_00-0083-01

0 Rest position:


Driver's area controlsParking brake and emergency release device

Note:

Insert or remove the key inthis position; the side lampscan be switched on.

1 Steering unlocked

Note:

Selected consumer units canbe switched on.

2 Drive position/ignition ON

3 Starting position

Parking brake and emergencyrelease device

Parking brake valve (1) combined withthe emergency release device for springactuators

Caution:

The parking brake spring actuators requirea release pressure of 5.8 to 6.4 bar. Atlow supply pressures, there is a risk thatthe brake may not be fully released, thatthe friction pads may make slight contactwhile the bus is in motion and that thebrake may be subjected to unnecessarilyhigh thermal loads. The relevant icon onthe screen must go out when the parkingbrake is released. If the compressed-airsystem for the parking brake is damaged,it is possible to release the parking brakeusing the emergency release device: theemergency release device is combinedwith the parking brake valve and is op-erated in exactly the same way as thenormal parking brake. The valve auto-matically switches over to the air reservefor the emergency release device and thespring actuators are released.

Caution:

Do not apply the parking brake unless thebus is stationary.

Danger.

Always apply the parking brake beforeyou leave the driver's area.

Danger.

Check the hand lever for full engagement.

Note:

An audible warning sounds if the ignitionis switched off without the parking brakeengaged.


Driver's area controlsBasic settings menu on display screen

Danger.

The braking effect of ABS is cancelledif you apply the parking brake while thevehicle is in motion.

M42_00-0444-01

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “Operation” section of theOperating Instructions.

Basic settings menu on displayscreen

Note:

In the menu described below, it is pos-sible to change the basic value for thedisplay screen illumination and instrumentlighting with the driving lights switchedon, the volume of the turn signal buzzer,and the language setting for the displayscreen.

Switch the ignition starter switch toON.

Note:

The parking brake must be applied.

Turn the rotary light switch to head-lamps.

M54_00-0876-01

Wait for the basic screen to appear.

Note:

Acknowledge any malfunction alerts thatmight appear by pressing “Quit” button(10).

Press “Info” button (10).

The screen display shown appears.


Driver's area controlsBrightness setting of the display screen and instrument lighting

Note:

A = Display screen or instrument lightingbasic value with driving lights ON

Note:

B = Turn signal buzzer volume

Note:

C = Display screen language selection

Select the setting you wish to changeby pressing “Info” button (12).

Note:

The corresponding symbol appears ingreen.

Change the setting by pressing but-ton - (9) or + (11).

Confirm by pressing button (12).

Exit the settings menu by pressingthe “Quit” button (10).

Brightness setting of the displayscreen and instrument lighting

Note:

Night or daytime brightness is set de-pending on the position of the rotary lightswitch.

Note:

The values set are automatically storedwhen button (24) is released.

Switch the ignition starter switch toON.


Driver's area controlsDisplay screen in the instrument cluster

M54.00-2207-71

Press and hold button (24).

The display screen illumination andinstrument lighting are dimmed.

Press button (24) briefly.

The display screen illumination andinstrument lighting are immediatelyset to maximum brightness.

Display screen in the instrumentcluster

M68_00-0216-71

The screen (1) is active at all times whilethe ignition starter switch is ON. Thescreen is a status indicator for showingoperating and malfunction information(icons). Additionally, it can be used todisplay on-board diagnostics information.

To hold/scroll screen display

M68_00-0125-01

When the lower section of display con-trol pushbutton (1) is pressed, the oper-ating, service and malfunction displaysare retrieved in sequence (exception: redwarning level malfunction). When theupper section of display control push-button (1) is pressed, the current dis-play mode is held. No other messagewill be displayed except for red warn-ing level malfunctions. The informationshown on the screen is, however, peri-odically refreshed. A diamond symbol inthe top right corner of the screen indic-



ates that the screen is being held. Presseither the lower or upper section of thepushbutton again to allow the screen todisplay the next display menu.

Screen sequence at start-up

M54.00-2062-71

Whenever the ignition starter switch isswitched to ON, the red warning levelmalfunction overview appears on thescreen first, followed by the yellowwarning level malfunction overview andthen by the service overview. If, duringthe start-up, there are no malfunctionspresent or services due, this stageis skipped and the supply pressure

operating displays appear straight away(see illustration).

Red warning level malfunctionoverview

M54.00-2063-71

The red warning level malfunctionoverview is indicated by a flashing redwarning level malfunction lamp (3). Anyred warning level malfunctions thatare present are indicated by meansof separate operating and malfunctionsymbols (icons) (1). If there are no redwarning level malfunctions, the screendisplay immediately switches over tothe yellow warning level malfunction

overview, otherwise the screen displayswitches over to the yellow warning levelmalfunction overview after approximately5 seconds.

Danger.

In the event of a red warning level mal-function, the bus must be stopped imme-diately (traffic conditions permitting) andan OMNIplus Service Partner must be no-tified.



Yellow warning level malfunctionoverview

M54.00-2064-71

The yellow warning level malfunctionoverview is indicated by a flashing yellowwarning level malfunction lamp (4). Anyyellow warning level malfunctions thatare present are indicated by means ofseparate operating and malfunction sym-bols (icons) (1). If there are no yellowwarning level malfunctions, the screendisplay immediately switches over to theservice overview, otherwise the screendisplay switches over to the service over-view after approximately 5 seconds.

Caution:

In the event of a yellow warning levelmalfunction, it is permissible to drive oncarefully but the bus should be checkedby an OMNIplus Service Partner at theearliest opportunity.

Service notifications

M54.00-2065-71

Service notifications generally inform thedriver that service products need to bereplenished or wear parts need to bereplaced. In the event of a service noti-fication, the status indicator at the topright of the display screen lights up. Any

service tasks that are due are indicatedby means of individual icons (1). If noservice tasks are due, the screen dis-play immediately switches to the supplypressure operating display.

Compressed-air supply pressureoperating displays

M54.00-2066-71

The supply pressure (0 to 12 bar) forcircuits 1 (front axle or trailing axle), 2(driven axle) and 3 (auxiliary consumers)is displayed. If there is sufficient sup-ply pressure in all circuits, the screendisplay changes to the engine operatingdisplay after approximately 5 seconds



and the audible warning ceases. If thesensor signal is faulty, the screen dis-plays toggle between the minimum andmaximum value in a 1 second cycle.

Danger.

The bus must not be driven until the aud-ible warning has ceased.

Engine operating displays

M54.00-2067-71

Engine oil pressure (1) (between 0 and6 bar) and engine oil level (2) are dis-played. After approximately 5 seconds,the screen display changes to the fuel

tank and battery operating display. If thesensor signal is faulty, the screen dis-plays toggle between the minimum andmaximum value in a 1 second cycle.

Note:

The engine oil pressure should be higherthan 0.5 bar at idling speed and higherthan 2 bar when the bus is being driv-en. A negative value (-) for the engine oillevel indicates that the oil level needs tobe topped up.

Battery/supply tank operatingdisplay

M54.00-2068-71

AdBlue additive supply (1) (empty 0 tofull 1/1) and battery voltage (2) (0 to32 V) are displayed. After approximately5 seconds, the screen display changesto the Driving operating display. If thesensor signal is faulty, the screen dis-plays toggle between the minimum andmaximum value in a 1 second cycle.



Note:

An icon appears on the basic screenwhen the level in the AdBlue supply tankhas fallen to 33% of capacity.

Note:

The battery voltage display should show25 - 28 V when the engine is running. Ifthis is not the case, you should visit anOMNIplus Service Partner as a matter ofurgency.

Fuel consumption indicator (option)

M54.00-2069-71

Different measured values and calculatedaverage values are shown in the fuelconsumption indicator (option) in zone A(values since start) and B (values sincereset).

Note:

For more detailed information, refer to“Calling up and interpreting the fuel con-sumption indicator” in the “Driver's areacontrols” section of the Operating Instruc-tions.

Driving operating display

M54.00-2070-71

This is the basic screen normally shownwhen the bus is being driven, but alsowhen stationary. In this display mode, allitems of bus operating information arerepresented as symbols (icons).

Note:

Outside temperature (1) is shown on eachscreen.



Danger.

RISK OF ACCIDENT. If the temperaturedisplay shows a temperature of aroundfreezing point (0 °C), the road surfacemay be icy, especially in areas protectedfrom the sun and on bridges. Following asudden change in temperature, e.g. afterdriving out of a depot, an accurate tem-perature reading will be displayed onlyafter a delay.

Red warning level malfunction

M54.00-2071-71

With the first occurrence of a red warn-ing level malfunction, the malfunction

symbol (icon) associated with this mal-function is displayed in the centre ofthe screen. At the same time, a signalsounds and red warning level malfunc-tion lamp (3) flashes.

Danger.

In the event of a red warning level mal-function, the bus must be stopped imme-diately (traffic conditions permitting) andan OMNIplus Service Partner must be no-tified.

Red warning level malfunctionlamp (continued)

M54.00-2207-71

The malfunction can be acknowledgedby pressing Quit button (21), but onlyif the bus is stationary and the parkingbrake is applied. The red warning levelmalfunction display is then faded intothe background. This frees the screenfor other messages to be displayed orqueries to be made. A lit red warninglevel malfunction lamp (3) indicates thatthere are red warning level malfunctionspresent but they are not currently beingdisplayed on the screen.



Yellow warning level malfunction

M54.00-2072-71

With the first occurrence of a yellowwarning level malfunction, the malfunc-tion symbol (icon) associated with thismalfunction is displayed in the centre ofthe screen. At the same time, a signalsounds and yellow warning level malfunc-tion lamp (4) flashes.

Caution:

In the event of a yellow warning levelmalfunction, it is permissible to drive oncarefully but the bus should be checkedby an OMNIplus Service Partner at theearliest opportunity.

Yellow alert in the background

M54.00-2115-71

The yellow warning level malfunction dis-play is faded into the background auto-matically after approximately 5 seconds.This frees the screen for other messagesto be displayed or queries to be made.A lit yellow warning level malfunction

lamp (4) indicates that there are yellowwarning level malfunctions present butthey are not currently being displayed onthe screen.


Driver's area controlsCalling up and interpreting the fuel consumption indicator (option)

Calling up and interpreting the fuelconsumption indicator (option)

M68_00-0125-01

To call up the fuel consumption indic-ator:

Note:

Press the lower section of display controlpushbutton (1) several times until the fuelconsumption indicator appears.

Note:

When the bus is stationary and the park-ing brake is applied, the display can alsobe changed using the “Quit” button belowthe display screen.

M54.00-2069-71

To hold (freeze) the fuel consumptionindicator:

Note:

Press and hold the upper section of thedisplay control pushbutton as soon as theindicator appears on the display screen.Otherwise, the display changes to theDriving operating display automaticallyafter 10 seconds.

Note:

When the bus is stationary and the park-ing brake is applied, the screen displaycan also be held using “Info” button (11)below the display screen.

Interpreting the display (after start):

Note:

The upper area of the display screen (A)shows various measured values since thelast start:


Driver's area controlsCalling up and interpreting the fuel consumption indicator (option)

Note:

1 = Distance covered since start

Note:

2 = Driving time since start

Note:

3 = Average speed since start

Note:

4 = Average fuel consumption since start

Interpreting the display (since reset):

Note:

The lower area of the display screen (B)shows various measured values since thelast time the “Reset” button was pressed:

Note:

5 = Distance covered since reset

Note:

6 = Driving time since reset

Note:

7 = Average speed since reset

Note:

8 = Average fuel consumption since reset

Resetting both areas of the display

Note:

For safety reasons, the displays cannot bereset unless the bus is stationary and theparking brake is applied.

Note:

The upper area of the display (after start)can be reset by briefly pressing “Re-set” button (10) in the selected fuel con-sumption menu or by leaving the ignitionstarter switch switched to OFF for morethan 4 hours.

Note:

The lower area of the display (since re-set) can be reset by pressing and hold-ing “Reset” button (10) in the selectedfuel consumption menu (for more than 3seconds).


Driver's area controlsAir suspension safety precautions

Air suspension safety precautions

The forward section of the chassis andthe guidance of the driven axle havebeen structurally designed in such a wayas to ensure that the bus remains man-oeuvrable when the suspension air bagshave been depressurised.

In this condition, the full weight of thevehicle body is supported by the stopbuffers fitted at the forward section ofthe chassis and at the rear axle. Thesestop buffers are unladen when the sus-pension is at normal level and are in-tended only to prevent the body of thevehicle from dropping onto the axle inthe event of extreme suspension com-pression. The stop buffers are not de-signed for permanent loading and cannotbe used as a replacement for the normalsuspension under any circumstances.The bodywork could otherwise sufferdamage (cracks, etc.).

Danger.

Although the bus remains manoeuvrablewhile the suspension is depressurised,it must be driven no faster than walkingpace to the nearest lay-by or OMNIplusService Partner. Whenever work is carriedout on the air suspension system, thebody must always be supported by jacksand stands positioned at the designatedpoints because the body of the bus coulddrop relatively quickly in the event of aloss of air.

Raising/lowering the bus

Preconditions: ignition switch ON,bus stationary, doors closed, operat-ing pressure > 6.5 bar, level controloperational.

Raise or lower the bus using thepushbutton.

Danger.

The bus must not be lowered if there arepersons present in the immediate vicinityof the bus.

Danger.

Do not exceed the maximum permissiblevehicle height when driving with the busraised above normal level. In Germany,the maximum permissible vehicle heightis limited to 4 metres. Observe local na-tional regulations if the bus is operated inother countries.


Driver's area controlsNormal level

Danger.

The bus is not permitted to be drivenfaster than walking pace whenever ithas been raised or lowered out of nor-mal level.

Note:

The suspension air bags are deflated orinflated and the superstructure is loweredor raised by 70 mm respectively.

Note:

It is possible to raise or lower the busonly at speeds of up to 12 mph (20km/h).

Note:

The bus returns to normal level as soonas its speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).

Note:

As raising the bus increases the approachangle, it is advisable to raise the busabove normal level on parts of journeysinvolving numerous hairpin bends, for ex-ample.

Note:

The corresponding symbol appears on theinstrument cluster display screen whenev-er the bus has been raised or lowered.

The bus is lowered or raised for aslong as the pushbutton is pressed.

Normal levelPreconditions: ignition switch ON,bus stationary, doors closed, operat-ing pressure > 6.5 bar, level controloperational.

Press the pushbutton to return thebus to normal level.

Note:

Bus normal level (driving position).


Driver's area controlsActivating/deactivating axle load transfer for trailing axle (3-axle buses only)

Activating/deactivating axle loadtransfer for trailing axle (3-axlebuses only)

M32_00-0182-71

The axle load transfer of the trailingaxle is activated by pressing pushbut-ton (1) in the driver's area.

Note:

The axle load transfer (pull-away aid) isprimarily used in the winter for pullingaway or for reversing in wintry road con-ditions. The compression force on thedriven axle is increased because the loadon the trailing axle is reduced.

Note:

After the axle load transfer has been ac-tivated, the compressed-air supply to thesuspension air bags for the trailing axle isstopped. An overflow valve deflates thesuspension air bags.

Note:

The pull-away aid cannot be activatedunless the ignition switch is ON and thebus is travelling at a speed of below 20mph (30 km/h).

When the pull-away aid is active, theLED lights up in the pushbutton andthe “Pull-away aid active” symbolappears on the screen.

Press rocker switch (1) again toswitch off the pull-away aid.

Note:

The pull-away aid will be cancelled if theair pressure in the suspension air bagsof the driven axle exceeds 7 bar whilethe bus is in motion and the axle loadrelief function is active. The suspensionair bags are again under an equal loading.

Note:

The pull-away aid similarly switches off ifthe speed of the bus exceeds 20 mph (30km/h).


Driver's area controlsActivating/deactivating the bus stop brake (option)

Activating/deactivating the busstop brake (option)

Ignition starter switch ON

Danger.

Do not activate the bus stop brake unlessthe bus is stationary. The bus stop brakemust not be used as a means to brakea coasting bus to a halt. The bus mustnever be parked with only the bus stopbrake applied. Apply the parking brakeat bus stops on steep uphill or downhillgradients that exceed 15 %.

Danger.

Always apply the parking brake correctlybefore you leave the driver's area.

Press the bus stop brake pushbutton.

The wheels on the driven axle arebraked with reduced pressure.

Danger.

If the parking brake is subsequently ap-plied, the bus stop brake will be released.After the parking brake is released again,the bus stop brake will be reactivatedafter a delay. For this reason, it is es-sential that the service brake be appliedduring this time.

Note:

The icon above appears on the instrumentcluster display screen.

Note:

The “Ready to depart” icon appears onthe display screen at the same time.

Depress the accelerator pedal.

The “bus stop brake” function is de-activated again and the icons on thedisplay screen go out.

Note:

The bus stop brake is also deactivated ifyou apply the parking brake or switch theignition starter switch to OFF.


Driver's area controlsActivating/deactivating the drive-off lock (option)

Activating/deactivating the drive-offlock (option)

Ignition switched on

Bus stationary

Danger.

If the drive-off lock is not used as inten-ded, the vehicle could roll away. Thiscould result in an accident with serious orfatal injuries. Therefore: - Always applythe parking brake before you start/stopthe engine or leave the driver's area. -Do not, under any circumstances, use thedrive-off lock to park the bus or to securethe bus against rolling away. - Apply theparking brake when stopping on steep up-hill or downhill gradients exceeding 15 %or at bus stops on steep uphill or down-hill gradients exceeding 15 %.

One or both passenger doors open.

All wheel brakes are applied automat-ically with a compressed-air pressure

of 2.0 bar, the engine runs at idlingspeed, and it is not possible to alterthe engine speed using the accelerat-or pedal.

Note:

This icon appears on the instrumentcluster display screen.

Close all passenger doors.

Note:

The “ready to depart” icon is shown onthe display screen.

Depress the accelerator pedal.

The drive-off lock is released assoon as the accelerator pedal is de-pressed. Both icons on the displayscreen go out.

Note:

The drive-off lock is also deactivated ifyou apply the parking brake or switch offthe ignition.


Driver's area controlsImportant information on the steering system

Important information on thesteering system

The dimensions of the steering systemand the mechanical steering transmis-sion ratio were designed such that,in the event of a malfunction in thehydraulic power steering system, theeffort required to turn the steeringwheel would not exceed a specificvalue deemed by legislators to be themaximum reasonable force.

For vehicles weighing over 12 t, thismaximum operating force is 450 N (400N for vehicles between 3.5 t and 12 t)applied to the steering wheel rim in thestraight-ahead position. This force mustbe sufficient to achieve a turning circlewith a radius of 20 m at a road speed ofapproximately 10 km/h.

The driver must be aware that, in theevent of a sudden failure in the powersteering (e.g. due to a pump drive mal-function), the bus will remain steerablebut considerably more effort will be re-quired.

Since there is an extremely low probab-ility of this situation occurring - but if itdoes occur, it often does so completelyunexpectedly - the driver could wronglyassume that the steering system hasbeen blocked. However, the bus doesremain steerable provided the driver ap-plies the necessary force.

This important information is intended toclarify the scenario described and pre-vent the driver from possibly misjudgingthe situation.

Danger.

In the event of a power steering failure,the bus becomes very difficult to steer.Have the malfunction rectified immedi-ately by an OMNIplus Service Partner.

Turning the steering wheel whenthe bus is stationary

Adhere to the instructions.

Note:

To prevent damage to the steeringcolumn, the following points must beobserved when turning the steering wheelwith the bus stationary, without hydraulicsupport (engine switched off) and withouta turntable under the front wheels (tyresin direct contact with the ground):

Release the steering wheel adjusterand push the steering wheel fullydown. Lock the steering wheel ad-juster in place. Turn the steeringwheel using both hands at an angleof 90° to 180° to one another.

Caution:

Never have more than one person turnthe steering wheel. Do not pull the steer-ing wheel on one side only.


Driver's area controlsActivating the attendant call system

Note:

We ask the workshop in particular to notethis.

Activating the attendant call system

Press the attendant call systemswitch with the ignition switched on.

The LED in the switch lights up.

An icon now appears on the instru-ment cluster display screen wheneverthe attendant call button on the ser-vice set above one of the passengerseats is pressed.

Note:

A red LED on this seat's service set lightsup.


Switch descriptions

Table of contents

Master safety switch (emergency-off switch) (national variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Mirror adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Windscreen roller sunblind pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Pushbutton for co-driver's roller sunblind (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Axle load transfer switch (3-axle buses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Diesel particulate filter (DPF) regeneration start/inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) OFF pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Pushbutton for GO 240-8 transmission shift system failsafe mode (option) (2/4 and N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Pushbutton for GO 240-8 transmission shift system failsafe mode (option) (activation of failsafe modeand R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Creep mode pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Display control pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Driver's area lighting switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

ADR pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Reading lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Passenger-compartment lighting switch positions I+II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157


Switch descriptions

Table of contents

Night lighting switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Roof hatch pushbutton - air in/air out (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Attendant call system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

“School bus operation” pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Audible reverse warning feature switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Driver's power window pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Pushbutton for raising/lowering the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Normal-level pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Passenger stop request system enabling switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Switch for the driver's window heating/mirror heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Windscreen heating switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Horn changeover switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Central locking pushbutton for the left-side luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Central locking pushbutton for the right-side luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Kitchenette enabling switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Lavatory enabling switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163


Switch descriptions

Table of contents

Switch for electrical circuits > 100 V (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Seat microphone switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Pushbutton for hanging up the intercom (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Selection pushbutton for intercom in the driver's rest area/kitchenette (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Switch for deactivating pedal-activated continuous braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Bus stop brake pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Hazard warning lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Door I pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Door II pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Bus stop brake emergency release switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

ADR button (accident data recorder) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168


Switch descriptions

Master safety switch (emergency-off switch) (national variant)

Master safety switch (emergency-off switch) (national variant)

When master safety switch (1) is op-erated, the engine is switched off ifrunning. The tachograph, instrumentcluster (option), interior lighting and roofhatches remain operational. Operate theemergency-off switch by pressing the redknob. Unlock the switch by turning thered knob anti-clockwise.

Danger.

Risk of accident. The emergency-offswitch should not be operated exceptin an emergency and only with the busstationary - never while the bus is inmotion. Operation of the emergency-offswitch causes the engine to switchoff automatically. The power steeringwould consequently be disabled if thebus were in motion. Additional effortwould then be required in order to steer.Furthermore, the power supply to allimportant electrical consumers (e.g. buslighting, ABS, electronic transmission shiftsystem, etc.) would be interrupted. Theroadworthiness of the bus is at risk.

Note:

Additional functions may be available, de-pending on the national variant.

Note:

In Finland, Greece, Spain and Italy, thehazard warning lamps and interior light-ing are switched on automatically. Thecentral locking is enabled (ECE-R 36).

Note:

In France, the hazard warning lamps areenabled.

Note:

In Norway, the hazard warning lamps,interior lighting, auxiliary heating (waterheater) and horn are enabled.

Note:

In Poland, the hazard warning lamps areswitched on automatically.

Note:

In Austria, operating the emergency-offswitch switches off the engine and inter-rupts the supply of power to the entireelectrical system.

M54_00-0986-01


Switch descriptions

Mirror adjuster

Mirror adjuster

Using this control element, it is possibleto change the position of the left or rightexterior mirror. Which mirror is adjusteddepends on the position of adjustmentbutton (1).

M68_00-0146-01

Windscreen roller sunblind pushbut-ton (option)

The pushbutton is used to raise or lowerthe roller sunblind. The roller sunblind isactive only for as long as the pushbuttonis pressed.

Pushbutton for co-driver's rollersunblind (option)

The pushbutton is used to raise or lowerthe roller sunblind. The roller sunblind isactive only for as long as the pushbuttonis pressed.


Switch descriptions

Axle load transfer switch (3-axle buses only)

Axle load transfer switch (3-axlebuses only)

Pressing the pushbutton on the instru-ment panel activates the axle load trans-fer of the 3rd axle provided the bus istravelling at a speed of below 30 km/h.If the axle load transfer is already active,pressing the pushbutton deactivates thefunction. If active, the axle load transferwill be deactivated automatically as soonas the bus is travelling faster than 30km/h. A symbol on the screen and anLED in the pushbutton indicate whetherthe axle load transfer is active.

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “Driver's area controls” sec-tion of the Operating Instructions.

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)regeneration start/inhibit

Upper section of pushbutton pressed:Start DPF regeneration. Press lower sec-tion of pushbutton: Stop DPF regenera-tion or inhibit automatic DPF regenera-tion.

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)OFF pushbutton

This pushbutton deactivates the ESPfunction. The dynamic handling control(FDR) and acceleration skid control (ASR)functions are also disabled. This is indic-ated on the screen by a crossed-throughESP symbol. Pressing the pushbuttonagain or switching the ignition starterswitch to OFF and back to ON reactiv-ates the function.

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “Operation” section of theOperating Instructions.


Switch descriptions

Pushbutton for GO 240-8 transmission shift system failsafe mode (option) (2/4 and N)

Pushbutton for GO 240-8 trans-mission shift system failsafe mode(option) (2/4 and N)

While failsafe mode (option) is active,this pushbutton is used to request thegears that are available or to shift thetransmission to neutral.

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “Transmission shift systems”section.

Pushbutton for GO 240-8 trans-mission shift system failsafe mode(option) (activation of failsafe modeand R)

This pushbutton is used to activatefailsafe mode (option) or, if failsafe modeis already active, to shift into reversegear.

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “Transmission shift systems”section.

Creep mode pushbutton

Upper section of pushbutton pressed =creep mode deactivated.

Note:

The creep function enables the vehicleto creep forwards independently whenthe service brake is released with the en-gine idling without the driver having touse the accelerator pedal. The vehiclecrawls along at idling speed until thedriver uses the service brake to stop oruntil the creep function is deactivated/cancelled.

Note:

The creep function is available at all timesafter an engine start and is activatedafter the vehicle has pulled away for thefirst time. Using the pushbutton, it is pos-sible to deactivate this function in ex-actly the same way as it would be in thedisplay screen menu if this menu is cur-rently unavailable for some reason, suchas when the screen is displaying cameraimages.


Switch descriptions

Display control pushbutton

Display control pushbutton

Causes the screen display to change orfreezes the screen display

Note:

Press lower section: scroll through screendisplays.

Note:

Press upper section: hold current screendisplay.

Driver's area lighting switch

With the ignition starter switch switchedON, the driver's area lighting can beswitched on and off.


Switch descriptions

ADR pushbutton

ADR pushbutton

This pushbutton is used to switch on theaccident data recorder (ADR).

Reading lamps switch

With the switch in position 1 (down), thedriver can switch on the reading lampsas additional lighting for the vehicleinterior provided the ignition starterswitch has been switched to ON andeconomy mode is not active. All thereading lamps are then switched on.With the switch in position 2 (up), thedriver can enable the reading lamps forpassengers provided the conditions de-scribed above have been fulfilled and,in addition, the side lamps have beenswitched on.

Passenger-compartment lightingswitch positions I+II

With the switch in position 1 (down), allof the interior lighting can be switchedon provided the ignition starter switchhas been switched to ON and economymode is not active. If the ignition starterswitch is OFF, however, it is the nightlighting that will be switched on, evenif economy mode is active. With theswitch in position 2 (up) and the ignitionstarter switch ON, the night lighting canbe switched on even if economy mode isactive.


Switch descriptions

Night lighting switch

Night lighting switch

Using this switch, it is possible to switchon the LED night lighting provided theside lamps are switched on.

Roof hatch pushbutton - air in/airout (option)

It is possible to move the front and rearroof hatches individually to either theair-in or air-out position using the doublerocker switch provided the roof hatcheshave not been forced closed by air-con-ditioning or “smog” mode and the wind-screen wipers are not operating at speed1 or 2. When the roof hatches are open,the indicator lamp in the switch lights upand a corresponding operating symbol(icon) is shown on the display screen.If the upper section of the pushbuttonis pressed only briefly, the roof hatchmoves to the air-in position. The roofhatch opens fully if the upper sectionof the pushbutton is pressed for longerthan 1 second. If the lower section ofthe pushbutton is pressed only briefly,the roof hatch moves to the air-out pos-ition. The roof hatch closes if the lowersection of the pushbutton is pressed forlonger than 1 second.

Danger.

Do not operate the roof hatches unlessyou are sure that no persons are presentin the area around the hatches. There isa risk of injury and entrapment if partsof the body (fingers) are in the area ofmovement of the roof hatches.


Switch descriptions

Attendant call system switch

Attendant call system switch

Switches on the power supply for theattendant call function. A lamp in theswitch lights up when the switch ispressed. An operating symbol (icon)appears on the instrument clusterdisplay screen whenever the attendantcall button at one of the passenger seatsis pressed. At the same time, a red LEDon this seat's service set lights up.

“School bus operation” pushbutton(option)

Pressing this pushbutton switches onall the turn signals on the left and right.The school bus warning lights can bedeactivated using the school bus warn-ing lights pushbutton or the turn signalswitch on the steering column (indicateleft or right).

Audible reverse warning featureswitch (option)

This switch is used to switch off the aud-ible reverse warning that would normallysound when reverse gear is engaged.


Switch descriptions

Driver's power window pushbutton

Driver's power window pushbutton

The driver's window can be opened orclosed. The power window is active onlyfor as long as the pushbutton is pressed.

Danger.

The window's range of movement shouldbe kept clear of all obstructions (e.g. anypart of your body) while the pushbutton isbeing pressed (particularly during closing).

Pushbutton for raising/lowering thebus

The bus is raised or lowered when thepushbutton is pressed.

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “Driver's area controls” sec-tion.

Normal-level pushbutton

Pressing this pushbutton returns the busto normal level.

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “Driver's area controls” sec-tion.


Switch descriptions

Passenger stop request system enabling switch

Passenger stop request systemenabling switch

This switch is used to disable the pas-senger stop request system. The deac-tivation is indicated by a correspondingicon on the instrument cluster displayscreen.

Switch for the driver's windowheating/mirror heating

The heating for the driver's window andmirrors can be switched on using thispushbutton provided the ignition starterswitch has been switched to ON andeconomy mode is not active. The indic-ator lamp in the switch lights up at thesame time. The heating for the driver-'s window and mirrors cannot be re-started until the switch-off delay (30minutes) has elapsed. Switching the ig-nition starter switch to OFF cancels theswitch-off delay, and the heating for thedriver's window and mirrors switches offimmediately. If the economy functionis activated during the switch-off delay,the heating for the driver's window andmirrors will be switched off only for theduration of the economy period. If theswitch-off delay has not elapsed by thetime the economy function is deactiv-ated, the heating for the driver's windowand mirrors switches back on for theperiod of time remaining.


Switch descriptions

Windscreen heating switch (option)

Windscreen heating switch (option)

The windscreen heating can be switchedon using this pushbutton providedthe ignition starter switch has beenswitched to ON and economy modeis not active. The indicator lamp inthe switch lights up at the same time.The windscreen heating cannot berestarted until the switch-off delay (30minutes) has elapsed. Operating themaster safety switch or switching theignition starter switch to OFF cancelsthe switch-off delay, and the windscreenheating switches off immediately. If theeconomy function is activated during theswitch-off delay, the windscreen heatingwill be switched off only for the durationof the economy period. If the switch-offdelay has not elapsed by the time theeconomy function is deactivated, thewindscreen heating switches back on forthe period of time remaining.

Horn changeover switch (option)

Changeover between horn 1 (top/elec-tric)/horn 2 (bottom/air)

Central locking pushbutton for theleft-side luggage compartment

The luggage compartment flaps can belocked or unlocked electropneumaticallyusing the rocker switch provided the ig-nition starter switch has been switchedto ON. The luggage compartment light-ing switches on automatically providedthe luggage compartment flap circuiton one side of the bus is unlocked andone of the luggage compartment flapsis open. The LED in the rocker switchprovides the driver with a confirmationof the state. LED lit -> luggage compart-ment flaps unlocked.


Switch descriptions

Central locking pushbutton for the right-side luggage compartment

Central locking pushbutton for theright-side luggage compartment

The luggage compartment flaps can belocked or unlocked electropneumaticallyusing the rocker switch provided the ig-nition starter switch has been switchedto ON. The luggage compartment light-ing switches on automatically providedthe luggage compartment flap circuiton one side of the bus is unlocked andone of the luggage compartment flapsis open. The LED in the rocker switchprovides the driver with a confirmationof the state. LED lit -> luggage compart-ment flaps unlocked.

Kitchenette enabling switch (option)

With the kitchenette enabled, it is pos-sible to use the water supply, the light-ing and selected basic functions.

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “On-board kitchenette” sec-tion of the Operating Instructions.

Lavatory enabling switch (option)

All functions in the lavatory cabin areavailable when the lavatory cabin hasbeen enabled.

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “Lavatory” section of theOperating Instructions.


Switch descriptions

Switch for electrical circuits > 100 V (option)

Switch for electrical circuits > 100V (option)

Using this pushbutton, it is possible toisolate electrical circuits with an effectivevoltage of over 100 V from the mainpower supply circuit.

Observe the safety and operating in-formation in the manufacturer's operat-ing instructions.

Seat microphone switch

This switch activates the microphoneat the driver's seat to enable the driverto speak to passengers through the PAsystem.

Pushbutton for hanging up theintercom (option)

This pushbutton is available only in con-junction with the selection pushbuttonfor the intercom in the driver's restarea/kitchenette (option). Pressing theupper section of the pushbutton endsthe call connection with the intercomin the driver's rest area or on-board kit-chenette.


Switch descriptions

Selection pushbutton for intercom in the driver's rest area/kitchenette (option)

Selection pushbutton for intercomin the driver's rest area/kitchenette(option)

When the lower section of the pushbut-ton is pressed, a ring tone sounds at theintercom in the on-board kitchenette.The LED in the pushbutton lights up atthe same time. Once the handset hasbeen picked up, it is possible to speakto the person in the on-board kitchenetteusing the swan-neck microphone re-gardless of whether the microphone isalready switched on or not. The voice ofthe person in the on-board kitchenette isheard over the two front loudspeakers.When the upper section of the pushbut-ton is pressed, a ring tone sounds at theintercom in the driver's rest area and theLED in the pushbutton lights up. Oncethe receiver has been picked up, a con-versation can be held in the same way.When you have finished your conversa-tion, you should always press the uppersection of the intercom pushbutton, oth-erwise the radio will remain muted. TheLED in the pushbutton must go out.

Danger.

Please devote your attention primarily toroad and traffic conditions.

Danger.

Do not use the intercom unless road andtraffic conditions permit you to do sosafely. Please bear in mind that your buswill cover a distance of 14 metres everysecond at a speed of only 50 km/h.

Switch for deactivating pedal-activated continuous braking

None of the continuous brakes availablein the bus (retarder, engine brake, con-stantly open throttle) will be activatedin addition to the service brake whenthe driver depresses the brake pedal. Anotification (icon) showing the crossed-through “continuous brake” symbol thenappears in the screen's basic menu.

Note:

This switch is for use mainly in wintryroad conditions so that the driver canmoderate the braking effect more effect-ively.


Switch descriptions

Bus stop brake pushbutton (option)

Bus stop brake pushbutton (option)

When the pushbutton is pressed, allwheel brakes are applied with reducedpressure. It is prohibited to activate thebus stop brake unless the bus is station-ary.

Danger.

If the bus stop brake is not used as in-tended, the vehicle could roll away. Thiscould result in an accident with seri-ous or fatal injuries. Therefore: - Al-ways apply the parking brake before youstart/stop the engine or leave the driver'sarea (refer to the “Driver's area controls”section of the Operating Instructions).

Danger.

Do not under any circumstances use thebus stop brake as a parking brake or hill-holder. - Apply the parking brake whenev-er you come to a stop on a steep uphillor downhill gradient of more than 15 %or pull into a bus stop on a steep uphillor downhill gradient of more than 15 %. -Do not activate the bus stop brake unlessthe vehicle is stationary.

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “Driver's area controls” sec-tion of the Operating Instructions.

Hazard warning lamps switch

All the turn signals on the left and rightare switched on regardless of the pos-ition of the ignition starter switch. Theturn signal indicator in the hazard warn-ing lamps switch flashes and the greenturn signal indicator lamps in the instru-ment cluster flash.


Switch descriptions

Door I pushbutton

Door I pushbutton

The driver's pushbutton opens or closesthe front right door. The bus must bestationary for the door to open. Theopen state is displayed to the driver byan indicator lamp in the driver's push-button and a corresponding icon on theinstrument cluster display screen.

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “Opening/locking” section ofthe Operating Instructions.

Door II pushbutton

The driver's pushbutton opens or closesthe centre right door. The bus must bestationary for the door to open. Theopen state is displayed to the driver byan indicator lamp in the driver's push-button and a corresponding icon on theinstrument cluster display screen.

For notes on safety and operation,refer to the “Opening/locking” section ofthe Operating Instructions.

Bus stop brake emergency releaseswitch (option)

This switch is used to release the busstop brake in an emergency or in theevent of a malfunction.

Danger.

This switch has a tamper-evident seal andis intended to be operated only in theevent of a malfunction in the bus stopbrake or drive-off lock.

Danger.

Make absolutely sure that the parkingbrake is applied before you operate thebus stop brake emergency release switch.The bus could otherwise roll away.


Switch descriptions

ADR button (accident data recorder) (option)

ADR button (accident data recorder)(option)

Pressing the ADR button after an eventinforms the accident data recorder thatthe event was of particular importanceand prompts the memory manager tokeep the event stored in the memory forlonger than normal.

Note:

The accident data recorder (ADR) is asystem for detecting and recording ac-cidents and driving events, e.g. pullingaway against a kerb or sudden braking.The data are generated into an electron-ic report that documents the course ofthe event in full detail, in real time andwithout any possibility of fraud. The re-port therefore constitutes evidence thatwould be admissible in court.


Driver’s seat/passenger seats

Table of contents

Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Grammer driver’s seat control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat controls (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Operation of the jump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Adjusting a passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Using the driver's seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Operating the jump-seat seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Passenger-compartment-seating seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Removing a seat squab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Fitting a seat squab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Seat belt reminder display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Passenger seat service set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182



Driver's seat

Driver's seatIt is essential that the following instruc-tions be observed:

Danger.

In the interests of road safety, the driver-'s seat must not be adjusted when thebus is in motion.

Note:

The following descriptions provide a briefoverview of the control elements. In eachcase, the manufacturer's Operating In-structions must be observed.





Grammer driver’s seat control elements

Grammer driver’s seat controlelements



Grammer driver’s seat control elements

1 Backrest adjustment

Note:

Relieve load on backrest -pull lever upwards - move in-to required position - releaselever.

2 Lateral support adjustment

Note:

Individually adjustable lateralsupport by two compressed-air chambers. (+) chamberfills up/(-) chamber empties

3 Lumbar support (upper cham-ber)

Note:

(+) chamber fills up/(-) cham-ber empties

4 Lumbar support (lower cham-ber)

Note:

(+) chamber fills up/(-) cham-ber empties

5 Height adjustment

Note:

Pull lever up = upwards ad-justment/press lever down =downwards adjustment

6 Damper setting

Note:

The damper setting canbe continuously adjustedbetween soft and hard

7 Rapid lowering

8 Seat belt buckle

9 Seat heating/seat climatecontrol (option)

10 Seat cushion angle adjust-ment

Note:

Relieve the load on the back-rest. Pull button upwards.The seat angle can now beadjusted.

11 Seat cushion depth adjust-ment

Note:

Pull button upwards. The seatcushion can now be adjusted.

12 Driver's seat fore-and-aft ad-justment

Note:

Pull lever upwards. The seatcan now be slid in the longit-udinal direction.



ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat controls (option)

ISRI 6860/875 driver's seatcontrols (option)



ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat controls (option)

1 Driver's seat fore-and-aft ad-justment

Note:

Pull lever upwards. The seatcan now be slid in the longit-udinal direction.

2 Tilt adjustment

Note:

Pull the handle up. Adjustthe tilt angle by applyingload on or relieving load fromthe front section of the seatcushion.

3 Seat cushion depth adjust-ment

Note:

Raise the lever and push theseat cushion forwards/back-wards. Engage the seat cush-ion again.

4 Heating

Note:

Thermostatically controlledseat cushion and backrestheating.

5 Lowering

Note:

Lower the seat by press-ing the rocker switch down.Move the seat to the adjustedheight by pressing the rockerswitch up.

6 Damper adjustment

Note:

Handle up = minimum damp-ing. Handle down = maximumdamping.

7 Height adjustment

Note:

Pull or press the handle andadjust the seat to the desiredheight.

8 Lumbar support

Note:

Press the button to chargeand discharge each air cham-ber

9 Swivel release mechanism

10 Backrest adjustment

Note:

Pull the handle up and movethe backrest to the desiredposition.

11 Shoulder adjustment

Note:

Pull the handle up and movethe upper half of the backrestto the desired position.

12 Armrest



Operation of the jump seat

Note:

The armrest can be adjus-ted to any angle using theknurled knob.

Operation of the jump seat

Note:

Only accompanying staff should sit on thejump seat.

M91_00-0009-01

Folding out the jump seat: movestop lever (1) in the direction of thearrow and fold down the seat cush-ion using grab handle (2).

The jump seat cannot be stoppedin the horizontal position. You musthold down the seat cushion until youare seated.

Danger.

If you stand up, the seat cushion willautomatically return to its original posi-tion. Fold the jump seat down again asdescribed above if you wish to sit downagain on this seat.



Adjusting a passenger seat

Adjusting a passenger seat

M91.00-0046-71

Adjusting the backrest (aisle side):

Note:

Press the rear section of rocker (1) and,at the same time, push back on the back-rest with your upper body. Release therocker when the backrest is at the de-sired position. The backrest locks inplace immediately.

Note:

There are several backrest positionsbetween the vertical normal position andthe tilted limit position. You can chooseany of these positions.

Adjusting the backrest (window side):

Note:

Pull back small black lever (3) betweenthe seat cushion and vehicle wall. At thesame time, push back on the backrestwith your upper body. Release lever (3)when the backrest is at the desired posi-tion.

Note:

There are several backrest positionsbetween the vertical normal position andthe tilted limit position. You can chooseany of these positions.

Sideways adjustment of aisle-sideseats

Note:

Press forward section of rocker (2) and,at the same time, move the seat towardsor away from the centre aisle.

Folding the armrest up or down

Note:

Aisle side: Grasp the front of the raisedarmrest and lift it slightly. Then carefullyfold the armrest down. To fold the arm-rest up, simply pull it upwards. The arm-rest engages in its limit position automat-ically.

Note:

Window side: The armrest for the win-dow seat (option) is located between theseats. It simply folds up and down.



Using the driver's seat belt

Using the driver's seat belt

Note:

The driver's seat that was fitted duringproduction has an integrated belt system.Consequently, the user information andinstructions apply only to the factory-fit-ted belts.

Note:

In Germany, the seat belt must remainfastened at all times while the vehicle isin motion (Section 21a of the Germanroad traffic regulations (StVO)). The rulesand regulations of the country in whichthe vehicle is operated must be observed.

Fastening the seat belt: pass theseat belt untwisted and tightly acrossyour pelvis and shoulder and insert itinto the belt buckle until you hear itengage.

Danger.

The seat belt must not pass over yourneck, be snagged or rub against sharpedges. It should fit as close to the bodyas possible. You should therefore avoidwearing bulky clothing. Do not route theseat belt over solid or fragile objectsin pockets in your clothing. Frequentlyretighten the seat belt over your shoulder.

Releasing the seat belt: press thered button in the buckle and assistthe inertia reel by guiding the seatbelt back.

Operating the jump-seat seat belt

Fastening the seat belt: make surethe seat belt is not twisted, positionit tightly over your pelvis and lock itso that you can hear it engage in thebelt lock.

Danger.

This seat should only be occupied by theofficial person accompanying the bus.

Releasing the seat belt: press thered button in the buckle and assistthe inertia reel by guiding the seatbelt back.



Passenger-compartment-seating seat belt

Passenger-compartment-seatingseat belt

Fastening the seat belt: make surethe seat belt is not twisted, positionit tightly over your pelvis and lock itso that you can hear it engage in thebelt buckle.

Note:

A seat belt may only be used to restrainone person at any one time.

Removing a seat squab

M91.00-0047-71

To remove the seat squab, grasp thefront of the seat squab with bothhands and pull upwards. Then pullthe squab in the direction of traveland out of the guide and remove itupwards.

Fitting a seat squab

Lift the seat squab at the frontslightly and slide the rear into theguide as far as the stop. Press thefront of the seat squab down untilyou hear it engage.






M54_00-0978-01

With the ignition switched on and thedoors closed, “Fasten seat belts” symbol(1) on the right-hand side at the front ofthe passenger compartment is displayedfor 5 minutes after the bus has pulledaway.





Passenger seat service set





1 Loudspeaker

2 Air vents

3 Stop button (stop request)

4 Attendant call button (buttonlights up when pressed)

5 Reading lamp

6 Reading lamp button



Transmission shift systems

Table of contents

Transmission shift system safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Operating the PSH (pneumatic shift aid) transmission shift system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Transmission shift system GO 250-8 (system description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

GO 250 - 8 gearshift unit (selector lever) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift failsafe mode (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203



Transmission shift system safety precautions

Transmission shift system safetyprecautions

Danger.

If it is necessary to disembark, even for ashort time, with the engine still running,you must make sure that the transmissionis in position “N” (neutral), the parkingbrake has been applied and the bus hasbeen secured by chocks. It is permiss-ible to disembark with the engine stillrunning only if no passengers remain inthe passenger compartment and the bushas been secured against unauthorisedaccess.

Danger.

The bus is equipped with a creep func-tion. When the service brake is releasedwith the creep function activated, the buswill creep forwards independently with theengine continuing to run at idling speed.If the engine speed drops below approx-imately 550 rpm due to increased drivingresistance and/or you operate the ser-

vice brake at a low engine speed, theelectronics will disengage the clutch auto-matically. This would interrupt the flowof tractive power and the vehicle couldbegin to roll back, e.g. on an uphill gradi-ent.

Note:

For as long as both the accelerator pedaland the brake pedal remain fully released,the clutch will stay closed and the vehiclewill creep at idling speed. This works inthe 1st and 2nd gears.

Caution:

The least wearing on the clutch is idlecreeping. In stop-start traffic, therefore,the brake pedal should be used as spar-ingly as possible (under consideration ofthe road and traffic situation) so that thevehicle always creeps at idling speed. Tokeep the driving speed as low as pos-sible, it is possible to shift manually into1st gear. If the speed of the bus is keptlow by means of the brake pedal, theclutch will start to slip. This would res-

ult in increased clutch wear. If the brakepedal is depressed rather more forcefully(more than 10% brake pedal travel), theclutch will open so far that it no longerslips.

Note:

In the event of increased loading on theclutch, an alert (grey) will appear on thedisplay screen. If the load persists, awarning alert (yellow) will appear and thecreep function will be deactivated auto-matically. This is designed to rule out anoverloading of the clutch by the creepfunction.



Operating the PSH (pneumatic shift aid) transmission shift system

Operating the PSH (pneumatic shiftaid) transmission shift system

M26_00-0004-01

Changing gear

Note:

This transmission shift system workspurely mechanically. At approximately90 mm, the shift throws are only half aslong as those of conventional shift sys-tems. However, the time that is neededfor a gear change in the transmission dueto synchronisation is nearly the same inphysical terms. This means that, to en-gage the next gear, the driver is nowable to move the shift lever handle much

more slowly, i.e. half as fast. Disengage-ment of a gear is just as fast as normal.The best gearshifts are achieved by mov-ing the gear selector lever with gentleforce and “waiting” for the PSH gearshift.Of course, it is possible to change gearfaster in difficult situations.

Changing gear in the event of PSHfailure

Note:

PSH, the pneumatic shift aid, is designedto make changing gear easier and itspressure is limited to 2.4 bar. If PSHfails, it is still possible to select any ofthe gears while the bus is in motion,but increased effort will be required. Thegearshift duration (shift lever pressed togear engaged) will be longer because syn-chronisation will not be as fast.

Transmission shift system GO 250-8(system description)

The GO 250-8 transmission is adaptedto the engine by a dry clutch. As theclutch is controlled automatically by thetransmission system, there is no needfor a clutch pedal.

Gears are shifted and the clutch is op-erated electropneumatically. An elec-tronics unit attached to the transmissioncontrols the valves of the pneumatic ac-tuating cylinders at the gear, gate andclutch.

The driver selects the direction of travelusing the gearshift unit and is then ableto control the forwards and reversingmotion of the bus using the acceleratorand brake pedal. Advantage: the driveris relieved of having to change gear anduse a clutch.

Using the gearshift unit, the driver canchoose between automatic and manu-al gear selection. Manual gear selectionshould, however, only be used in spe-cial cases, e.g. to brake the bus or whendriving over mountainous terrain. Auto-



Transmission shift system GO 250-8 (system description)

matic mode should be used for all nor-mal driving conditions.

As the basis for selecting the appropri-ate gear, the intelligent gear selectionfunction in automatic mode takes intoconsideration the driver's commands (op-eration of the accelerator pedal and ser-vice brake), the current engine operatingstate, uphill or downhill gradients andthe load on the bus. This achieves theoptimum compromise between comfort,fuel economy and wear.

The drive control module coordinates thefunctions of the drivetrain by informingthe engine control module how much en-gine torque is required and by informingthe transmission control module of thegear to be selected and the clutch posi-tion to be adopted.

The mechatronic transmission and en-gine control units then implement thecontrol commands of the drive controlfor the engine and transmission.

The screen in the instrument panelshows all necessary system information

(e.g. gear, malfunction, etc.) to thedriver.

The system has a failsafe mode that canbe activated in the event of a fault in thetransmission shift system. In this mode,it is possible to drive the bus away fromareas of danger or to the nearest work-shop. Even if no faults are present, itis possible to activate failsafe mode fortraining purposes as preparation for thissituation.

Refer to “Operation of GO 250-8failsafe mode” in this section.





GO 250 - 8 gearshift unit (selector lever) (option)

GO 250 - 8 gearshift unit (selectorlever) (option)



Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

1 Neutral button

2 To shift down/to select re-verse gear

3 Function button

M/A To switch to manual mode/automatic mode

Note:

In automatic mode, press-ing briefly toggles between“Basic” and “Dynamic”.

4 To shift up

Operation of the GO 250-8PowerShift transmission shiftsystem (option)

Danger.

Never leave the driver's area with theengine running and a gear engaged.

Danger.

In the event of a loss of pressure or in-sufficient supply pressure in the trans-mission/clutch circuit, it would no longerbe possible to shift gear or operate theclutch. Risk of accident. Do not set thevehicle in motion or, if it is already inmotion, bring the vehicle to a halt imme-diately (road and traffic conditions permit-ting). Secure the vehicle against rollingaway, e.g. using the parking brake. Havethe compressed-air system inspected im-mediately and repaired at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. EvoBus recommends anEvoBus Service Partner for this work. It isessential that work relevant to safety orwork on safety-related systems be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

Danger.

The PowerShift transmission shift systemautomatically disengages the clutch if theengine speed drops below 600 rpm in1st gear. The power flow is interruptedand the bus could roll back, e.g. on uphillgradients, and you could thereby causean accident. For this reason, never allowthe engine speed to drop below 600 rpmin 1st gear.

+++ Selecting the operating mode+++

Note:

With the PowerShift transmission shiftsystem, it is possible to drive in one oftwo operating modes: Manual mode orautomatic mode. In manual mode, youare able to determine the shift pointand shift direction yourself. In automat-ic mode, you simply need to shift into thestarting gear. The PowerShift transmis-sion shift system then changes gear auto-matically, depending on the engine speed,accelerator pedal position, load on the en-gine, operating status of the continuous




brake, load on the bus and gradient ofthe road.

Note:

In automatic mode, two shift programsare available: “Basic” and “Dynamic”.These can be activated by means of theA/M pushbutton on the selector lever.The “Basic” shift program is optimised forfuel economy and should generally be theprogram of choice. The “Dynamic” shiftprogram has a positive effect on the ac-celerative performance of the vehicle byshifting up at higher engine speeds thanin the “Basic” shift program. This leads tohigher fuel consumption than in “Basic”mode.

M54.00-2278-71

In manual mode (1), “M” appearsnext to the gear indicator.

M26_00-0122-71

Pressing the selector lever to theleft switches from manual mode toautomatic mode.




M54.00-2075-71

In automatic mode, “A” appears nextto gear indicator (1).

Note:

For journeys on arduous terrain, it is ad-visable to select manual mode in order toavoid undesired upshifting, for example,and therefore interruptions in tractivepower.

Note:

To change from “Basic” to “Dynamic” inautomatic mode, press the selector leverbriefly to the left.

M54.00-2277-71

In “Dynamic” automatic mode, “dyn”(1) appears below the gear indicator.

Note:

In “Dynamic” mode, upshifts take place athigher engine speeds.

+++ Selecting transmission neutralposition +++

Danger.

If you were to select the transmissionneutral position while the bus were in mo-tion, you would lose tractive power or thebraking effect of the engine. It may notthen be possible to bring the bus to ahalt in good time and you could therebycause an accident. For this reason, youshould never select the transmission neut-ral position manually while the bus is inmotion.

Note:

It is possible to select transmission neut-ral position “N” from any gear providedthe selector lever is in the basic position.




M26_00-0123-71

Press neutral button (1).M54.00-2074-71

“N” appears in gear indicator (1) assoon as the transmission neutral pos-ition is selected.

Note:

If the bus is coasting in transmissionneutral position “N”, move the gear leverforwards or back. The PowerShift trans-mission shift system engages the optim-um gear.

+++ Selecting reverse gear +++

Stop the bus.

Apply the service brake or parkingbrake.




M26_00-0124-71

Press and hold function button (3)and pull the selector lever back (2)until resistance can be felt.

Note:

Reverse gear can be selected from trans-mission neutral position only.

M54.00-2077-71

“R” appears in gear indicator (1) assoon as reverse gear is selected.

M26_00-0023-01

Depress the accelerator pedal slowlyand simultaneously release the park-ing brake.

Danger.

The bus may roll away if you do not de-press accelerator pedal (5).




Danger.

There is no engine braking effect if thebus starts to move without a gear havingbeen selected. Do not allow the bus toroll against the direction of travel of thegear that is currently engaged.

The bus starts to move (clutch closesautomatically)

+++ Change of direction +++

Danger.

The direction of travel cannot be changedunless the bus is stationary, otherwise thetransmission will automatically shift intoneutral. All changes of direction musttake place via neutral. Only the screendisplay provides a reliable indication ofwhich direction of travel is selected insidethe transmission.

M26_00-0125-71

+++ Pulling away +++

Note:

Press function button (3).

M26_00-0126-71

Keep function button (3) pressed andmove the gear lever forwards (4).

Note:

The starting gear can be selected fromtransmission neutral position only.

The PowerShift transmission shiftsystem selects 2nd gear (startinggear).




Note:

If the transmission detects an uphill gradi-ent, 1st gear is selected as the startinggear automatically.

Danger.

The bus is equipped with a creep func-tion. When the service brake is releasedwith the creep function activated, the buswill creep forwards independently with theengine continuing to run at idling speed.If the engine speed drops below approx-imately 550 rpm due to increased drivingresistance and/or you operate the ser-vice brake at a low engine speed, theelectronics will disengage the clutch auto-matically. This would interrupt the flowof tractive power and the vehicle couldbegin to roll back, e.g. on an uphill gradi-ent.

Caution:

The least wearing on the clutch is idlecreeping. In stop-start traffic, therefore,the brake pedal should be used as spar-ingly as possible (under consideration ofthe road and traffic situation) so that thevehicle always creeps at idling speed. Tokeep the driving speed as low as pos-sible, it is possible to shift manually into1st gear. If the speed of the bus is keptlow by means of the brake pedal, theclutch will start to slip. This would res-ult in increased clutch wear. If the brakepedal is depressed rather more forcefully(more than 10% brake pedal travel), theclutch will open so far that it no longerslips.

Note:

For as long as both the accelerator pedaland the brake pedal remain fully released,the clutch will stay closed and the vehiclewill creep at idling speed. This works inthe 1st and 2nd gears.

Note:

In the event of increased loading on theclutch, a yellow alert warning will appearon the display screen and the creep func-tion will be deactivated automatically.This is designed to rule out an overload-ing of the clutch by the creep function.

M26_00-0023-01

Depress the accelerator pedal slowlyand simultaneously release the park-ing brake.




Danger.

The bus may roll away if you do not de-press accelerator pedal (5).

Danger.

There is no engine braking effect if thebus starts to move without a gear havingbeen selected. Do not allow the bus toroll against the direction of travel of thegear that is currently engaged.

The bus starts to move (clutch closesautomatically)

Note:

Change the starting gear if 1st gear selec-ted by the PowerShift transmission shiftsystem appears to be an unsuitable gearin which to pull away.

+++ Changing the starting gear +++

Note:

2nd gear is the highest gear that can beselected as the starting gear.

M26_00-0127-71

To shift up a gear from the gear se-lected, move the selector lever for-wards (4) until resistance can be felt.

To shift down a gear, pull the select-or lever backwards until resistancecan be felt.

M26_00-0023-01

+++ Hill starts +++

Danger.

A gear must be engaged before you at-tempt to pull away on an uphill gradient.Then depress accelerator pedal (5). Donot release parking brake (4) until youcan feel the torque in the drive train.There would otherwise be a risk of thebus rolling backwards.




+++ Accelerating +++

Note:

Whenever the maximum engine speed forthe current driving situation is reached inthe gear selected, the PowerShift trans-mission shift system shifts up to the nextoptimum gear (in automatic drive mode).

Note:

In automatic mode, you can use the ac-celerator pedal position to actively influ-ence the shift point. Little throttle = earlyupshift/more throttle = late upshift.

Note:

In “Basic mode”, the engine does notreach the maximum rpm in each gear.Where increased power is required, it willbe necessary to activate “Dynamic mode”or use the kickdown function.

+++ Kickdown (automatic drivemode) +++

Note:

Kickdown is used to achieve maximumbus acceleration.

Depress the accelerator pedal bey-ond the pressure point as far as thestop.

Note:

The PowerShift transmission shift systemwill shift down into a lower gear if neces-sary.

Ease off the accelerator pedal oncethe desired speed has been reached.

Note:

The PowerShift transmission shift systemshifts back up.

+++ Decelerating +++

Release the accelerator pedal.

Slowly depress the brake pedaland/or activate the continuousbrake.

Note:

The PowerShift transmission shift systemwill shift down into a lower gear if neces-sary (in automatic drive mode).

+++Gearshifts in automatic drivemode+++

Note:

All upshifts and downshifts are carriedout automatically. These take place in re-sponse to the driving situation, engineload, accelerator pedal position, roadspeed and engine speed.




Caution:

In overrun mode, the PowerShift transmis-sion shift system shifts up shortly beforethe engine limit speed is reached. A yel-low alert appears on the display screenwith the text: “Bremse betätigen” (Applythe brake). A warning tone sounds if theengine limit speed is exceeded.

M54.00-2075-71

Screen display in automatic drivemode (gear indicator 1-8 with “A”).

+++ Gearshifts in manual mode +++

Note:

In either operating mode (manual/auto-matic), it is possible to intervene manu-ally to override the gear selected by thePowerShift transmission shift system.

M26_00-0127-71

To shift up, move the selector leverforwards (4) until resistance can befelt.

The PowerShift transmission shiftsystem shifts up a gear.

M54.00-2279-71

If an up arrow appears below the “M”in manual mode (1), the engine isoperating in an unfavourable speedrange. This is a recommendation toshift up a gear.

Move the selector lever forwards 2times (4).

The PowerShift transmission shiftsystem shifts up 2 gears.




M26_00-0128-71

To shift down, pull the selector leverback (2) until resistance can be felt.

The PowerShift transmission shiftsystem shifts down a gear.

M54.00-2280-71

If a down arrow appears below the“M” in manual mode (1), the engineis operating in an unfavourable speedrange. This is a recommendation toshift down a gear.

Pull the selector lever back two times(2).

The PowerShift transmission shiftsystem shifts down 2 gears.

Caution:

If the target gear is too low, thePowerShift transmission shift systemshifts down only to a permissible gearthat would not cause the engine tooverrev.

Engine braking effect during a gear-shift

Note:

The braking effect of the engine is tem-porarily interrupted for the duration of agearshift (drive train disconnected by thetransmission system). Once the shift hasbeen completed, the engine braking effectis automatically restored.

Note:

In automatic drive mode, operation ofthe continuous brake causes the systemto shift down so that maximum enginebraking effect is achieved. The extent ofthe downshift depends on the continuousbraking demand and the coolant temper-ature.




Danger.

The engine braking effect is interruptedfor the duration of the gearshift. The busmay accelerate if you are driving downhillat this time.

+++ Stopping +++

Danger.

The PowerShift transmission shift systemautomatically disengages the clutch if theengine speed drops below 600 rpm in1st gear. Tractive power would be lostand the bus could roll away if the engineis still running and a gear is still selec-ted (e.g. on uphill gradients). You couldthereby cause an accident. Wheneveryou stop the bus, always secure the busagainst rolling away using the servicebrake or the parking brake.

Apply the brakes.

Shift down if necessary.

The PowerShift transmission shiftsystem disengages the clutch shortlybefore engine idling speed has beenreached.

Note:

The PowerShift transmission shift sys-tem engages the starting gear (1st or 2ndgear) whenever the bus comes to a halt.

Caution:

Do not leave the driver's area with a gearengaged and the parking brake applied.This state is not permitted and over timeresults in damage to the transmission.Always select the transmission neutralposition first.

+++ Parking the bus +++

Danger.

It is not possible to park the bus with agear engaged. The PowerShift transmis-sion shift system always selects transmis-sion neutral position “N” when the engineis switched off. If you do not secure thestationary bus using the parking brake,the bus could roll away and you couldcause an accident. For this reason, al-ways secure the bus using the parkingbrake.

Note:

If the bus is parked and the engine isleft running, the transmission will shiftinto neutral automatically after 5 minutes.After 4 minutes, the “N” gear indicatorwill start to flash. The indicator continuesto flash until the starting gear is engaged.

Stop the bus.

Apply the parking brake.



Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift failsafe mode (option)

M26_00-0123-71

Press neutral button (1).M54.00-2074-71

“N” appears in gear indicator (1) assoon as the transmission neutral pos-ition is selected.

Switch off the engine.

Operation of the GO 250-8PowerShift failsafe mode (option)

Danger.

Never leave the driver's area with theengine running and a gear engaged.

Note:

Under specific circumstances, the en-gine could stall, particularly if the bus isbrought to a halt under heavy braking.

Note:

A malfunction in the system is indicatedon the instrument cluster display screenin conjunction with a red or yellow warn-ing level malfunction display. In the eventof a yellow alert, the vehicle can contin-ue to be driven in a failsafe mode to thenearest OMNIplus Service Partner.




Note:

It is possible to activate failsafe modefor training purposes even if there is notransmission fault present.

M54.00-2282-71

A malfunction in the system is in-dicated by an icon (1) appearing inthe centre of the display screen inconjunction with a red warning level(2) or yellow warning level (3) mal-function display. In the event of ared warning level, an audible warningalso sounds.

Danger.

The bus must be stopped immediately(traffic conditions permitting) if a redwarning level malfunction is displayed.

Bring the bus to a halt and apply theparking brake.

M26_00-0052-71

Press the upper section of switch (2)to activate failsafe mode.

Note:

A yellow warning level malfunction dis-play appears when switch (2) is pressedif failsafe mode cannot be activated (ex-clamation mark not present in the gearindicator on the display screen). Have themalfunction rectified by an OMNIplus Ser-vice Partner.

Note:

Neither operating mode (automatic/manu-al) is displayed in failsafe mode.




M54.00-2281-71

Symbol (3) is now highlighted.Failsafe mode has been activated.

Note:

The yellow warning level malfunction dis-play is automatically cleared after a shorttime.

Note:

The type of malfunction display dependson the fault.

M54.00-2080-71

The two switches on the instrumentpanel for controlling the failsafemode are now shown as symbolson the display screen.

Note:

The selectable gears, 2nd gear (1) or re-verse gear (2), are displayed. It is pos-sible to select the transmission neutralposition at any time.

Note:

Failsafe mode can be activated only withthe bus stationary and with the parkingbrake engaged. It is operated by meansof the two pushbuttons shown. Whenfailsafe mode is activated, the transmis-sion shifts to neutral even if a gear waspreviously engaged (unless a severe faultis present). In failsafe mode, it is possibleto engage gears as follows: - Upshiftfrom neutral into the slow forward gearD1 (2nd gear possible only when station-ary) - Upshift from 2nd gear into the fastforward gear D2 (4th gear possible onlywhen stationary) - Shift from neutral intoreverse gear (reverse gear possible onlywhen stationary).




Note:

The yellow warning level malfunction dis-play remains lit.

Note:

The requested gear in failsafe mode isshown to flash until the driver operatesthe accelerator pedal within the next 10seconds. If the accelerator pedal is notoperated, no gear change will take place. M68_00-0125-01

It is possible to change to the basicscreen at any time by pressing thelower section of screen control push-button (1). Failsafe mode remainsactive in the background.


Driving systems

Table of contents

Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Automatic speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Automatic speed limiter (function description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Variable speed limiter (Temposet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Activating the variable speed limiter (Temposet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Combined drive/brake cruise control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Activating combined drive/brake cruise control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214


Driving systems

Driving systems

Driving systems

The bus may be equipped with thefollowing driving systems:

Automatic speed limiter


Combined cruise control (drive/brakecruise control)

Danger.

The driving systems listed are only anaid to assist the driver, e.g. to drive ata preselected road speed. The driveris responsible at all times for the actu-al speed of the bus and for maintainingan adequate distance from the vehicle infront.

Caution:

In the case of buses with manual trans-mission, the driver must be prepared tochange gear in order to regulate enginespeed whenever the bus is being acceler-ated or decelerated by cruise control.

M54_00-1002-01

It is possible to switch between thevariable speed limiter (Temposet) anddrive/brake cruise control driving sys-tems at any time while the bus is in mo-tion. The symbol for the selected drivingsystem is shown on the display screen.

Note:

Press button (B) to switch between com-bined drive/brake cruise control and thevariable speed limiter (Temposet).

For further notes on operation, referto “Combination switch for retarder and

cruise control” in the “Driver's area con-trols” section.


Driving systems



Since 01.01.2005, all our buses in theEU have been limited to a legally spe-cified maximum speed of 100 km/h.

On steep downhill gradients, this speedmay be exceeded for various reasons ifthe driver does not actively brake thebus.

In these cases, the speed limiter wouldstabilise the speed of the bus automat-ically using the continuous brake (re-tarder).

Note:

The maximum limit speed corresponds tothe value set in the speed limiter and notto the speed controls in force in othercountries (i.e. a fixed value that cannotbe changed, e.g. during long-distancetravel from one country to another).

Automatic speed limiter (functiondescription)

Functions:

Speed limiter active

Speed limiter warning message

Speed limiter active

M54.00-2081-71

The automatic speed limiter constantlymonitors the maximum speed for thevehicle. If 100 km/h is reached in over-run mode, the engine torque is reducedfirst. If a speed of 104 km/h is reacheddespite this measure, the retarder is ac-

tivated and this symbol (1) appears onthe display screen.

Speed limiter warning message

M54.00-2082-71

This warning message appears on the in-strument cluster display screen togetherwith a yellow warning level malfunction ifa speed of 107 km/h is reached despiteuse of the retarder or if retarder brak-ing performance is reduced (due to highcoolant temperatures). A warning tonealso sounds.


Driving systems


Danger.

To avoid the risk of endangering passen-gers and other road users, it will be ne-cessary to brake the bus using the ser-vice brake.

Note:

The menu that was displayed at the timeof the warning returns to the displayscreen as soon as the speed of the busdrops back below the defined maximumspeed.


Using the speed limiter, it is possibleto set any speed above 15 km/h as alimit speed. It is possible to acceleratethe bus up to the speed set using theaccelerator pedal.

Danger.

The speed limiter limits the set speedautomatically. The speed limiter is unableto interpret road and traffic conditionsitself.

Note:

The retarder is automatically activated ifthe set limit speed is exceeded by morethan 4 km/h in overrun mode.

Danger.

The speed limiter is only an aid designedto assist driving. You are responsible atall times for the speed of the bus and formaintaining an adequate distance to thevehicle in front. Do not use the speedlimiter unless traffic conditions permit aconstant speed to be maintained.


Driving systems

Activating the variable speed limiter (Temposet)

Activating the variable speed limiter(Temposet)

Note:

It is possible to exceed the stored limitspeed, e.g. when overtaking. To do this,depress the accelerator pedal briefly bey-ond the full-throttle position as far as thestop. As soon as the overtaking man-oeuvre is over, release the acceleratorpedal briefly and depress it again. Thiswill reactivate the set limit speed.

Note:

If the bus is travelling faster than thestored limit speed at this time, the buswill be decelerated automatically by theretarder.

M54.00-2083-71

Press function toggle button (B) re-peatedly until LIM appears on thedisplay screen

Note:

The variable speed limiter (Temposet) isnow selected.

M54_00-0993-01

Move steering column switch (A) toposition (1.1).

Note:

The variable speed limiter (Temposet) isnow activated.

Use the accelerator pedal to acceler-ate the bus up to the desired speed.

Briefly move steering column switch(A) to position (1.1).


Driving systems

Activating the variable speed limiter (Temposet)

M54.00-2083-71

The “LIM” icon and the stored max-imum speed are shown on the dis-play screen whenever the variablespeed limiter (Temposet) is active.

Note:

Briefly pressing the steering columnswitch to position (1.1) or position (1.2)now increases or reduces the storedlimit speed in increments of 0.5 km/hrespectively.

M54_00-0993-01

Hold steering column switch (A) inposition (1.1) for some time.

Note:

The maximum speed is increased in incre-ments of 5 km/h.

Hold steering column switch (A) inposition (1.2) for some time.

Note:

The maximum speed is reduced in incre-ments of 5 km/h.

Release the steering column switch.

Note:

The selected limit speed is stored.


Driving systems

Combined drive/brake cruise control (option)

Combined drive/brake cruisecontrol (option)

Combined drive/brake cruise control isable to control both the engine and theretarder. The system maintains a storedcruising speed provided there is suffi-cient engine power output or retarderbraking output available (with a toler-ance of +2.5 mph (+4 km/h) on down-hill gradients). On level surfaces and onuphill gradients, the speed is regulatedby the engine (drive cruise control). Ondownhill gradients, the speed is regu-lated by the retarder (brake cruise con-trol). The speed is maintained constantonly for as long as the braking perform-ance of the retarder remains sufficientfor this to be possible. If necessary, shiftdown and reduce speed.

Danger.

To maintain the stored speed, combineddrive/brake cruise control automaticallyoperates either the engine control in or-der to accelerate the bus (drive cruisecontrol) or the engine brake and retarderto decelerate the bus (brake cruise con-trol). Combined drive/brake cruise con-trol is unable to interpret road and trafficconditions itself. For this reason, do notactivate combined drive/brake cruise con-trol on slippery road surfaces, in fog or indifficult road and traffic conditions. Youcould fail to recognise dangers in goodtime, and endanger yourself and others.When driving on a slippery road surface,the wheels could lock and the bus couldskid.

Danger.

The cruise control function is only an aiddesigned to assist driving. The driver isresponsible at all times for the speed ofthe bus and for maintaining an adequatedistance to the vehicle in front. Do notuse cruise control unless traffic condi-

tions permit a constant speed to be main-tained. It may not be possible for a con-stant speed to be maintained on steepuphill or downhill gradients. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal when cruisecontrol is active.

Note:

The retarder may be activated for ad-ditional braking force. The cruise con-trol system will remain active. The ser-vice brake may also be applied while thebus is being braked by the retarder. Thecruise control system will remain active.If cruise control is braking the bus us-ing the retarder, the retarder will not bedeactivated if the service brake is thenapplied. As soon as the retarder is de-activated, the bus will accelerate to thepreviously stored speed.


Driving systems

Activating combined drive/brake cruise control (option)

Activating combined drive/brakecruise control (option)

Note:

Precondition: bus speed must be great-er than 10 mph (15 km/h). The clutchand service brake pedals must be fully re-leased and the continuous brakes mustnot be active.

Note:

The speed is maintained constant onlyfor as long as the braking performance ofthe retarder remains sufficient for this tobe possible. If necessary, shift down andreduce speed.

Note:

It is possible to exceed the stored speed,e.g. when overtaking. To do this, depressthe accelerator pedal. When the overtak-ing manoeuvre is over, release the accel-erator pedal again. Cruise control will re-adjust the speed of the bus to the storedspeed.

M54_00-1003-01

Briefly move the steering columnswitch to position (1.1) or (1.2) (<0.5 seconds).

Note:

Moving the steering column switch to po-sition (1.2) enables you to call up a previ-ously stored speed.

M54.00-2084-71

The desired speed set is shown inthe display.

Note:

Repeated and brief movement to position(1.1) (< 0.5 seconds) = increase in setspeed in 0.5 km/h increments. Repeatedand brief movement to position (1.2) (<0.5 seconds) = reduction in set speed in0.5 km/h increments.


Driving systems

Activating combined drive/brake cruise control (option)

Note:

Holding the steering column switch (>0.5 seconds) in position (1.1) acceleratesthe bus. When the combination switch isreleased, the current speed is set as thenew value.

Note:

Holding the steering column switch (>0.5 seconds) in position (1.2) deceleratesthe bus. When the combination switch isreleased, the current speed is set as thenew value.

M54.00-2085-71

After a brief delay, the desired speedset (3) appears on the display screenalong with “cruise control” icon (2)(see illustration).

Move the steering column switch toposition (1.3).

The combined drive/brake cruisecontrol is deactivated. Cruise controlis deactivated automatically:

Note:

- if the bus is braked using the servicebrake and cruise control is currently inoperation. The speed set remains stored.

Note:

- if the speed drops below 10 mph (15km/h), a short warning signal will sound.The speed set remains stored.

Note:

- if the clutch pedal is depressed forlonger than 5 seconds, e.g. during gearselection. A short warning signal willsound.

Note:

- if the transmission is shifted to theneutral position for longer than 5seconds. A short warning signal willsound.



Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning

Table of contents

Operating instructions for the air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning (HVAC) control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Manually regulating the blower speed in the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Preselecting the passenger-compartment temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Manually regulating the blower speed in the passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Activating the air-conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Activating air-recirculation mode in the driver's area/passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Activating the reheat function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Activating the auxiliary heating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Programming auxiliary heating switch-on times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Activating a programmed auxiliary heating switch-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Deactivating an activated switch-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Programming the auxiliary heating switch-on duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236



Operating instructions for the air-conditioning system

Operating instructions for the air-conditioning system

Note:

For optimum climate control in heating orcooling mode, the driver's window shouldremain closed while the vehicle is in mo-tion.

Note:

The openings below the spare wheel inthe compartment must not be sealed orcovered by objects as troublefree oper-ation of the heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system would no longer beguaranteed.





Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning (HVAC) control panel

Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning(HVAC) control panel




Note:

Switch the ignition starter switch to ONbefore you switch on the heating andventilation control system. The driver’sarea air-conditioning cannot be operatedseparately from the passenger compart-ment air-conditioning.

1 Button for air-recirculation/fresh-air mode in the driver'sarea

Note:

(Integrated LED lit in air-recir-culation mode - LED unlit infresh-air mode)

2 Rotary knob for air distribu-tion in the driver's area: Infin-itely variable

Note:

Air permanently flows outof the swivelling air vents inthe instrument panel (driver'sstation) and in the forwardstructure (co-driver's seat)regardless of the position ofthe rotary knob. The airflowcan be regulated manually asdesired using the adjustmentslide on the air vent itself.

2.1 Air distribution to the footwell

2.2 Air distribution to the footwelland windscreen

2.3 Air distribution to the wind-screen

2.4 Fresh-air vent in the instru-ment panel

2.5 Defrosting the windscreen(blower automatically set tofastest speed)

3 Rotary knob for temperaturecontrol in the driver's area

4 Rocker switch for blowerspeed control in the driver-'s area

5 Button for temperature con-trol in the passenger compart-ment

Note:

Pressing the button for longerthan 2 seconds automaticallyselects the optimum temper-ature. (LED in pushbutton (5)unlit)

6 Automatic A/C mode“ON/OFF” button

Note:

(LED lit in automatic A/Cmode)




7 Smog button for the driver-’s area and passenger com-partment (use, for instance,when driving through a tun-nel): Passenger-compartmentand driver’s area ventilationswitches to air-recirculationmode. The roof hatches areclosed automatically.

Note:

The LED integrated in thebutton lights up.

8 Reheat button (use to dehu-midify the vehicle interior):The air-conditioning systemis switched to heating con-trol. The recirculated air (i.e.the reduced amount of freshair) is cooled as it comes in-to contact with the refrigerantheat exchanger and reheatedby the heat exchanger forthe heating system. This pro-cess condenses water out ofthe air passed through thesystem. The air directed topassengers or the driver isthereby dehumidified.

Note:

The LED integrated in thebutton lights up

9 Manual blower speed adjust-ment button

10 Preset timer button:

Note:

refer to “Programming thepreset timer”

Danger.

Observe the safety precau-tions for operation of theauxiliary heating unit in theOperating Instructions.

11 Auxiliary heater “ON/OFF”button: The integrated LEDindicates when the auxiliaryheating unit is ready for oper-ation (in standby). The auxil-iary heating unit switches toa state of readiness only ifthe outside temperature is atleast 6 °C below the setpointvalue selected (passengercompartment).



Manually regulating the blower speed in the driver's area

Danger.

Observe the safety precau-tions for operation of theauxiliary heating unit in theOperating Instructions.

12 Rocker switch for adjustingvalues and functions of push-buttons 5/9/10:

Manually regulating the blowerspeed in the driver's area

M83_00-0783-71

Press button (4) on the control panel

Note:

The LED in the pushbutton starts to flash

M54.00-2086-71

This display appears on the instru-ment cluster display screen

Note:

The blower speed currently set is repres-ented by the bars in the centre section ofthe instrument cluster display screen.

Button (4) can now be used to re-duce (-) or increase (+) the blowerspeed.



Preselecting the passenger-compartment temperature

Note:

If button (4) is not pressed again with-in 10 seconds or if a different buttonis pressed, the indicator on the displayscreen is cleared and the LED in therocker switch stops flashing. The newlyentered setpoint value is stored.


M83.00-0901-71

Press button (5) on the control panel.

The LED in rocker switch (12) startsto flash

M54.00-2088-71

The setpoint value currently set isrepresented by the bars in the centresection of the instrument cluster dis-play screen.

Note:

The actual outside temperature (1) andthe temperature in the passenger com-partment (2) are also displayed on thedisplay screen.




M54.00-2088-71

The setpoint value for the passengercompartment can now be changedusing rocker switch (12) (+ or -).

Note:

Pressing button (5) for longer than 2seconds automatically selects the optim-um value. When the optimum value is set(see the marker bars between + and - inthe display), the LED in pushbutton (5)remains unlit.

Note:

The setpoint value can be changed up ordown as required with button (12). Thesetpoint value should only be changed insmall increments.

Note:

If button (12) is not pressed again with-in 10 seconds or if a different buttonis pressed, the indicator on the displayscreen is cleared and the LEDs in therocker switch stop flashing. The newlyentered setpoint value is stored.

M54.00-2090-71

If no bars are shown and icon (1) isdisplayed, this means that automat-ic A/C regulation in the passengercompartment has been deactivated.



Manually regulating the blower speed in the passenger compartment

Manually regulating the blowerspeed in the passenger compart-ment

M83.00-0901-71


M54.00-2087-71

Whenever button (9) is pressed, theLEDs in rocker switch (12) begin toflash. The current blower speed isrepresented by the bars on the in-strument cluster display screen.

It is now possible to adjust theceiling blower speed to any valuebetween 20 % and 100 % by pressingrocker switch (12) (+ or -).

Note:

Pressing button (9) for longer than 2seconds automatically selects the optim-um blower speed. At optimum blowerspeed, the LED in pushbutton (9) remainsunlit.

Note:

If button (12) is not pressed again with-in 10 seconds or if a different buttonis pressed, the indicator on the displayscreen is cleared and the LEDs in rock-er switch (12) stop flashing. The newlyentered setpoint value is stored.



Activating the air-conditioning

Activating the air-conditioning

M83.00-0901-71


Once the LED integrated in button(6) lights up, this indicates that theair-conditioning system is enabled. Ifthis symbol appears on the displayscreen, the air-conditioning system isactive (operating). The roof hatchesclose automatically whenever the air-conditioning system is activated.

Note:

The air-conditioning system is switchedon automatically after a 60 second delaydepending on the desired temperatureand the outside and interior temperat-ures. The “Temperature lockout” symbolappears on the display screen if temper-ature conditions are preventing the air-conditioning system from switching on. Ifbutton (6) is pressed in buses that do nothave an air-conditioning system, the “Air-conditioning system not available” symbolis shown on the display screen.

Note:

If cooling output is inadequate in air-conditioning mode and no malfunctionis indicated on the display screen, youcan activate the ventilation program byswitching off automatic A/C mode.

Note:

The status in effect at the time the ig-nition starter switch is switched to OFFis retained when the ignition is switchedback on.

If this symbol appears, current tem-perature conditions are preventingactivation of the air-conditioning sys-tem.

If this symbol appears when youpress button (6), this indicates thatthe bus does not have an air-condi-tioning system.



Activating air-recirculation mode in the driver's area/passenger compartment

Activating air-recirculation modein the driver's area/passengercompartment

M83.00-0901-71


This symbol appears on the instru-ment cluster display screen. The LEDin button (5) lights up. In addition,the roof hatches close automatically.

Note:

Use this function when driving througha tunnel, for example. “Smog” modeis limited to a period of approximately10 minutes. It is possible to switch thedriver’s area back to fresh-air mode sep-arately using switch (1); smog mode re-mains in effect in the passenger compart-ment. Switch it off by pressing button (7)(LED off) again.

Activating the reheat function

M83.00-0901-71


Note:

The recirculated air (i.e. the reducedamount of fresh air) is cooled as it comesinto contact with the refrigerant heat ex-changer and reheated by the heat ex-changer for the heating system. Thisprocess condenses water out of the airpassed through the system. The air direc-ted to passengers or the driver is therebydehumidified.



Activating the auxiliary heating unit

The LED integrated in the pushbuttonlights up and the roof hatches closeautomatically.

Note:

Reheat mode is available only if the out-side temperature is above approximately5 °C. Its operating period is limited to ap-proximately 30 minutes. To switch it off,press the reheat button again (LED off).

This “Temperature lockout” sym-bol appears on the display screenif current temperature conditionsare preventing activation of the air-conditioning system. If button (6) ispressed in buses that do not have anair-conditioning system, the “Air-con-ditioning system not available” sym-bol is shown on the display screen.

If this symbol appears when youpress button (8), this indicates thatthe bus does not have an air-condi-tioning system.


M83.00-0901-71

Press button (11) on the control pan-el.

Danger.

Risk of fire and burns. There is a risk offires and burns due to the high exhausttemperatures and the hot exhaust pipefor the auxiliary heating. For this reason,do not stop or park the bus over ignitablematerials (e.g. grass) when the auxiliaryheating is in operation, has recently beenin operation or has been operated by theinstant heating button/preset timer.




Danger.

Risk of poisoning and asphyxiation. Theauxiliary heating must not be used in en-closed spaces such as garages or work-shops due to the risk of poisoning andasphyxiation. Timer and preselectionmode are similarly prohibited.

Danger.

Risk of fire. The auxiliary heating mustremain switched off in places where ignit-able vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g.in the vicinity of filling stations, fuel de-pots, or coal, sawdust or grain stores orsimilar).

Note:

The integrated LED indicates when theauxiliary heating unit is ready for oper-ation (in standby). The auxiliary heatingunit cannot be switched to standby modeunless automatic control has been en-abled.

Note:

With the ignition starter switch OFF, itis possible to switch the auxiliary heat-ing unit on directly by pressing button(11) on the control panel. The LED inbutton (11) lights up and the auxiliaryheating is activated. The auxiliary heatingunit switches off automatically after 30minutes or if the button is pressed again;the LED in button (11) goes out.

Whenever the auxiliary heating unitis active (ignition starter switch po-sition ON), this symbol appears onthe display screen after a time delayof approximately 20 seconds. Thestatus in effect at the time the ig-nition starter switch is switched toOFF is retained when the ignition isswitched back on.

If this symbol appears on the displayscreen when button (11) is pressed,this indicates that the bus does nothave an auxiliary heating unit.

The “Temperature lockout” symbolappears on the display screen if tem-perature conditions are preventingthe heating system from switchingon.



Programming auxiliary heating switch-on times

Programming auxiliary heatingswitch-on times

M83.00-0901-71

Keep button (10) pressed down untilthe preset timer menu is shown onthe display screen.

M54.00-2117-71

Screen display in preset timer menu(selection mode).

Note:

In selection mode, rocker switch (12)can be used to select P1, P2, P3 or theswitch-on duration.

Note:

The displayed date and time are importedfrom the tachograph and can thereforeonly be corrected there.

Briefly press button (10) to change tosetting mode.

Note:

The switch-on times may only be set ormodified in setting mode.



Programming auxiliary heating switch-on times

M54.00-2118-71

A bar now appears under the timedisplay (hours). The hours can nowbe set using rocker switch (12). (If itis not necessary to correct the hours,it is possible to move on to changethe minutes by pressing button (10).)

M54.00-2091-71

The minutes display can be set withrocker switch (12) when the bar isshown under the minutes. If it is notnecessary to correct the minutes, itis possible to move on to change theweekday by pressing button (10).

M83.00-0901-71

The relevant weekday is selectedusing button (10) and set or unsetusing rocker switch (12). (If theweekday is displayed, it has beenenabled. Weekdays that are not dis-played have not been enabled.)

Note:

The changes are stored when you pressbutton (10) on reaching the last weekday(Sunday). The display reverts to selectionmode automatically and it is now possibleto select the next program (P1, P2, P3).



Activating a programmed auxiliary heating switch-on time

M54.00-2092-71

Screen display when activating theweekdays.

Activating a programmed auxiliaryheating switch-on time

M83.00-0901-71

Press button (10) briefly and selectthe relevant storage position (P1,P2 or P3) with rocker switch (12).Confirm the selection by pressingbutton (10).

Note:

The LED integrated in button (10) indic-ates whether a switch-on time has beenactivated. Steady light for “ignition starterswitch ON”. Flashing for “ignition starterswitch OFF”.

Danger.




Deactivating an activated switch-on time

Danger.


Danger.


M54.00-2093-71

Screen display when activating theswitch-on times.

Deactivating an activated switch-ontime

Briefly press button (10) and se-lect the OFF menu item with rockerswitch (12). Confirm the selection bypressing button (10).

Note:

The LED integrated in button (10) goesout. No deactivation is possible unlessthe ignition switch is switched on.

Note:

After a program has run its course, it isnecessary to activate the next switch-ontime. For preselection mode, no morethan one switch-on time can be activated.



Programming the auxiliary heating switch-on duration

Programming the auxiliary heatingswitch-on duration

M83.00-0901-71

Keep button (10) pressed until thepreset timer menu (selection menu)is shown on the display screen.

M54.00-2117-71

Screen display in preset timer menu(selection mode).

Press rocker switch (12) (+ or -)downwards until the switch-on dur-ation menu is shown on the displayscreen. Briefly press button (10)to change to setting mode. Rock-er switch (12) can now be used toadjust the switch-on duration in the10-120 minutes range. Confirm thechange by pressing button (10).

Note:

The auxiliary heater switch-on duration isprogrammed once and then applies for allswitch-on times (P1, P2, P3).

Note:

Recommended switch-on duration: 30 -40 minutes. A longer switch-on durationcould discharge the vehicle batteries.

M54.00-2094-71

Screen display when setting theswitch-on duration.



Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area

Switches/controllers in the driver'srest area



Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area

Switch for ventilation blower speedI and II (7)

When the switch is pressed, the blowerfor ventilating the driver's rest area oper-ates at half speed or full speed, depend-ing on the switch position.

Note:

The air from vents (1) may be hot orcold. This depends on the position ofcontroller (8) and switch position (6).

Heating controller (8)

Manual, infinitely variable adjustment ofthe outlet temperature.

Note:

Warm: turn the controller clockwise.

Note:

Cold: turn the controller anti-clockwise.

Note:

The engine or the water heater must berunning.



Opening/locking

Table of contents

Door pushbutton in the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Anti-entrapment protection (reversing) as the doors are closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Protection against entrapment in the door opening direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Locking the exterior emergency valve at door 2 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Operating/malfunction displays: doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Unlocking the door circuit at the front right door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Unlocking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Unlocking the door circuit using the radio remote control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Unlocking the luggage compartment flaps using the pushbuttons in the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Unlocking the luggage compartment flaps using the remote control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Locking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Locking door 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Locking using the radio remote control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Central locking system (option) (system description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Operating/malfunction displays: central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Emergency operation of the doors (depressurising the doors using the emergency valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . 255


Opening/locking

Table of contents

Emergency unlocking of the luggage compartment flaps in the event of a compressed-air supply fail-ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Opening/closing the service cover under the driver's window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Opening/closing the roof hatches manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Emergency exit through emergency operation of the electric roof hatches (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260


Opening/locking

Door pushbutton in the driver's area

Door pushbutton in the driver'sarea

Door pushbutton for front right door (I)and centre right door (II) (10) with integ-rated warning lamps (locator lighting alsoON when Lights ON).

Note:

The warning lamp lights up when: - adoor is open - a door is not fully closed(door not in the catches).

Note:

The warning lamp flashes in the follow-ing situations: - the emergency switch isactivated - the operating pressure is toolow (depressurised bus door) - the dooris open and the speed of the vehicle ismore than 3 km/h - the door malfunc-tions.

Danger.

The doors do not operate if the displayflashes. Do not move the bus if a warn-ing lamp in the door pushbutton lightsup or a yellow or red warning is shownon the display screen. Otherwise, a redwarning appears on the display screenand the warning buzzer sounds.

Note:

A door cannot be operated unless theignition is ON, the bus is stationary andthe doors have been unlocked.

M72_00-0332-71


Opening/locking

Anti-entrapment protection (reversing) as the doors are closed

Anti-entrapment protection (revers-ing) as the doors are closed

M72_00-0159-01

Reversing switch (7)

The anti-entrapment protection is ac-tivated if a person or object blocks thedoor leaf while the door is closing.

In this event, the door leaf is raised andthe cam (7.1) operates the reversingswitch (7).

The door valve changes to Open.

Danger.

If the door pushbutton for door 1 (frontright) is pressed and held for some time,the reverse movement may be disabled,deactivating the anti-trap function. Whenthe door pushbutton is released, the anti-entrapment protection is reenabled.

Protection against entrapment inthe door opening direction

Opening pressure is limited to 4.2 barwhen the doors are being opened. Thisensures that the force used to open thedoor does not exceed that permitted bylaw.

Danger.

If an object or a person becomes trappedduring the opening procedure, the doorvalve can be changed back to the clos-ing direction if the door pushbutton ispressed again. The door system can alsobe depressurised and thus switched toreduced-power pushback by the use ofthe emergency switch.


Opening/locking

Locking the exterior emergency valve at door 2 (option)

Locking the exterior emergencyvalve at door 2 (option)

Note:

If a bus without central locking is to beparked and left, it is possible to lockthe emergency valve for door 2 from theoutside (option). In this event, only theemergency valve is locked.

Note:

If the bus is to be left for a relatively longperiod, it is necessary to lock the doorfrom the inside. The door will then re-main closed, even in the event of a lossof pressure.

M72_00-0284-71

Lock the emergency valve.

It is no longer possible to operatethe emergency valve, and unauthor-ised access to the bus is prevented.

Unlock the emergency valve againbefore commencing a journey.

Note:

The drive-off lock remains active if the ex-terior emergency valve has not been un-locked before commencing a journey. Itis not possible to set the bus in motion.

Operating/malfunction displays:doors

Door open

This icon appears if a door is still openor if a door is not closed properly (doornot latched).

Note:

Symbol is an example for door I (frontright door).

Door malfunction warning - door I(front right) or door II (centre right)

A malfunction is present in the door sys-tem if this icon appears on the displayscreen while the bus is in motion or sta-tionary. At the same time, a RED warn-


Opening/locking

Operating/malfunction displays: doors

ing level malfunction message is dis-played, the warning lamp in the doorpushbutton flashes and the warningbuzzer sounds.

Danger.

Stop the bus immediately (traffic condi-tions permitting). It is prohibited to movethe bus at any time while this malfunctionis present. Have an OMNIplus ServicePartner check the door system immedi-ately.

Danger.

This display also appears if thecompressed-air supply in the door systemis too low. Start the bus and charge thecompressed-air supply. If the display stilldoes not go out, have the door systemchecked by an OMNIplus Service Partner.

Danger.

This icon also appears when the emer-gency valve on the inside/outside of thefront right or centre right door is oper-ated (door depressurised).

Danger.

This icon also appears in the display ifthe bus is moving faster than 3 km/hand door I (front right) or door II (centreright) is open.

Note:

Symbol is an example for door I (frontright door).

Ready to depart

This icon appears in connection with thebus stop brake or drive-off lock.

Note:

If the bus is equipped with a bus stopbrake (option), this icon appears when thebus stop brake pushbutton is pressed.

Note:

If the bus is equipped with a drive-offlock, this icon will appear when thecentre right door has completely closedfollowing a closing procedure.

Note:

The bus stop brake and the drive-offlock are applied on all axles with re-duced braking pressure and are releasedas soon as the accelerator pedal is de-pressed.


Opening/locking

Unlocking the door circuit at the front right door

Danger.

The bus may roll away if the parkingbrake has not been applied.

Unlocking the door circuit at thefront right door

Danger.


M72_00-0244-01

To unlock the front right door, insertthe key into lock (1), turn it clock-wise and turn handle (2) to the rightat the same time (arrow position 3).Turn the key and handle (2) back totheir initial position and remove thekey. Press exterior pushbutton (5).

Note:

The fuel filler flaps are unlocked whendoor 1 is unlocked.

Danger.

Door 2 is not unlocked at the same time.

Door 1 opens automatically.


Opening/locking

Unlocking door 2

Unlocking door 2

M72_00-0188-01

Turn interior handle (2) for door 2 tothe left.

Danger.

Door 2 must be unlocked manually beforethe bus is driven off.

Unlocking the door circuit using theradio remote control (option)

Danger.


M82_00-0106-71

Unlock door circuit (door I, door II,fuel filler flaps) using the remote con-trol (button 1).

Unlocking of the door circuit is indic-ated by one long flash (maximum of3 seconds) of the side-mounted turnsignals.

Note:

If a door or luggage compartment flap isnot opened within 20 seconds, the cir-cuit will be relocked. This prevents thebus from remaining unlocked if it wasunlocked by accident. Forced locking isinitiated to conserve the battery charge ifthe luggage compartment flaps have stillnot been locked within 43 minutes of theignition switch being switched to OFF.


Opening/locking

Unlocking the luggage compartment flaps using the pushbuttons in the driver's area

Unlocking the luggage compartmentflaps using the pushbuttons in thedriver's area

M82_00-0007-01

Unlock the left-side luggage compart-ment flaps using pushbutton (5) andthe right-side flaps using pushbutton(6).

Note:

If the bus is equipped with central locking(option), the side-mounted turn signalsflash briefly once (for approximately 1second) when the luggage compartmentflaps are locked and unlocked.

The left- or right-side luggage com-partment flaps can be opened. TheLEDs in pushbuttons (5) and (6) lightup when the luggage compartmentflaps are unlocked.

Note:

There must be sufficient compressed airavailable.

Note:

The luggage compartment flaps are re-locked either when the pushbutton in thedriver’s area is pressed again or when theignition switch is turned to OFF.

Note:

The luggage compartment lightingswitches on automatically whenever aluggage compartment flap circuit (left orright) is unlocked.


Opening/locking

Unlocking the luggage compartment flaps using the remote control (option)

Unlocking the luggage compartmentflaps using the remote control(option)

M82_00-0106-71

Unlock the left-side luggage compart-ment flaps using remote control but-ton 2 and the right-side flaps usingbutton 3.

Note:

The turn signals flash (approximately 1second) once if only the luggage compart-ment flaps have been locked or unlocked.

Luggage compartment flaps can beopened (the LED lights up in the cor-

responding luggage compartmentflaps pushbutton in the driver's areadepending on which side of the busthe luggage compartments are un-locked).

Note:

There must be sufficient compressed airavailable.

Locking door 2

Close door 2

M72_00-0188-01

To lock door 2, insert the key intolock (2.1), turn it clockwise and turninterior handle (2) to the right at thesame time. Then turn the key backto its initial position and remove itwith the handle in the locked posi-tion.


Opening/locking

Locking door 1

Note:

Do not turn handle (2) back again, other-wise you will unlock the door again.

Locking door 1

Close door 1

M72_00-0244-01

To lock the front right door, insertthe key into lock (1), turn it clock-wise and turn handle (2) to the left(arrow position 4). Turn the key andhandle (2) back to their initial posi-tion and remove the key.

Note:

The fuel filler flaps are locked when door1 is locked.

Note:

Door 2 has to be locked separately.


Opening/locking

Locking using the radio remote control (option)

Locking using the radio remotecontrol (option)

Close the doors

M82_00-0106-71

When the radio remote control (but-ton 1) is pressed, the bus is lockedcentrally, i.e. door and luggage com-partment flap circuits are locked.

Note:

The side-mounted turn signals flash briefly3 times (approximately 1 second) to con-firm that the bus is locked.

Note:

If the key is used in the lock on the frontright door in order to lock the bus, onlythe door circuit will be locked, i.e. anyunlocked luggage compartment flaps willnot be locked by this action.

Note:

The driver's window and service coversare neither closed nor locked automatic-ally; these have to be closed or lockedmanually.

Note:

A buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an at-tempt is made to lock the bus and thebus doors, luggage compartment flaps,roof hatches or driver's window have notbeen closed and locked.

Note:

The luggage compartment flaps can alsobe locked or unlocked using two pushbut-tons in the driver's area when the ignitionswitch is switched on.

Note:

When the ignition switch is switched toOFF and the luggage compartment flapsare unlocked and closed, forced lockingoccurs after 43 minutes to conserve thebattery charge.


Opening/locking

Central locking system (option) (system description)

This icon on the screen (driver'sarea) indicates that a luggage com-partment flap has not been closedcorrectly.

Danger.

Before the bus is driven off, carry out avisual inspection to make absolutely surethat all luggage compartment flaps andservice covers are properly closed.

Central locking system (option)(system description)

The central locking system may offer thefollowing range of functions:

Complete locking of the open bususing the radio remote control (FFB)with the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

Unlocking of the door circuit (frontright door, centre right door, fuelfiller flaps) using the remote control.

Unlocking/locking of the door circuitusing the lock on the front right doorwith the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

Unlocking/locking of the luggagecompartment flaps using the FFBwith the ignition switch in the ON orOFF position.

Unlocking/locking of the luggagecompartment flaps using rockerswitch on the instrument panel withthe ignition switch in the ON or OFFposition.

Relocking of the bus after inadvertentunlocking using the FFB.

Forced locking of the luggage com-partment flaps to conserve batterycharge.

M72_00-0244-01

Locking/unlocking of the doors: It ispossible to lock or unlock the door cir-cuit (front right door, centre right door,fuel filler flaps) electrically by meansof lock (1) on the front right door orby pressing button (1) on the radio re-mote control (FFB). A locking of the doorcircuit using the FFB is always accom-panied by a simultaneous locking of the


Opening/locking


vehicle's entire central locking system.Unlocking of the doors is indicated bya long flash (maximum 3 seconds) fromthe side-mounted turn signals. When thedoor circuit is unlocked, the doorwaylighting in the front right door comes onfor a maximum of 30 seconds. It goesout if the ignition switch is switched toON or if the doors are locked. Completelocking of the bus is indicated by theside-mounted turn signals flashing (1second) three times. A locked door cir-cuit is unlocked automatically when theengine is started.

M82_00-0106-71

Locking/unlocking of the luggage com-partment flaps: The left and right-sideluggage compartment flaps can belocked or unlocked separately using FFBbutton (2) or (3). This is possible whenthe ignition switch is in the OFF or ONposition or when the engine is running.If the unlock command was issued usingthe FFB, a flap must be opened within20 seconds otherwise the bus will belocked again automatically. The LEDslight up in the rocker switches in thedriver's station. The LEDs in the rockerswitches go out if the doors are lockedusing the FFB. The side-mounted turn

signals flash once (1 second) wheneverthe FFB is used to lock or unlock theluggage compartment flaps.

M82_00-0007-01

Locking/unlocking of the luggage com-partment flaps (continued): With the igni-tion switch in the ON position, the flapson the left-hand side and the flaps onthe right-hand side can be electropneu-matically locked or unlocked separ-ately using rocker switch (5) and rockerswitch (6) respectively. The LED in thepressed rocker switch lights up when theluggage compartment flap circuit is un-locked. Status message for the driver:LED lit - luggage compartment flaps un-


Opening/locking


locked. LED not lit - luggage compart-ment flaps locked. A symbol is shownon the instrument cluster display screenif a luggage compartment flap is open.The luggage compartment flap circuitcan be locked even if a luggage compart-ment flap is open. The luggage compart-ment flap that was still open will also belocked once it is closed.

Danger.


Luggage compartment lighting opera-tion: The luggage compartment lightingis switched on if a luggage compartmentflap circuit (left or right) is unlocked andat least one of the luggage compartmentflaps is open.

The luggage compartment lighting isswitched off again when all luggage com-partment flaps are closed or both lug-gage compartment flap circuits (left andright) are locked. The luggage compart-

ment lighting is also switched off auto-matically after no more than 43 minutes(forced locking).

M82_00-0106-71

Complete locking of the bus: To have allparts of the bus locked simultaneously,it is necessary to use the FFB. To doso, press button (1) on the FFB. If thedoor circuit is already locked, it is notpossible to centrally lock the entire busdirectly using the FFB. At first, only thedoor circuit is unlocked when button(1) on the FFB is pressed for the firsttime; the complete bus is not lockeduntil button (1) is pressed once more.Complete locking is acknowledged by

the side-mounted turn signals flashing3 times (1 second). Change the radioremote control's battery if its operatingrange appears to be deteriorating.


Dispose of used batteries in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Security functions of the central lock-ing system: Relocking - relocking is asecurity feature of the central locking.If the unlocking button on the FFB ispressed inadvertently, the bus will berelocked automatically if none of thedoors or luggage compartment flaps areopened within 20 seconds. Forced lock-ing - forced locking only affects luggagecompartment flaps that have been un-locked by the central locking system.Forced locking is initiated (the solenoidvalves are deactivated to reduce the off-load current in the system) if the luggagecompartment flaps have still not beenlocked after more than 43 minutes withthe ignition switched OFF.


Opening/locking

Operating/malfunction displays: central locking

Operating/malfunction displays:central locking

Central locking of the left-sideluggage compartment flaps

This symbol is displayed on the screen ifthe left-side luggage compartment flapsare unlocked using the pushbutton inthe driver's area and no feedback is re-ceived from the pressure switch within3 seconds. In this case, there is a faultin the left-side luggage compartmentflap circuit and it may not be possible toopen the luggage compartment flaps.

Note:

This symbol also appears if the supply ofcompressed air in the left-side luggagecompartment flap circuit is too low - startthe bus and charge the compressed-airsupply.

Note:

Only in buses without central locking (ZV)(option).

Central locking of the right-sideluggage compartment flaps

This symbol is displayed on the screenif the right-side luggage compartmentflaps are unlocked using the pushbuttonin the driver's area and no feedback isreceived from the pressure switch within3 seconds. In this case, there is a faultin the right-side luggage compartmentflap circuit and it may not be possible toopen the luggage compartment flaps.

Note:

This symbol also appears if the supply ofcompressed air in the right-side luggagecompartment flap circuit is too low - startthe bus and charge the compressed-airsupply.

Note:

Only in buses without central locking (ZV)(option).

Luggage compartment flap open(option)

This symbol appears on the screen ifone or more luggage compartment flapsor service covers have not been lockedcorrectly.


Opening/locking

Emergency operation of the doors (depressurising the doors using the emergency valves)

Danger.


Note:

Only in buses with central locking (ZV)(option) or luggage compartment flapwarning display (option).

Emergency operation of the doors(depressurising the doors using theemergency valves)

Danger.

All doors must remain unlocked while thebus is in motion. - refer to Operating In-structions sections: “Opening/Locking”,“Unlocking the door circuit at the frontright door / Unlocking the centre rightdoor / Unlocking the door circuit usingthe radio remote control (option)” M72_00-0023-01

Remove the security seal from theemergency valve.

Note:

3 Exterior emergency valve, front rightdoor

Note:

3.1 Interior emergency valve, front rightdoor


Opening/locking

Emergency operation of the doors (depressurising the doors using the emergency valves)

Note:

3.2 Exterior emergency valve, centre rightdoor

Note:

3.3 Interior emergency valve, centre rightdoor

Turn interior emergency valve(3.1/3.3) or exterior emergency valve(3/3.2) in the direction of the arrow.

Note:

When the emergency valve is operated,the door valve is vented of air. At thesame time, the emergency valve also re-leases the air in the door system. Thedoor system is now depressurised and itmust now be possible to move the doormanually.

The warning buzzer sounds in thedriver's area. The red warning lampin the relevant door pushbutton mustflash. This symbol appears on theinstrument cluster display screentogether with a red alert.

Restoring operation of the door sys-tem: - move the emergency valveinto the normal position – the doorcompressed-air system is slowlyrefilled through a door actuationthrottle valve and returns to the con-dition it was in before the emergencyvalve was operated.

Danger.

Risk of injury. Make sure that nobody iswithin the sweep of the door leaf whenoperation of the door system is restored.Doors must not move with a jerky orjolting action after normal operation hasbeen restored.

Provide the emergency valve with anew security seal.


Opening/locking

Emergency unlocking of the luggage compartment flaps in the event of a compressed-air supply failure

Emergency unlocking of the luggagecompartment flaps in the event of acompressed-air supply failure

Note:

If there has been a complete failure ofthe central compressed-air supply andthe electrical power supply, the luggagecompartment flaps can be emergency-un-locked by means of an emergency oper-ating facility (spare wheel compressed-airreserve). M00_00-0084-01

Open the front cover of the bus us-ing lever (1) at the front right doorentrance

Remove the spare wheel

M40_00-0073-01

Take the hose with tyre connection(2) from the plate behind the heat-ing front cabinet and connect it tothe tyre inflation valve on the sparewheel.

Note:

The spare wheel has a pressure of ap-proximately 8 bar. The compressed air inthe spare wheel passes through shuttlevalves to the cylinders of the luggagecompartment locking system and un-locks the luggage compartment flaps. Theluggage compartment flaps can then beopened.


Opening/locking

Opening/closing the service cover under the driver's window

Note:

Reinflate the spare wheel to the specifiedpressure as soon as possible.

Opening/closing the service coverunder the driver's window

M00.00-0591-71

To release: to release the servicecover, pull handle (1).

Danger.

Do not pull the release lever while thevehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the ser-vice cover could open.

Note:

Handle (1) is located on the floor of thebus to the left-hand side of the driver'sseat.

The service cover is released.

M00.00-0655-71

To open: open service cover (1) to-wards you.


Opening/locking

Opening/closing the roof hatches manually

To close: close service cover (1) witha gentle push.

Danger.

When you close the service cover, thereis a risk of injury from entrapment.

You should hear the service coverengage. Check whether the servicecover has engaged correctly.

Opening/closing the roof hatchesmanually

M77_00-0020-71

Open the roof hatch to the front orrear of the bus manually using handle(1).

Note:

The roof hatches can be moved into theair-in or air-out position.

To close the roof hatches, pull handle(1).

Danger.

There is a risk of injury and entrapment ifparts of the body (fingers) are in the areaof movement of the roof hatches.

To open the roof hatch in an emer-gency, remove emergency hammer(2) from the bracket and strike theglass.

Note:

The emergency hammer must only beused in an emergency and with the busstationary.


Opening/locking

Emergency exit through emergency operation of the electric roof hatches (option)

Emergency exit through emer-gency operation of the electric roofhatches (option)

Danger.

The emergency release is only for usein an emergency and when the bus isstationary.

Note:

Both emergency exits (front and rear roofhatches) are unlocked as soon as the busis unlocked by the central locking system,the lock at door 1 is unlocked or whenev-er the ignition starter switch is switchedto ON. They are relocked as soon asthe ignition starter switch is switched toOFF and the bus is locked by the centrallocking system or the lock at door 1 islocked.

M77_00-0017-01

Remove cover (1) by pulling onhandle (2) (Velcro fastener) to gainaccess to the emergency exit roofhatch.

M77_00-0016-01

Emergency operation is initiated bymeans of a red exterior or interiortwist handle (1).

Note:

In emergencies, interior twist handle (1)must be turned in the direction of thearrow (clockwise). The emergency exitcover (2) can now be secured by a safetyrope and placed to one side outside thebus.


Opening/locking

Emergency exit through emergency operation of the electric roof hatches (option)

This symbol appears on the driver'sarea display screen in the event ofemergency operation or if an outsidehandle on one of the emergency exitroof hatches is in locked conditionwith the ignition starter switch ON.

Danger.

Following emergency operation of anemergency exit roof hatch, it is neces-sary to have the cover fitted by specialistpersonnel at an OMNIplus Service Part-ner.



On-board kitchenetteTable of contents

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Instructions for operating a microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Use for the intended purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

First use of the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Switching on the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Filling the fresh water tank inside the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Filling the fresh water tank outside the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Checking and cleaning the fresh water filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Drawing water from the water tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Switching on the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Descaling the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Switching on the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Cleaning the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Descaling the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Switching on the 40-cup coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283



Brewing coffee in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Cleaning the 40-cup coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Switching on the 2-carafe filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Brewing 2 carafes of coffee (40 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Manual operation of the 2-carafe filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Descaling the coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Draining the fresh water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Draining the water lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Draining the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Draining the 40-cup coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Draining the 2-carafe filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Draining the siphon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298



Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Restoring boiler operation following a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Using the sausage heater again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Using the 40-cup coffee machine again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Using the 2-carafe filter system again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Other malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Switching off the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305


On-board kitchenetteGeneral information

General information

Caution:

Never operate the equipment without wa-ter. Risk of thermal damage - loss of war-ranty.

Danger.

To avoid the risk of fire and damage, itis prohibited to store anything inside thesausage heater or microwave oven.

Danger.

Use only clean drinking water.

Danger.

To prevent the growth of microbes in wa-ter left inside the system, the entire sys-tem must be drained (refer to “Winteroperation”) if the galley and/or lavatory isto remain out of service temporarily.

Note:

It is advisable to disinfect water-carryingsystems at regular intervals or after oper-ation has been restored. A sodium hypo-chloride solution (from camping and cara-vanning retailers) is particularly suitable;observe the manufacturer's instructions.

Caution:

Do not use the coffee machine, waterboiler or sausage heater unless the kit-chenette is open. Damage caused byheat and steam when the kitchenette isclosed is not covered by the warranty.

Danger.

Secure loose objects in the kitchenette(cans, cups, lids, etc.) properly during thejourney.

Note:

Waste water from the galley flows intothe lavatory's holding tank.


Dispose of waste in an environmentallyresponsible manner. The rules and regu-lations of the country in which the vehicleis operated must be observed.


On-board kitchenetteInstructions for operating a microwave oven

Instructions for operating amicrowave oven

Caution:

Never use the oven when it is empty.Place at least one glass of water in theoven if you want to carry out a test. Nometal objects should be placed in theoven interior as this would result in spark-ing and damage to the oven.

Danger.

Living animals or body parts must not beexposed to microwaves.

Danger.

To reduce the risk of a fire breaking outas a consequence of overheated food, themicrowave oven must never be operatedwithout supervision. If food catches fire,switch the microwave oven off but do notopen the oven doors.

Danger.

Microwaves only heat up foods contain-ing water; this means that the containermay feel cold but the food inside couldbe boiling hot. To eliminate the risk ofburns, the temperature of the food musttherefore be checked before the food isserved. This applies to the preparation offood for children or babies in particular.

Danger.

The rules below for handling microwaveovens must be adhered to in order toreduce the risk of microwaves causingburning, electric shocks, radiation andfire:

Only use suitable containers. A con-tainer is suitable for use in the mi-crowave oven if it remains cold afterhaving been heated in the oven forone minute at maximum power.

Do not operate the microwave ovenwith the door open, it is possible that

dangerous microwave energy mayescape.

Do not bridge the door safety circuit.

Do not place any objects betweenthe microwave oven door and theoven interior, keep the door sealsclean.

Do not use the oven if it is faulty.

Only allow the microwave oven to berepaired by a specialist workshop.

All openings on the microwave oven(ventilation in and out) must be free.

Never allow children to use the mi-crowave oven unless they are super-vised.

To reduce the risk of fire in the oveninterior: foodstuffs must never beoverheated, binding wires must beremoved from paper or plastic pack-aging.

Do not heat popcorn in the mi-crowave oven unless you do thisusing a popcorn insert or use specialpopcorn.


On-board kitchenetteInstructions for operating a microwave oven

Only use thermometers recommen-ded for use in microwave ovens tomeasure the temperature of food-stuffs in the oven.

Our instructions must be closely fol-lowed when cooking pork. The meatmust be heated to at least 70 °Cso that any bacteria that may bepresent will definitely be destroyed.

Frozen drinks contained in narrow-necked bottles, especially carbonateddrinks, must not be defrosted in themicrowave oven. Pressure can formeven in open containers with the ef-fect that the container may explodeand cause injuries.

Foodstuffs must not be overcooked.If, for instance, potatoes are over-cooked they can dry out and becomea fire risk.

Cooking of eggs (in or not in a shell)in the microwave oven cannot be re-commended. The pressure in the eggyolk could cause the egg to explodeand cause injuries.

Foodstuffs in skins, such as potatoes,sausages, tomatoes, chicken liversand other offal, eggs, etc., should bepierced so that steam generated bycooking can escape.

Microwaveable bags and sealedplastic bags should be cut open orpierced to prevent them explodingduring cooking and possibly causinginjuries. Plastic containers shouldbe opened at least a small amount.After containers have been cookedwhile they were sealed with plasticfoil, the cover must be removed insuch a way that escaping steam doesnot come into contact with the handsor face.

The microwave oven must not beused to dry paper (newspapers).They can catch fire if overheated.

Danger.

When liquids (water) are heated in the mi-crowave oven, and especially reheated,it can sometimes happen that the boil-ing temperature has been reached butthe typical steam bubbles do not initiallyform. The liquid does not boil uniformly.When the container is removed (shaken)this boiling delay, as it is called, can sud-denly cause steam bubbles to form andtherefore start to boil over suddenly - riskof scalding. To prevent this, it is neces-sary to place a glass rod in the container,for instance. The glass rod ensures thatfluid in the container boils uniformly andtherefore the steam bubbles form at theusual time.


On-board kitchenetteUse for the intended purpose

Note:

Clean microwave ovens after they havebeen used with a commercially availablewashing detergent, do not use abrasivecleaner. Switch off the ignition when do-ing this. If it is necessary to clean dried-on food residue from the oven interior,it can be softened by placing a glass ofwater in the oven and boiling it for ap-proximately 10 minutes.

Use for the intended purpose

The galley and its equipment are inten-ded for normal kitchen use during a busjourney. This includes:

Boiler for hot water preparation

Coffee machine for brewing coffee

Sausage heater for preparing saus-ages

Any other use cannot be considered usefor the intended purpose.

Approved personnel

The kitchenette may only be used bytrained personnel. The personnel mustbe professionally qualified and have readand understood this section.

The safety of the person using the kit-chenette and the security of all kitchenutensils are prerequisites for use of thekitchenette while the bus is in motion.

Danger.

Objects being thrown out of the kit-chenette can cause injuries. The personusing the kitchenette must secure looseobjects safely while the bus is in motion.


On-board kitchenetteFirst use of the galley

First use of the galley

Galley switched on

Fresh water tank filled and connec-ted

All packaging materials must be re-moved before the galley is used forthe first time. All utensils must bethoroughly cleaned and rinsed infresh water.


Dispose of the packaging material in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

M86_00-0375-73

Press button (4) on the control paneland keep it pressed (yellow LED (6)flashes) until green LED (5) lights up.

The boiler has been filled and bledand can now be switched on usingcontrol button (9) to draw hot water.

Note:

To avoid scale and steam, do not turncontrol knob (9) to maximum temperatureunless you need very hot water.

Before first use, clean the sausageheater tank, the lid and the overflowpipe thoroughly with hot water anda commercially available washing upliquid, and then rinse well with cleanwater. Then wipe the sausage heatertank dry to avoid scaling.

To clean the coffee machine, fillit with water and brew the waterwithout coffee powder but with thefilter holder fitted, then repeat.

The galley is ready for use.


On-board kitchenetteSwitching on the galley

Switching on the galley

Note:

The coffee machine, boiler, sausage heat-er and microwave oven cannot be oper-ated unless the engine is running.

M86_00-0058-01

Press galley master switch (1).

The LED in master switch (1) lightsup.

M86_00-0140-01

Release folding cover on lock (2.1)by unlocking and pressing it. Pullhandle (2.2). Fold the upper part ofthe folding cover down by handle(2.3).

Danger.

Since the counter protrudes into thesteps area, the kitchenette should beswitched off and closed before passen-gers embark or disembark. Risk of injury.

Note:

The lower and middle covers can now beused as a counter.


On-board kitchenetteFilling the fresh water tank inside the bus

M86_00-0375-73

Switch on the galley lighting usingbutton (2) on the galley control pan-el.

The LEDs of the galley lighting comeon and indicator lamp (3) lights up.

The galley is open and ready for use.

Note:

If indicator lamp (3) on the control paneldoes not light up, there is insufficient on-board voltage to operate the kitchenette.Start the engine to enable the batteriesto recharge.

Filling the fresh water tank insidethe bus

M86_00-0142-02

Fill fresh water tank (4) via cap (4.1).


On-board kitchenetteFilling the fresh water tank inside the bus

Danger.

The kitchenette must be operated usingclean and potable water only. Fresh wa-ter for kitchenette requirements must berenewed every day. If the fresh water isstored in the water tank for a long peri-od of time, an additive (Micropur, mat.no. 0.971.407.000) in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions must bemixed with it.

Danger.

The tools used to fill with water (contain-ers, funnels, hoses, etc.) must be sterile.

Note:

It is recommended that fresh water tank(4) be cleaned manually via caps (4.1)and (4.2) and/or that it be flushed thor-oughly with fresh water. The fresh waterlines should then also be flushed withfresh water by drawing cold/hot waterand switching on the coffee machine.

Note:

Use spanner (4.3) if the caps are difficultto turn.

Note:

In new buses, the drinking watermay sometimes taste of plastic. Anadditive (Kunststoff-Frisch, mat. no.0.971.405.000) can be mixed in accord-ance with the manufacturer's instructionsto neutralise this aftertaste.

Note:

The fresh water tank is located in theluggage compartment in front of the lav-atory, and in the right-hand luggage com-partment to the rear of the driven axle onearlier bus models.

Note:

Waste water from the kitchenette flowsinto the lavatory's holding tank.


On-board kitchenetteFilling the fresh water tank outside the bus

Filling the fresh water tank outsidethe bus

M86_00-0142-02

Disconnect quick-release coupling (5)from fresh water tank (4).

Release tensioning straps (4.4). Re-move fresh water tank (4).

Fill fresh water tank (4) with puredrinking water via cap (4.2). Closecap (4.2) firm and tight.

Fit fresh water tank (4) into the busand secure using tensioning straps(4.4).

Connect quick-release coupling (5) tofresh water tank (4).

Checking and cleaning the freshwater filter

M86_00-0376-71

The fresh water filter is located be-hind cover (2). Unscrew knurledscrews (1) to permit removal of thecover.


On-board kitchenetteDrawing water from the water tap

M86_00-0143-01

Check fresh water filter (6) for clog-ging at regular intervals (dependingon the water quality) and clean it ifnecessary.

Note:

The fresh water filter is located betweenthe fresh water tank and the fresh waterpump.

Drawing water from the water tap

Galley switched on


M86_00-0377-71

Open rotary knob (6) to draw coldwater from tap (7).

Open rotary knob (5) to draw hotwater from tap (7).

Danger.

Outflow of hot water - danger of scalding.

Note:

No hot water can be drawn unless theboiler is in operation. It takes approxim-ately 20 minutes for the water to heat upto a set temperature of 80 °C.

Note:

Opening both rotary knobs (5) and (6)draws a mixture of hot and cold water.


On-board kitchenetteSwitching on the boiler

Switching on the boiler

Galley switched on


Caution:

There is a risk of overheating and thermaldamage if the boiler is operated with nowater. Never operate the boiler withoutwater.

M86_00-0375-73

Before you switch on the boiler,press and hold button (4) until greenLED (5) lights up in order to makesure that the boiler contains water.

The boiler has been filled with waterand bled.

To switch on the boiler, turn controlknob (9) clockwise.

Green LED (8) above control knob (9)lights up and the water is heated.

Note:

The boiler switches off when you turncontrol knob (9) back. Green LED (8)goes out.

Note:

If red LED (7) lights up, the boiler hasoverheated and must be switched offby turning control knob (9) fully anti-clockwise (position 0) until the boiler hascooled down.

The boiler heats up the water andautomatically switches off when the


On-board kitchenetteDescaling the boiler

temperature set at the control knobhas been reached. LED (8) goes out.

Note:

The boiler has a capacity of approximately5 litres and it takes approximately 20minutes for the water to heat up to a settemperature of 80 °C.

Descaling the boiler

M86_00-0142-02

Disconnect the hose at quick-releasecoupling (5).

Note:

How frequently the galley should be de-scaled depends on the water quality butthe boiler should be descaled immediatelyif there is a noticeable increase in thelength of the heating phase. It is advis-able to descale the boiler twice a year.

Hold the hose in a container of de-scaler (at least 10 litres).

Note:

Use only descalers that are suitable fordomestic appliances. The descaler mustbe non-aggressive to plastics and alumini-um. Observe the information provided bythe manufacturer.


On-board kitchenetteDescaling the boiler

Note:

Fully drain the boiler descaling.

M86_00-0375-73

Press and hold pushbutton (4) untilgreen LED (5) lights up.

The boiler has been filled with de-scaler.

To switch on the boiler, turn controlknob (9) fully clockwise (position 3).

LED (8) lights up and the water con-taining descaler is heated.

Wait until LED (8) goes out.

The contents of the boiler have beenheated.

Note:

The boiler has a capacity of approximately5 litres and it takes approximately 20minutes for the water to heat up to a settemperature of 80 °C.

Drain the water and descaler byopening tap (5).


On-board kitchenetteSwitching on the sausage heater

M86_00-0142-02

Connect the hose to fresh water tank(4).

Flush the boiler with plenty of freshwater. To do this, fill the boiler withfresh water, heat the water and drainit.

Note:

Repeat the last step until the water nolonger tastes or smells of descaler or vin-egar.

Switching on the sausage heater

Galley switched on


Danger.

There is a risk of scalding when usingthe sausage heater. Hot steam can rise,which may cause serious burns to theface, arms and hands. Keep at a safedistance, and remove hot sausages usingonly heat-resistant kitchen utensils.

Note:

The length of the heating phase dependson the amount of water, the number ofsausages and the temperature of the wa-ter used to fill the boiler.



Note:

The sausage heater has a capacity of 8.5litres.

Note:


M86_00-0149-01

Insert overflow pipe (12) into the dis-charge hole, ensuring leak-tightness.

Danger.

Never use the sausage heater withoutwater.

Note:

Excess water may run out via overflowpipe (12).

Fill the sausage heater tank half full(approximately 2 - 3 litres) with coldor hot water.

Add the sausages to the sausageheater tank and replace the lid onthe sausage heater tank.

Note:

When adding sausages, there is a risk ofhot water splashing and causing burnsto the face, arms and hands. Add thesausages to the water carefully and keepa safe distance.



M86_00-0375-73

Switch on the sausage heater byturning control knob (10).

Green LED (12) lights up during theheating phase.

Note:

If red LED (11) lights up, the sausageheater has overheated and must beswitched off by turning the control knobfully anti-clockwise (position 0) until theheater has cooled down.

M86_00-0149-01

At the end of the heating phase, re-move the lid.

Danger.

The sausage heater is hot and generatessteam - risk of scalding. Do not removeoverflow pipe (12) until the water in thetank has cooled sufficiently that there isno longer a risk of scalding.

Take out the sausages using tongsor a suitable heat-resistant kitchenutensil.


On-board kitchenetteCleaning the sausage heater

M86_00-0149-01

The water in the sausage heater tankcan be drained as soon as the waterhas been allowed to cool down. Todo this, remove overflow pipe (12)from the discharge hole.

Cleaning the sausage heater

After use, clean the sausage heatertank, the lid and the overflow pipewith warm water and a commer-cially available washing up liquid.Use a soft sponge without a scour-er or similar abrasive product. Rinsewith clean water and wipe the saus-age heater tank dry to avoid scaling.Clean the overflow pipe with bottlecleaner at regular intervals.

Note:

Clean the sausage heater tank with acommercially available stainless steelcleaner at regular intervals.

Descaling the sausage heater

Fill the sausage heater tank 2 cmhigh with descaler.

Leave the descaler to work (observethe information issued by the manu-facturer).

Note:

For heavy scaling, it is possible to operatethe sausage heater containing descalerfor approximately 30 minutes at 80 °C.

Drain the boiler after the descaler re-action time and rinse well with cleanwater. Wipe the sausage heater tankdry.


On-board kitchenetteSwitching on the 40-cup coffee machine

Switching on the 40-cup coffeemachine

Galley switched on


Note:

There is a risk of scalding when servinghot drinks. There is a risk of seriousburns. Do not pour the coffee until it issafe to do so.

Danger.

Do not switch on the coffee machine un-less its tank has been filled with water -risk of overheating.

M86_00-0377-71

Pulling release handle (3) up makes itpossible to pivot the coffee machineout of the kitchenette

M86_00-0010-01

Pivot the 40-cup coffee machine outof the galley. Close residual drainvalve (24) and tap (23).



M86_00-0008-01

Open the lid. Turn lock ring (17) anti-clockwise and unlock it.

M86_00-0010-01

Remove lock ring (17) and lid (18)and take out filter holder (19).

Pivot the 40-cup coffee machine intothe galley until it engages.

M86_00-0378-71

Open tap (1) to fill the 40-cup coffeemachine with water.

Note:

The minimum amount of water to fill the40-cup coffee machine is the equivalentof 10 cups. The maximum amount ofwater is the equivalent of 40 cups. Thenumber of cups is indicated at water levelglass (21).



M86_00-0010-01

Insert the filter paper into filter hold-er (19) and fill filter holder (19) withthe required amount of coffee (1mark ring = 10 cups).

Note:

You can also use the machine withoutpaper if the coffee has not been groundtoo fine.

Close filter holder (19) and lid (18)and place it on the riser pipe in themachine.

M86_00-0008-01

Position lid (18) and lock ring (17)on top and engage by turning anti-clockwise:

Note:

Lug (17.1) must be positioned over waterlevel glass (21).

M86_00-0010-01

Switch on the 40-cup coffee machineusing rocker switch (22). The brew-ing process begins.

Danger.

Whilst coffee is being brewed, steam es-capes from the openings in the lid. Donot open the lid when the coffee machineis switched on.



Note:

Indicator lamp (22.1) lights up when thecoffee has finished brewing.

Note:

The coffee is kept warm as long as rock-er switch (22) has not been switched off.

Note:

Do not switch off the coffee machine dur-ing the keep-warm phase because a newbrewing process would begin when themachine were switched back on - coffeequality would be degraded.

Push tap (23) down to pour coffee.Lock it in the vertical position forcontinuous pouring.

Note:

Lock the tap in the vertical position forcontinuous pouring.

Switch off rocker switch (22) if thereis no more coffee in the coffee ma-chine or no more coffee is needed.

M86_00-0159-02

Drain off the remaining coffee withresidual drain valve (24).


On-board kitchenetteBrewing coffee in winter

Brewing coffee in winter

Caution:

Operation of the 40-cup coffee machinein winter is permitted only once it hasbeen established that the interior of thekitchenette is not frozen, otherwise thereis a risk of damage. The interior com-partment of the bus should be heated forsome time beforehand.

M86_00-0010-01

Remove lid (18) and filter holder (19).Use a suitable vessel to fill water intothe coffee machine container andswitch on the machine.

Cleaning the 40-cup coffee machine

Galley switched on

Note:

Regular cleaning after each use ensuresoptimum coffee quality and full taste.

Clean the filter holder using a com-mercially available washing up liquidand a brush. Do not use a descalerwhen cleaning the filter holder.

Clean the inside of the riser pipe ofthe 40-cup coffee machine with acloth and stainless steel cleaner.

Note:

The bottom of the tank, the opening onthe riser pipe and the diaphragm must befree of coffee residues.

To remove the water level glass, re-move the catch at the top. Clean thewater level glass using a pipe clean-er or a bottle brush. After cleaning,press the catch back into the waterlevel glass, ensuring leak-tightness.


On-board kitchenetteSwitching on the 2-carafe filter system

To clean the tap, unscrew the upperpart with rocker arm and flush withclean water.

Flush the residual drain valve withclean water.

Switching on the 2-carafe filtersystem

Galley switched on


Caution:

Running programs cannot be interrup-ted. If there is a power failure, it will benecessary to restart the program. If thecarafes contain coffee from a previousprogram, they must be drained first toavoid the risk of overflowing.

Caution:

To avoid the risk of overflowing, makesure that the carafes are empty beforethe brewing process begins.

Note:

The coffee filter must equate to size 1x 6 (commercially available). Add theamount of coffee powder according totaste (e.g. 1 teaspoon per cup).

The 2-carafe filter system is able tofill two carafes with a capacity of 2litres. This is sufficient to pour 40100 ml cups of coffee. It is possibleto brew 1/2 a carafe, 1 carafe or 2carafes of coffee.


On-board kitchenetteBrewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10 cups of coffee)

Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10cups of coffee)

M86_00-0151-01

Remove left-hand filter (25). Insertfilter paper and add as much coffeepowder as required.

Note:

Add coffee powder to taste (e.g. 1 tea-spoon per cup, which corresponds to 10teaspoons for half a carafe of coffee).

Slide left-hand filter (25) back intoposition.

Place an empty carafe (26) underleft-hand filter (25).

M86_00-0153-01


The LED in button (30) lights up. Thebrewing process begins.

An electronic signal sounds whenbrewing has finished.

The LED in button (30) goes out.

Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cupsof coffee)

M86_00-0151-01

Remove left-hand filter (25). Insertfilter paper and add as much coffeepowder as required.

Note:

Add coffee powder to taste (e.g. 1 tea-spoon per cup, which corresponds to20 teaspoons for one carafe of coffee).


On-board kitchenetteBrewing 2 carafes of coffee (40 cups of coffee)

Slide left-hand filter (25) back intoposition.

Place an empty carafe (26) underleft-hand filter (25).

M86_00-0154-01





Brewing 2 carafes of coffee (40cups of coffee)

M86_00-0152-01

Remove left-hand filter (25) and right-hand filter (27). Insert filter paperand add as much coffee powder asrequired.

Note:

Add coffee powder to taste (e.g. 1 tea-spoon per cup, which corresponds to20 teaspoons for one carafe of coffee).

Slide left-hand filter (25) and right-hand filter (27) back into position.

Place two empty carafes (26) and(28) under left-hand filter (25) andright-hand filter (27) respectively.

M86_00-0155-01




On-board kitchenetteManual operation of the 2-carafe filter system



Manual operation of the 2-carafefilter system

Note:

Button (33) is not required for normaloperation. It can be used to drain offany residual water in the coffee machinewater tank.

M86_00-0151-01

Place an empty carafe on the left-hand side.

M86_00-0156-01

Press button (33).

The water in the 2-carafe filter sys-tem is boiled out.

The water in the 2-carafe filter sys-tem is completely drained.


On-board kitchenetteDescaling the coffee machine

Descaling the coffee machine

Note:

How frequently the galley should be de-scaled depends on the water quality butthe coffee machine should be descaledimmediately if performance deterioratesor if the openings in the filter begin toscale up.

M86_00-0142-02


Hold hose in a container of descaler(at least 10 litres).

Note:

Use only descalers that are suitable fordomestic appliances. The descaler mustnot attack plastics and aluminium.

Operate the 40-cup coffee machinewithout the filter holder and with thetank full or operate the 2-carafe filtersystem with two carafes.

Note:

Clean the filter holder of the 40-cup cof-fee machine using only a commerciallyavailable washing up liquid and a brush.



On-board kitchenetteWinter operation

Flush with fresh water. To do this,brew several carafes without coffee.

Note:


Winter operation

Galley switched on

Over winter, drain the fresh watertank, water lines, boiler, coffee ma-chines and siphon.

Note:

To prevent damage to water-carrying in-stallations, these must be completelydrained before the first frost.

Draining the fresh water tank

M86_00-0142-02



On-board kitchenetteDraining the water lines

Release both tensioning straps (4.4).

Remove fresh water tank (4) from thebus and open cap (4.1) to completelydrain the water.

Note:


Close cap (4.1) firm and tight. Fitfresh water tank (4) into the bus andsecure using tensioning straps (4.4).Connect quick-release coupling (5) tofresh water tank (4).

The fresh water tank is completelydrained.

Draining the water lines

M86_00-0305-71

To drain off the majority of the water,route hose (2) to the outside of thebus and open tap (1).

Note:

The tap is located in the luggage com-partment next to the fresh water tank orbelow the water pump.

M86_00-0377-71

To drain off the remaining water,open cold water tap (5) and hot wa-ter tap (6) and allow the boiler todrain empty.

The water lines are completelydrained.


On-board kitchenetteDraining the boiler

Draining the boiler

Caution:

There is a risk of overheating if the boileris operated with no water. Switch off theboiler before draining it.

Note:

The drain plug is located on the bottomleft behind the folding cover of the galley. M86_00-0306-71

Pull out hose (36) on the left-handside behind the folding cover.

Position a heat-resistant container(minimum capacity of 5 litres) underthe end of the hose sealed with a redor black drain plug (36.1).

Danger.

Hot water may flow out when the boiler isdrained. Do not allow your hands or armsto come into contact with the water.

Open hose clamp (36.2), remove redor black drain plug (36.1) and drainall the water from the boiler into thecontainer underneath.

Seal hose (36) with the red or blackdrain plug (36.1). Secure drainplug (36.1) firmly in place using hoseclamp (36.2). Slide hose (36) backinto the galley.

The boiler is completely drained.


On-board kitchenetteDraining the 40-cup coffee machine

Draining the 40-cup coffee machine

M86_00-0159-02

Position residual drain valve (37) overdrainage basin (38).

Turn residual drain valve (24) to theopen position to drain the residualwater from the 40-cup coffee ma-chine.

The residual water drains out.

Turn residual drain valve (24) back tothe closed position.

The 40-cup coffee machine is com-pletely drained and sealed.

Draining the 2-carafe filter system

Note:

The 2-carafe filter system is automaticallydrained after every brewing process.

Proceed as follows if you wish tomake sure that there is no more wa-ter in the 2-carafe filter system:

M86_00-0151-01

Place an empty carafe (26) on theleft-hand side.


On-board kitchenetteDraining the siphon

M86_00-0156-01

Press button (33).

The water in the coffee machine tankis boiled out.

The 2-carafe filter system is drained.

Draining the siphon

Note:

The siphon of the galley waste waterdrain is located in the 2nd step in door-way II.

M86_00-0160-01

Disassemble and empty the siphon(39) (odour trap) for the kitchenettewaste water drain at union nuts(39.1).

Fill the siphon with windscreen anti-freeze mat. no. A 001 986 45 71 11(down to -30 °C) and then reas-semble it.


On-board kitchenetteReplacing fuses

Replacing fuses

Danger. Risk of fire.

Do not use fuses with a higher than spe-cified amperage.

The result would be damage to the elec-trical system or even a fire in the cables.

Always use fuses of the specified am-perage and never attempt to bridge orrewire fuses.

Fuses should be replaced only whenthe cause of malfunction has beenrectified.

Danger.

Do not replace fuses unless the powerhas been switched off.

Note:

This description is based on the stand-ard assignment of fuses in the bus. Bus-specific assignment may differ from busto bus. Not all fuse slots are necessar-ily occupied in every bus. Furthermore,fuses may occupy unassigned slots be-cause they are protecting special custom-er options or retrofitted equipment, forexample.

M86_00-0001-01

Switch off the kitchenette at masterswitch (1).

The LED goes out.



On-board kitchenetteReplacing fuses

M54.00-2004-71

Switch battery isolating switch(01S01) to OFF.

Danger.

Use only fuses of the specified amper-age. Never replace fuses with those of ahigher ampere rating as this could lead todamage to the electrical system.

M86_00-0377-71

One fuse (4) is integrated into thecontrol panel. Additional fuses (4)are located behind the drawers.

Note:

In the case of on-board kitchenettes with40-cup coffee machine.

Remove the control panel by loosen-ing the four crosshead screws underthe film.

Note:

In the case of on-board kitchenettes with2-carafe filter system.

M86_00-0162-01

Exchange the defective fuse.

Move the control panel into positionand secure using the four crossheadscrews.

The kitchenette can be switched on.


On-board kitchenetteMalfunctions

MalfunctionsThis section describes malfunctionsthat you can rectify yourself.

Restoring boiler operation followinga malfunction

M86_00-0148-02

The overheating protection istriggered if the boiler is operatedwith no water.

Note:

Fill the boiler with water to rectify themalfunction. Reactivate the overheatingprotection by pressing button (11) behindthe control panel.


On-board kitchenetteUsing the sausage heater again after a malfunction

M86_00-0162-01

The boiler does not heat up.

Note:

Replace fuse (44) to rectify the malfunc-tion.

Insufficient hot water flow or excess-ive heating time.

Note:

Symptom of scaling, descale the boiler.

Water flows out of the tap when theboiler is heating.

Note:

No malfunction, because water expandsduring the heating process.

Using the sausage heater againafter a malfunction

M86_00-0165-01

The overheating protection istriggered if the sausage heater isoperated with no water. The red LEDin button (13.4) lights up.

Note:

Fill the sausage heater with water torectify the malfunction. Reactivate theoverheating protection by pressing button(13.4) on the control panel.


On-board kitchenetteUsing the 40-cup coffee machine again after a malfunction

Using the 40-cup coffee machineagain after a malfunction

Heating is switched off by a temper-ature limiter if the coffee machineoverheats.

Note:

Pressing in the red pin at the base of theappliance reactivates the coffee machine(after approximately 5 - 10 minutes cool-ing down period)

M86_00-0377-71

The indicator lamp does not light up.

Note:

Check the power supply or replace fuse(4) if necessary.

The brewing process for 40 cups stillhas not finished after approximately40 minutes.

Note:

The riser pipe is not seated in the centreof the brewing chamber. Riser pipe ordiaphragm blocked.

Coffee machine boils over.

Note:

Too much water added. Coffee powdertoo fine. Filter holder clogged or blocked.Lid not locked.

Dripping tap.

Note:

Dirt, e.g. coffee residue, clean the tap.Screw connection leaking, replace theseal.


On-board kitchenetteUsing the 2-carafe filter system again after a malfunction

No water level in the water levelglass even though the coffee ma-chine is full.

Note:

Lower inlet opening blocked. Clean theinlet opening from the inside, remove thewater level glass if necessary.

Water dripping from residual drainvalve.

Note:

Dirt, e.g. coffee residue, unscrew theangle piece and clean the tap. Screwconnection leaking, replace the seal.

Using the 2-carafe filter systemagain after a malfunction

A continuous tone indicates that thefresh water tank is empty.

Note:

Fill the fresh water tank. Press any but-ton on the control panel of the 2-carafefilter system. The 2-carafe filter systemresumes the program from the point atwhich it was interrupted.

M86_00-0157-01

Overheating protection triggered.

Note:

To reactivate the 2-carafe filter system,press the overheat protection switch forleft-hand carafe (34) or right-hand carafe(35) behind the control panel.


On-board kitchenetteOther malfunctions

M86_00-0162-01

2-carafe filter system fills with waterbut does not brew.

Note:

Replace fuse (43) to rectify the malfunc-tion.

Other malfunctions

M86_00-0162-01

The control panel is not working.

Note:

Either the fuse or the control panel isdefective. Replace fuse (42) or have thecontrol panel repaired by the after-salesservice.

Galley light does not switch on.

Note:

Change bulb (24 V/5 W) or replace fuse(42).

Note:

In the case of on-board kitchenettes with40-cup coffee machine, the lighting fea-tures LED technology.


On-board kitchenetteSwitching off the galley

M86_00-0377-71

No water or irregular flow.

Note:

Fill the fresh water tank with water. Orreplace fuse (41). Or have the waterpump replaced by the after-sales service.

Note:

In the case of on-board kitchenettes with40-cup coffee machine, replace defectivefuse (4).

Switching off the galley

Note:

All appliances must be switched off be-fore the galley can be switched off.

M86_00-0375-73


On-board kitchenetteSwitching off the galley

Switch off the galley lighting usingbutton (2) on the control panel.

M86_00-0141-01

In the case of on-board kitchenetteswith 2-carafe filter system, switch offthe galley lighting using button (3) onthe control panel.

Fold the upper folding cover upwardsthrough 90° and press against theguide rails. Pull the entire foldingcover upwards by the upper foldingcover.

The galley is locked away.

M86_00-0001-01


The LED goes out.

The galley is switched off.


On-board kitchenette (Eltesan)

Table of contents

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308



Switching on the on-board kitchenette (Eltesan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Drawing water from the tap (Eltesan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Filling with fresh water (Eltesan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Troubleshooting (Eltesan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Winter operation (Eltesan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315



General information

General information

Caution:


Danger.


Danger.


Danger.

To prevent the growth of microbes in wa-ter left inside the system, the entire sys-tem must be drained (refer to “Winteroperation”) if the galley and/or lavatory isto remain out of service temporarily.

Note:


Caution:

Do not use the coffee machine, waterboiler or sausage heater unless the kit-chenette is open. Damage caused byheat and steam when the kitchenette isclosed is not covered by the warranty.

Danger.


Note:








The galley and its equipment are inten-ded for normal kitchen use during a busjourney. This includes:

Boiler for hot water preparation




Approved personnel

The kitchenette may only be used bytrained personnel. The personnel mustbe professionally qualified and have readand understood this section.


Danger.


Switching on the on-board kit-chenette (Eltesan)

Note:

The kitchenette is ready for operationwhen switch (1) on the instrument panelis switched on and the ignition switch isin position 1.

M86_00-0001-01

Turn the ignition switch to position 1and press on-board kitchenette mainswitch (1).



Switching on the on-board kitchenette (Eltesan)

Note:

The water boiler cannot be operated un-less the engine is running.

Caution:

Never use the equipment without water.Risk of thermal damage - loss of war-ranty. Only use clean drinking water.

Danger.

To prevent the growth of microbes in theresidual water in the system, the entiresystem must be drained (refer to “Winteroperation”) if the galley and/or lavatoryis out of service for any short period oftime.

Note:


Caution:

Do not operate the water boiler unlessthe kitchenette is open. Damage causedby heat and steam when the kitchenetteis closed is not covered by the warranty.

Caution:


Note:

Clean all the equipment thoroughly withwater and washing up liquid before usingit for the first time.



Drawing water from the tap (Eltesan)

Drawing water from the tap(Eltesan)

Note:

The kitchenette must have been switchedon at the switch in the driver's area. Thefresh water supply tank must also containwater and be connected.

Note:

The water boiler cannot be operated un-less the engine is running.

M86_00-0131-01

Hot water can be drawn from theboiler at tap (2) provided the boilercontains water. Draw off cold waterdirectly from the storage tank usingtap (3).

Danger.

Outflow of hot water - danger of scalding.

By opening tap (1), you can fill thehot water boiler with fresh water upto the maximum level (observe scale(6)).

M86_00-0307-71

The water level in the fresh watersupply tank has dropped to the min-imum level if red LED (2) on levelgauge (1) lights up. Fill up the supplytank at the earliest opportunity.

Switch on the boiler heating by turn-ing control knob (4) and pressing thered pushbutton.



Filling with fresh water (Eltesan)

Caution:

Before you switch on the heating, makesure that the hot water boiler containswater (minimum 0.5 litres).

Note:

Lamp (5) lights up while the heating isswitched on.

Note:

Heating power (and thus water temper-ature and heating time) is continuouslyadjustable using control knob (4).

Note:

Lamp (5) goes out when the set tem-perature has been reached. If the wa-ter cools down, it is necessary to pressthe red pushbutton once more to recom-mence heating.

Note:

To avoid scale and steam, do not turn thecontrol knob to the “MAX” position unlessyou need very hot water or would preferthe water to heat up within a short periodof time. For normal use, it is satisfactoryto set the temperature to approximately3/4 of the “MAX” value.

Caution:

Turning the control knob too far coulddamage it beyond repair.


M86_00-0308-71

Either fill storage tank (1) inside thebus at cap (4) or remove the tankfrom the bus (by loosening tensioningstraps (6), releasing quick-releasecoupling (3) and removing split pin(2)) and fill at cap (5).




Danger.


Note:

It is recommended that fresh water tank(1) be cleaned manually via caps (4) and(5) and/or that it be flushed thoroughlywith fresh water. The fresh water linesshould then also be flushed with freshwater by drawing cold/hot water.

Note:

Use spanner (7) if the caps are difficult toturn.

Note:

The fresh water supply tank is located inthe luggage compartment to the front ofthe lavatory.

Refit the supply tank, secure withtensioning straps (6), reinsert splitpin (2) and connect quick-releasecoupling (3).

Danger.

The kitchenette must be operated us-ing clean and potable water only. Thefresh water for the kitchenette must berenewed daily. If the fresh water is storedin the water tank for a long period oftime, an additive (Micropur, part num-ber 0.971.407.000) in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions must bemixed with it.

Note:

In new buses, the drinking watermay sometimes taste of plastic. Anadditive (Kunststoff-Frisch, Mat. No.0.971.405.000) can be mixed in accord-ance with the manufacturer's instructionsto neutralise this aftertaste.

Note:




Troubleshooting (Eltesan)

Troubleshooting (Eltesan)

Note:

The kitchenette must have been switchedon at the switch in the driver's area. Thefresh water supply tank must also containwater and be connected.

M86_00-0135-01

Check the fuses in the event of anon-board kitchenette failure or mal-function.

Note:

These are accessible at the back of theon-board kitchenette if the cover securedby 2 screws is removed.

Danger.

Make sure that you correct the causeof the short circuit before you change ablown fuse. Check that the connectionshave a good contact.

Danger.

Never attempt to bridge or repair fuses.

Danger.


Danger.

Switch off the battery isolating switch(01S01) on the auxiliary switch panel be-fore carrying out work on the electricalsystem.



Winter operation (Eltesan)

Winter operation (Eltesan)

Remove and drain the fresh watersupply tank.

Note:




On-board kitchenette (integrated in the lavatory cabin)

Table of contents

Safety precautions/general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319



First use of the kitchenette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Switching on the kitchenette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Filling the fresh water tank inside the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Filling the fresh water tank outside the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Checking and cleaning the fresh water filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Drawing water from the water tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Switching on the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Cleaning the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Descaling the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Switching on the coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Descaling the coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331



Table of contents

Dispensing cups of hot water (alternative to coffee machine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Boiler (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Setting the thermostat of the water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Descaling the water heater boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335


Draining the fresh water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Draining the water lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Draining the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Draining the siphon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Using the sausage heater again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Using the coffee machine again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Using the boiler (option) again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Other malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Switching off the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346



Safety precautions/general information

Safety precautions/general informa-tion

Caution:


Caution:

Do not use the coffee machine or saus-age heater unless the kitchenette is open.Damage caused by heat and steam whenthe kitchenette is closed is not coveredby the warranty.

Danger.


Danger.


Danger.


Danger.

To prevent the growth of microbes in wa-ter left inside the system, the entire sys-tem must be drained (refer to “Winteroperation”) if the kitchenette and/or lav-atory is to remain out of service tempor-arily.

Note:


Note:








The kitchenette and its equipment areintended for normal kitchen use during abus journey. This includes:



Boiler (option) for dispensing cups ofhot water


Approved personnel

The galley may only be used by trainedpersonnel. The personnel must be pro-fessionally qualified and have read andunderstood this section.


Danger.


First use of the kitchenetteKitchenette switched on


All packaging materials must be re-moved before the kitchenette is usedfor the first time.


Dispose of the packaging material in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

Before first use, clean the sausageheater tank, the lid and the overflowpipe thoroughly with hot water anda commercially available washing-upliquid, and then rinse well with cleanwater. Then wipe the sausage heatertank dry to avoid scaling.

To clean the coffee machine, fillit with water and brew the waterwithout coffee powder but with thefilter fitted, then repeat.



Switching on the kitchenette

M86_00-0178-71

Before the boiler (option) is switchedon, its tank must be filled with water.

Note:

Switch on the boiler using the kitchenettemaster switch on the instrument panel.Do not start the engine, otherwise theboiler will begin to heat. Press and holdhot water dispensing button (20) until wa-ter flows out of the dispenser with noair (it takes approximately 2 minutes forthe boiler to fill). It is advisable to flushthe boiler with fresh water. To do this,draw approximately 2 to 3 litres of hotwater. Start the engine to heat the boiler

(length of the heating phase approxim-ately 5 minutes).

Note:

Fill cup dispenser (21) from the front withcups, approximately 100 cups.

The kitchenette is ready for use.


Note:

The coffee machine, sausage heater andboiler (option) cannot be operated unlessthe engine is running.

M68_00-0168-71

Press kitchenette master switch (18).

A buzzer sounds in the kitchenetteelectronics. The LED in masterswitch (18) lights up.




M86_00-0169-71

Release cover (2) on lock (2.1) byunlocking and removing it.

Note:

Stow the kitchenette cover safely.

M86_00-0170-71

Switch on the kitchenette lightingusing button (3) on the kitchenettecontrol panel.

The kitchenette lighting on the leftabove the washbasin comes on. TheLED in button (3) on the control pan-el lights up.

The kitchenette is open and ready foruse.

Note:

If battery (1) does not light up in greenon the control panel, there is insuffi-cient on-board voltage to operate thekitchenette. Start the engine to enablethe batteries to recharge.



Filling the fresh water tank inside the bus

Filling the fresh water tank insidethe bus

M86_00-0142-02

Fill fresh water tank (4) via cap (4.1).

Danger.

The kitchenette must be operated usingclean and potable water only. Fresh wa-ter for kitchenette requirements must berenewed every day. If the fresh water isstored in the water tank for a long peri-od of time, an additive (Micropur, mat.no. 0.971.407.000) in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions must bemixed with it.

Danger.


Note:

It is recommended that fresh water tank(4) be cleaned manually via caps (4.1)and (4.2) and/or that it be flushed thor-oughly with fresh water. The fresh waterlines should then also be flushed withfresh water by drawing cold/hot waterand switching on the coffee machine.

Note:


Note:

In new buses, the drinking watermay sometimes taste of plastic. Anadditive (Kunststoff-Frisch, mat. no.0.971.405.000) can be mixed in accord-ance with the manufacturer's instructionsto neutralise this aftertaste.

Note:




Filling the fresh water tank outside the bus

Filling the fresh water tank outsidethe bus

M86_00-0142-02


Release tensioning straps (4.4). Re-move fresh water tank (4).

Fill fresh water tank (4) with puredrinking water via cap (4.2). Closecap (4.2) firm and tight.

Fit fresh water tank (4) into the busand secure using tensioning straps(4.4).

Connect quick-release coupling (5) tofresh water tank (4).

Checking and cleaning the freshwater filter

M86_00-0143-01

Check fresh water filter (6) for clog-ging at regular intervals (dependingon the water quality) and clean it ifnecessary.

Note:

The fresh water filter is located betweenthe fresh water tank and the fresh waterpump.





Galley switched on


M86_00-0171-71

Press button (7) to draw cold waterfrom tap (8).

Cold water continues to flow whilebutton (7) is pressed.

Note:

Tap (8) can be pulled out by approxim-ately 20 cm.


Galley switched on


Danger.

There is a risk of scalding when usingthe sausage heater. Hot steam can rise,which may cause serious burns to theface, arms and hands. Keep at a safedistance, and remove hot sausages usingonly heat-resistant kitchen utensils.

Note:

The heating up time depends on theamount of water, the number of sausagesand the temperature of the water used tofill the boiler.




Note:

The sausage heater has a capacity of5 litres.

Note:


M86_00-0336-71

Insert overflow pipe (1) into the dis-charge hole, ensuring leak-tightness.

Danger.

Never use the sausage heater withoutwater.

Note:

Excess water may run out via overflowpipe (1).

Fill the sausage heater tank with ap-proximately 4 cm cold or hot water.

Add the sausages to the sausageheater tank and replace the lid onthe sausage heater tank.

Note:

When adding sausages, there is a risk ofhot water splashing and causing burnsto the face, arms and hands. Add thesausages to the water carefully and keepa safe distance.




M86_00-0337-71

Switch on the sausage heater usingbutton (17) on the control panel.

One of LEDs (17.2) flashes or lightsup.

Note:

Pressing button (17) again switches offthe sausage heater. LED (17.2) goes out.

Press button (17.1) repeatedly untilthe desired temperature is set.

Note:

It is possible to set a temperature of 40,60, 80 or 95 °C. LED (17.2) indicates theset temperature.

Note:

LED (17.2) flashes while the sausageheater is heating and lights up when theset temperature has been reached.

M86_00-0336-71

Remove the lid when the sausagesare heated.

Danger.

The sausage heater is hot and generatessteam - risk of scalding. Do not removeoverflow pipe (1) until the water in thetank has cooled sufficiently that there isno longer a risk of scalding.

Take out the sausages using tongsor a suitable, heat-resistant kitchenutensil.




M86_00-0336-71

The water in the sausage heater tankcan be drained as soon as the waterhas been allowed to cool down. Todo this, remove overflow pipe (1)from the discharge hole.


After use, clean the sausage heatertank, the lid and the overflow pipewith warm water and a commer-cially available washing up liquid.Use a soft sponge without a scour-er or similar abrasive product. Rinsewith clean water and wipe the saus-age heater tank dry to avoid scaling.Clean the overflow pipe with bottlecleaner at regular intervals.

Note:

Clean the sausage heater tank with acommercially available stainless steelcleaner at regular intervals.

Descaling the sausage heater

Fill the sausage heater tank 2 cmhigh with descaler.

Leave the descaler to work (observethe information issued by the manu-facturer).

Note:

For heavy scaling, it is possible to operatethe sausage heater containing descalerfor approximately 30 minutes at 80 °C.

Drain the boiler after the descaler re-action time and rinse well with cleanwater. Wipe the sausage heater tankdry.



Switching on the coffee machine

Switching on the coffee machine

Kitchenette switched on


Caution:

Running programs cannot be paused. Ifthere is a power failure, it will be neces-sary to restart the program. If the carafecontains coffee from a previous program,it must be drained first to avoid the riskof overflowing.

Caution:

To avoid the risk of overflowing, makesure that the carafe is empty before thebrewing process begins.

Note:

The coffee filter must equate to size1 x 6 (commercially available). Add theamount of coffee powder according totaste (e.g. 1 teaspoon per cup).

The coffee machine can be used tofill a vacuum carafe with a capa-city of 2 litres. This is sufficient topour 20 100 ml cups of coffee. It ispossible to brew 1/2 a carafe or 1carafe of coffee.

Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10cups of coffee)

M86_00-0173-71

Remove filter (11) from the filterholder. Insert filter paper and addas much coffee powder as required.

Note:

Judge the amount of coffee powder ac-cording to taste (e.g. 1 teaspoon percup).



Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups of coffee)

Slide filter (11) back into the filterholder.

Place an empty carafe (12) underfilter (11).

M86_00-0174-71





Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cupsof coffee)

M86_00-0173-71

Remove filter (11) from the filterholder. Insert filter paper and addas much coffee powder as required.

Note:

Judge the amount of coffee powder ac-cording to taste (e.g. 1 teaspoon percup).

Slide filter (11) back into the filterholder.

Place an empty carafe (12) underfilter (11).

M86_00-0175-71









Note:

How frequently the coffee machine shouldbe descaled depends on the water qual-ity but the coffee machine should be de-scaled immediately if performance de-teriorates or if the openings in the sprayhead (above the filter) begin to scale up.

M86_00-0142-02


Hold the hose in a container of de-scaler.

Note:

Use only descalers that are suitable fordomestic appliances. The descaler mustnot attack plastics and aluminium.

Operate the coffee machine with anamount of water sufficient to fill onecarafe.


Flush with fresh water. To do this,brew several carafes without coffee.

Note:




Dispensing cups of hot water (alternative to coffee machine)

Dispensing cups of hot water(alternative to coffee machine)

Note:

The kitchenette is also able to dispensecups of hot water as an alternative ifthere is no filter (11) in the filter hold-er. The electronics detect this conditionautomatically and dispense cups of hotwater when the button is pressed.

Caution:

There is a risk of scalding when dispens-ing hot water. There is a possibility of hotsteam rising, which could result in severescalding of the face, arms and hands. Donot dispense hot water unless it is safeto do so.

M86_00-0173-71

Remove filter (11) from the filterholder and remove vacuum carafe(12).

M86_00-0177-71

To ensure stability of the cups, fitcup holder supplied (15) into the fil-ter holder. Place cup dispenser sup-plied (16) with cups underneath.

Remove the cup from cup dispenser(16) and place it in cup holder (15)under the opening of the spray head.



Boiler (option)

M86_00-0176-71

To dispense hot water into a cup,press button (13) or (14) on the con-trol panel.

One press of button (13) or (14) dis-penses one cup of hot water.

Boiler (option)

Kitchenette switched on


Boiler filled

Caution:

There is a risk of overheating and thermaldamage if the boiler is operated with nowater. Never operate the boiler withoutwater. M86_00-0178-71

To make sure that the boiler containswater, press and hold hot water dis-pensing button (20) before startingthe engine until water flows out ofthe dispenser.

The boiler has been filled with waterand bled.



Setting the thermostat of the water heater

The boiler cannot be switched onunless the engine is started first.

Note:

The length of the heating phase is ap-proximately 5 minutes.

Remove the cup from cup dispenser(21) and place it under the waterdispenser.

Note:

It is possible to insert approximately 100cups into the cup dispenser from thefront.

To dispense hot water into a cup,press hot water dispensing button(20).

Caution:

Outflow of hot water - risk of scalding.

Hot water continues to flow whilehot water dispensing button (20) ispressed.

Setting the thermostat of the waterheater

M86_00-0179-71

To set the thermostat, remove cap(22) and turn the thermostat.

Note:

The boiler thermostat is located on theback of the water heater.

Note:

To set a lower temperature for the boiler,turn the thermostat anti-clockwise.

Note:

To set a higher temperature for the boiler,turn the thermostat clockwise.



Descaling the water heater boiler

Descaling the water heater boiler

M86_00-0142-02


Note:

How frequently the boiler should be de-scaled depends on the water quality butthe boiler should be descaled immediatelyif the heating time is noticeably longeror if the openings in the water dispenserbegin to scale up.

Hold the hose in a container of de-scaler (at least 2 litres).

Note:

Use only descalers that are suitable fordomestic appliances. The descaler mustnot attack plastics and aluminium. Ob-serve the information provided by themanufacturer.

M86_00-0178-71

Place a cup under the water dis-penser and press hot water dispens-ing button (20) until the boiler drawsat least 1.5 litres of water.

The boiler is filled with descaler. Ob-serve the manufacturer's instructionson how long to leave the descaler towork.



Winter operation

M86_00-0142-02


M86_00-0178-71

Flush the boiler with plenty of freshwater. To do this, fill the boiler withfresh water using hot water dispens-ing button (20) and drain it.

Note:


Winter operation

Galley switched on

Over winter, drain the fresh watertank, water lines, water heater boiler(option) and siphon.

Note:






M86_00-0142-02


Release both tensioning straps (4.4).

Remove fresh water tank (4) from thebus and open cap (4.1) to completelydrain the water.

Note:


Close cap (4.1) firm and tight. Fitfresh water tank (4) into the bus andsecure using tensioning straps (4.4).Connect quick-release coupling (5) tofresh water tank (4).

The fresh water tank is completelydrained.

Draining the water lines

M86_00-0305-71

To drain off the majority of the water,route hose (2) to the outside of thebus and open tap (1).

Note:

The tap is located in the luggage com-partment next to the fresh water tank orbelow the water pump.

To drain off the remaining water,force water through the cold waterline using the control panel and run itempty.



Draining the boiler

M86_00-0171-71

Press and hold button (7) until nomore water flows out of tap (8).

The water lines are completelydrained.

Draining the boiler

Caution:

There is a risk of overheating if the boil-er is operated with no water. Do notstart the engine while the boiler is beingdrained.

M86_00-0179-71

Pull out winter drain hose (23).

Note:

Winter drain hose (23) is located on theback of the boiler.



Draining the siphon

Position a heat-resistant container(minimum capacity of 2 litres) underthe end of the hose sealed with adrain plug (23.1).

Danger.

Hot water may flow out when the boiler isdrained. Do not allow your hands or armsto come into contact with the water.

Remove drain plug (23.1) and com-pletely drain the water from the boil-er into the container underneath.

Seal hose (23) with drain plug (23.1)and slide it back.

The boiler is completely drained.

Draining the siphon

Note:

The siphon is located under the washbas-in in the lavatory.

M86_00-0039-01

Dismantle siphon (14) of kitchenettewaste water drain at union nuts(14.1) and empty.

Fill the siphon with windscreen anti-freeze mat. no. A 001 986 45 71 11(down to -30 °C) and then reas-semble it.

Replacing fuses

Danger. Risk of fire.

Do not use fuses with a higher than spe-cified amperage.

The result would be damage to the elec-trical system or even a fire in the cables.

Always use fuses of the specified am-perage and never attempt to bridge orrewire fuses.

Fuses should be replaced only whenthe cause of malfunction has beenrectified.

Danger.

Do not replace fuses unless the powerhas been switched off.



Replacing fuses

Note:

This description is based on the stand-ard assignment of fuses in the bus. Bus-specific assignment may differ from busto bus. Not all fuse slots are necessar-ily occupied in every bus. Furthermore,fuses may occupy unassigned slots be-cause they are protecting special custom-er options or retrofitted equipment, forexample.

M68_00-0168-71

Switch off the kitchenette at masterswitch (18).

The LED goes out.


M54.00-2004-71

Switch battery isolating switch(01S01) to OFF.

Danger.

Do not switch the battery isolating switchto OFF if the LED is lit (OM 470) only.Otherwise, the exhaust gas aftertreatmentsystem could be damaged. Observe theinstruction label.



Replacing fuses

Danger.


M86_00-0180-71

Exchange the defective kitchenettefuse.

Note:

The fuses for the kitchenette are locatedon the back of the kitchenette behind themirror in the lavatory. The mirror can beremoved (screws, mirror bracket or Velcrofasteners).

30 - Water pump (10 A)

31 - Sausage heater (25 A)

32 - Electronics (5 A)

33 - Coffee machine (40 A)

M86_00-0181-71

Exchange the defective boiler fuse.

Note:

The fuses for the boiler are located underthe plastic cover. To remove the plasticcover, undo the two screws in the cuprecesses and the screw in the carafe re-cess. Lift the back of the plastic coverapproximately 5 cm and slide it forwardsto free the plastic cover from the pipe ofthe cup dispenser.

34 - Terminal 15 (5 A)

35 - D+ (engine) (5 A)

36 - Water pump (10 A)



Malfunctions

37 - Boiler (50 A) MalfunctionsThis section describes malfunctionsthat you can rectify yourself.

Using the sausage heater againafter a malfunction

M86_00-0337-71

The overheating protection istriggered if the sausage heater isoperated with no water. The red LEDin button (17.3) lights up.

Note:

Fill the sausage heater with water torectify the malfunction. Reactivate theoverheating protection by pressing button(17.3) on the control panel.



Using the coffee machine again after a malfunction

Using the coffee machine againafter a malfunction

A continuous tone indicates that thefresh water tank is empty.

Note:

Fill the fresh water tank. Press any but-ton on the control panel of the coffeemachine. The coffee machine resumesthe program from the point at which itwas interrupted.

Note:

If the kitchenette was switched off at themaster switch on the instrument panel,the current program is cleared and it isnecessary to restart the coffee machine.Empty the carafe and refill the filter.

M86_00-0182-71

Overheating protection triggered.

Note:

To reactivate the coffee machine, pressoverheating protection (38). Overheatingprotection (38) is accessible through anopening (arrowed) in the housing.

Coffee machine fills with water butdoes not brew.

Note:

To rectify the malfunction, press overheat-ing protection (38). Overheating protec-tion (38) is accessible through an opening(arrowed) in the housing.



Using the boiler (option) again after a malfunction

M86_00-0180-71

Note:

Or replace fuse (33).

Using the boiler (option) again aftera malfunction

M86_00-0181-71

The appliance does not dispense wa-ter.

Note:

Fill the fresh water tank with water. Orreplace fuse (36). Or have the waterpump exchanged by Customer Service.

M86_00-0179-71

The overheating protection istriggered if the boiler is operatedwith no water.

Note:

Fill the boiler with water to rectify themalfunction. Press button (24) to reactiv-ate the overheating protection.



Other malfunctions

Temperature of the water too low.

Note:

The heating time has not elapsed, it takesapproximately 5 minutes.

Inadequate flow of hot water.

Note:

Symptom of scaling, descale the boiler.

Heating time too long.

Note:

Symptom of scaling, descale the boiler.Or the overheating protection has beentriggered. Reactivate by pressing in but-ton (24).

Water flows out of the dispenserwhen the boiler is heating.

Note:

No malfunction, because water expandsduring the heating process.

Other malfunctionsThe kitchenette does not appear tobe working, the battery display re-mains dark.

Note:

The kitchenette undervoltage protectionhas been triggered. Start the engine andcharge the battery to rectify the fault.




M86_00-0180-71

Galley light does not switch on.

Note:

Either change the bulb (24 V/5 W) (prisethe left or right-hand lamp out of the kit-chenette) or replace fuse (32).

No water or irregular flow.

Note:

Fill the fresh water tank with water.Check the water supply connection.Check the filter for clogging. Or replacefuse (30). Or have the water pumpreplaced by the after-sales service.


Note:

All appliances must be switched off be-fore the galley can be switched off.

M86_00-0170-71

Switch off the galley light using but-ton (3) on the control panel.

The galley light LED goes out.




M86_00-0169-71

Fit cover (2) and use lock (2.1) tosecure.

The galley is locked away.

M68_00-0168-71


The LED in master switch (18) goesout.

The galley is switched off.



Lavatory

Table of contents

Enabling the lavatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Switchover between water (WC) and chemical (CC) operation (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Flushing the WC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Drawing water at the handwash basin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Filling the soap dispenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Adding paper hand towels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Adding toilet paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Opening the basin undercabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Changing waste bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Filling the fresh water storage tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Emptying the fresh water storage tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Emptying the solid waste container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358


Checking the residual current device for the 230 V socket (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Greasing the impeller of the CC pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361


Lavatory

Enabling the lavatory


M86_00-0027-01

To enable the lavatory, press switch(1) on the instrument panel with theignition starter switch ON.

Note:

The LED in the switch lights up andthe lavatory cabin lighting switches on.Option: The lavatory cabin door unlocksautomatically whenever switch (1) ispressed and locks again when the switchis switched off.

Note:

The extractor fan in the lavatory cabinoperates continuously while the engine isrunning.

M54_00-0978-01

Whenever the lavatory is locked fromthe inside, the extractor fans forthe holding tank and lavatory cabinswitch on and “WC occupied” symbol(2) appears in the passenger com-partment display.

M86.00-0428-717

Whenever the ignition starter switchis switched on, the smoke detectorin the WC is also primed. LED (1)lights up green.

Note:

If LED (1) lights up green, the smoke de-tector is operating normally. In the eventof slight contamination, LED (1) remainsgreen but flashes yellow every so often.Heavy contamination of the detector isindicated by the LED flashing green andyellow alternately. Have the smoke de-tector exchanged by an OMNIplus Service


Lavatory


Partner. In the event of a malfunction,LED (1) flashes yellow.

Danger.

Whenever smoke is detected, LED (1)lights up red and a red alert is displayedon the display screen in the driver's areain conjunction with this icon.

M86.00-0432-71

In an emergency, press red pushbut-ton (1) once.

M86.00-0433-71

A yellow alert appears on the displayscreen in the driver's area: WC toiletemergency call

Note:

This yellow alert is cleared if pushbutton(1) is pressed again.


Lavatory

Switchover between water (WC) and chemical (CC) operation (option)

M86_00-0028-01

Opening a mechanically locked door

Note:

If lock (2) on the lavatory cabin door hasbeen locked mechanically, it can be un-locked by means of a suitable coin or ascrewdriver.

Switchover between water (WC) andchemical (CC) operation (option)

Note:

With this equipment version, the lavatorycan be operated either as a water-flushedtoilet or as a chemical toilet.

Note:

If the lavatory is to be used as a chem-ical toilet, the holding tank must be filledwith a certain amount of sanitary chem-ical after each time it has been emptied.To do this, pour approximately 20 litresof water into the lavatory bowl. Then addthe sanitary chemical in the mixing ratiospecified.

Caution:

Whenever you enable the lavatory forchemical operation, check that the CCpump runs correctly (briefly press theflush button). If the pump fails to run,it will need to be greased. –refer to sec-tion: “Greasing the impeller of the CCpump”


Lavatory

Flushing the WC

M86_00-0273-71

Turn switch (1) to the left to switchover to chemical operation.

Note:

The switch is located behind the servicecover to the front of the centre right door(door 2).

The lavatory will now be flushed withthe sanitary chemical from the hold-ing tank.

Caution:

Dry running would cause damage to thechemical fluid pump (impeller pump). Forthis reason, always ensure that there is asufficient level of sanitary chemical fluidin the system.

Turn switch (1) back to the right toswitch back to water-flushing opera-tion.

The lavatory will then be flushed withwater from the fresh water tank.

Flushing the WC

M86_00-0029-01

The flushing process is triggered bypressing WC flush pushbutton (4).

Note:

The water pump is operated for approx-imately 5 seconds; at the same time, thegate valve to the solid waste container isopened.


Lavatory

Drawing water at the handwash basin

Drawing water at the handwashbasin

M86_00-0029-01

The water pump runs for approxim-ately 3 seconds when handwashbasin water supply pushbutton (5)is pressed and water flows from thetap.

Danger.

The water from the tap is not of drinkingwater quality.

Note:

The waste water reaches the solid wastecontainer via a system of hoses.

Filling the soap dispenser

Open the cover by raising it slightlyand pulling it towards you.

Note:

Remove the red cap from a new bottle.Place the new bottle in position with thewriting facing forwards and push it gentlyinto place. Pull the lever firmly to theright (closed position). Close the soapdispenser.


Lavatory

Adding paper hand towels

Adding paper hand towels

Open the cover by raising it slightlyand pulling it towards you.

Note:

Insert the towels as shown on the insideof the dispenser.

Adding toilet paper

M86_00-0032-01

Squeeze toilet paper holder (7) toremove and replace it.

Opening the basin undercabinet

M86_00-0033-01

Remove toilet paper holder (7), openlock (8) using the supplied squarespanner (8.1) and fold open the basinundercabinet.


Lavatory

Changing waste bags

Changing waste bags

M86_00-0034-01

Folding open the basin undercabinetmakes it possible to secure a wastebag to the bottom of the waste chuteby means of an elastic strap.

Note:

Waste chute (9) on the top of the wash-basin is for disposing of used paper tow-els.

Filling the fresh water storage tank

M86_00-0036-01

Open the right service cover to thefront of the centre right door. To fillthe fresh water storage tank, connecta supply line between coupling (10.1)and an external water supply andopen shut-off valve (10.2).

Danger.

Do not allow the filling process to contin-ue unsupervised. If the water fill pressureis too high or if the overflow is blockedby a foreign object, there is a risk of thetank expanding and damaging the overly-ing floor.

M86_00-0037-01

Ending the filling operation


Lavatory

Emptying the fresh water storage tank

Note:

Water escapes from overflow (11) underthe floor of the bus when the container iscompletely filled. Close the tap immedi-ately, remove the hose.

Danger.

Do not add antifreeze to the fresh waterstorage tank - risk of poisoning.

Emptying the fresh water storagetank

M86_00-0036-01

To empty the fresh water storagetank, take the filler hose from theholder and open shut-off valve (10.2)on the coupling (10.1). Let the waterrun out.

Note:

The fresh water storage tank must beemptied if the bus or the lavatory is toremain out of service for some time.

Danger.

Observe the notes on winter operation toprevent damage to water-carrying installa-tions during freezing weather conditions.


Lavatory

Emptying the solid waste container

Emptying the solid waste container

M86_00-0038-01

To empty the solid waste container,it is necessary to park the bus suchthat the solid waste drainage open-ing (12) is positioned over a suitablewaste collection point.

M86_00-0366-71

Turn compressed-air tap (1) in theservice cover on the right to thefront of the centre right door.

Note:

The drainage valve on the solid wastecontainer is opened.


Dispose of sewage in an environmentallyresponsible manner. Observe the rulesand regulations of the country concerned.


Lavatory

Winter operation

Winter operation

Note:

Empty the whole system if there is a riskof frost.

Empty the fresh water storage tank.

M86_00-0040-01

Disconnect the lines (15.1) to thepumps (15) and let them run empty.

Note:

Operate the pumps using the pushbuttons(3 or 4) until all of the water has run out.Reconnect the lines.

Empty the solid waste container.

M86_00-0039-01

Unscrew the siphon (odour trap) (14)in the basin undercabinet from thehandwash basin at the union nuts(14.1), empty and fill with antifreezemat. no. A 001 986 45 71 11. Re-assemble the siphon (14).


Lavatory

Checking the residual current device for the 230 V socket (option)

Checking the residual currentdevice for the 230 V socket (option)

Danger.

The residual current device must betested for correct operation monthlyto rule out the risk of endangeringpassengers as a consequence of a faultyelectrical system.

Open the basin undercabinet using asquare key. M86_00-0290-71

Press trip button (1).

M68_00-0183-71

The RCD must trip.

Note:

If the RCD does not trip, switch off the230 V system by operating electricalcircuits >100 V switch (1) and have thesystem checked by an OMNIplus ServicePartner.

Switch the RCD back on by pressingmake lever (2) back up.

Close the basin undercabinet again.


Lavatory

Greasing the impeller of the CC pump

Greasing the impeller of the CCpump

Note:

If the CC has been out of operation fora lengthy period, the impeller could seizeand the CC pump would fail.

Note:

If the CC has been out of operation fora lengthy period, e.g. after the summerseason during which only WC operationwas active, we recommend that the im-peller of the CC pump be greased beforeswitching from WC to CC operation.

M86_00-0355-71

Undo the securing screws (arrowed)and remove cover (1) downwards.

Danger.

Residues may be expelled from theCC pump as the cover is opened. Theresidues are caustic and must not beallowed to come into contact withskin, eyes or clothing. Rinse affectedareas immediately and thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical attention ifnecessary. Wear protective equipment(gloves, goggles, etc.).

Danger.

Observe the instructions issued by themanufacturer when handling sanitary flu-ids.

To make the seized impeller easierto move, coat the outer sides of im-peller (2) with approximately 5 - 10 gVaseline or multipurpose grease.

To distribute the grease evenly, turnimpeller (2) several times in the dir-ection of rotation.

Seal (3) should also be coated withgrease.

Resecure cover (1).



Practical adviceTable of contents

Overview of the operating, function and malfunction display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Engine oil level display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Oil level alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Oil level information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Checking the engine oil level with the dipstick (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Safety precautions for work carried out in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Removing the drive belts (OM 470) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Fitting the drive belts (OM 470) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Checking the coolant level of the engine and heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Tyres - operating safety and roadworthiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Tyre condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Tyre age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Invisible tyre damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Tyre load capacity, top speed of tyres and types of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393



Retreaded tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Tyre pressures table 295/80 R 22.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

On-screen tyre pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Safety measures to be taken in the event of a flat tyre or a wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Fitting snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Removing the spare wheel from the spare wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Removing the wheel nut cover or wheel trim (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Removing the wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Fitting the spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Fitting the wheel nut cover or wheel trim (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Inflating tyres using the tyre inflator connection (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Pneumatic system test ports under the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Pneumatic test ports behind door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Other pneumatic test ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Charging the compressed-air system of another bus (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417



Operating the bus stop brake/drive-off lock emergency release switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Operating/malfunction displays: steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Bleeding the fuel system using the electric fuel pump (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Replacing the water heater fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Electrical system safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

General safety precautions for batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Safety precautions for handling batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Measures required for the prevention of damage to buses or components during electric weldingwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Electrical system (illustration shows 15 RHD as an example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Battery isolating switch (with switch-off authorisation LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Driver's area interior switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Main switch panel (under the driver’s area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Auxiliary switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

PDB fuse switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Ceiling switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438



Electrical connection for the roof-mounted system (heating, ventilation, air-conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Battery compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Notes on fuse assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Fuse assignment for the driver's area interior switch panel, Tourismo RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Fuse assignment for the main switch panel (under the driver's area), Tourismo RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Fuse assignment for the auxiliary switch panel, Tourismo RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Fuse assignment for auxiliary switch panel with PDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Fuse assignment for the power distribution board (PDB), Tourismo RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Fuse assignment for the ceiling switch panel, Tourismo RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Fuse assignment for roof-mounted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Webasto) . . . . . . . . 462

Fuse assignment for roof-mounted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Konvekta) . . . . . . . . 464

Handling fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Disconnecting vehicle batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Recharging vehicle batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Notes on jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Jump-start procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469



Activation of on-board diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Interpreting the on-board diagnostics screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Clearing the fault memory of the selected system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Ending on-board diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Adjusting the headlamps for driving on the left or right (only in buses with bi-xenon headlamps) . . . . . . . 477

Emergency operation of the doors (depressurising the doors using the emergency valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Emergency unlocking of the luggage compartment flaps in the event of a compressed-air supply fail-ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

Removing the exterior mirror, fitting the emergency mirror (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

Emergency operation for heating in driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Emergency operation of the passenger-compartment heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Maintenance tasks for the air-conditioning system in the bus (filter maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Scopes of maintenance for the air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Cleaning the heating system water filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Bleeding the coolant circuit for the heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491


Practical adviceOverview of the operating, function and malfunction display screen

Overview of the operating, functionand malfunction display screen

M68_00-0216-71

Screen (1) is a status indicator that dis-plays operational, functional and mal-function information (icons). Additionally,it can be used to display on-board dia-gnostics information.

Note:

The following icons can be displayed onthe display screen:

Symbol Description

Alternator malfunction

Alternator 1 malfunction



Battery undervoltage

Battery overvoltage

Electrical malfunction

Symbol Description

FPS malfunction, entiresystem

FPS 1 malfunction

FPS 2 malfunction

FPS 3 malfunction

FPS 4 malfunction

FPS 5 malfunction

FPS 6 malfunction

FPS 7 malfunction



Symbol Description

FPS 8 malfunction

Power supply FPS 1

Power supply FPS 2

Power supply FPS 3

Power supply FPS 4

Power supply FPS 5

Power supply FPS 6

Power supply FPS 7

Symbol Description

Power supply FPS 8

Service instruction

Service overview

Engine control (MR) mal-function or failure

Immobiliser malfunction

Starter inhibitor active

Air cleaner service due

Engine torque reduction

Symbol Description

Drive control (FR) mal-function or failure

Particulate filter

Cruise control active

Variable speed limiteractive

Automatic speed limiterwarning message

Engine braking effect

Check

Transmission in neutral



Symbol Description

Reverse gear selected

Forwards gear selected

Automatic mode

Transmission 1st gear

Transmission 2nd gear

Transmission 3rd gear

Transmission 4th gear


Symbol Description




Clutch overloaded, footoff the accelerator pedal

Transmissioncompressed-air supply toolow

Transmission emergencyprogram

Transmission malfunction

Transmission oil temper-ature

Symbol Description

Retarder preselected

Retarder active

Retarder temperature toohigh

Pedal-activated continu-ous braking

Engine oil level too low

Engine oil pressure toolow or sensor failure

Oil replenishment

Engine oil temperaturetoo high



Symbol Description

Coolant level too low orsensor failure

Coolant temperature toohigh or sensor failure

Brake circuit 1 and/or 2pressure sensor malfunc-tion

Brake circuit 1 supplypressure too low

Brake circuit 2 supplypressure too low


Brake pad wear indicatorelectronics malfunction ornot available

Brake pad wear

Symbol Description

Parking brake supplypressure too low orsensor failure

Bus stop brake/drive-offlock active

Bus stop brake/drive-off lock malfunction oremergency release switchoperated

Brake pad wear sensor,front axle right-hand side(2-axle bus)

Brake pad wear sensor,driven axle right-handside (2-axle bus)

Brake pad wear sensor,front axle left-hand side(2-axle bus)

Brake pad wear sensor,driven axle left-hand side(2-axle bus)

Symbol Description

Brake pad wear sensor,front axle right-hand side(3-axle bus)

Brake pad wear sensor,driven axle right-handside (3-axle bus)

Brake pad wear sensor,trailing axle right-handside (3-axle bus)

Brake pad wear sensor,front axle left-hand side(3-axle bus)

Brake pad wear sensor,driven axle left-hand side(3-axle bus)

Brake pad wear sensor,trailing axle left-hand side(3-axle bus)

ABS/ASR system failureor malfunction



Symbol Description

ASR slip increase active

Brake system wheelspeed sensor malfunction

ABS trailer malfunction

Electronic Stability Pro-gram ESP (dynamic hand-ling control (FDR) or ac-celeration skid control(ASR)) active

Electronic Stability Pro-gram (ESP) deactivated

Electronic Stability Pro-gram (ESP) malfunction

Auxiliary consumerscompressed-air supplypressure too low orsensor failure

Symbol Description

Circuit 3 supply pressuredisplay

Compressed-air supply airintake filter dirty

Bus not at normal level

Bus above normal level

Bus below normal level

Trailing axle steering(RAS) system pressuretoo low

Steering hydraulics oillevel too low

Axle load transfer active

Symbol Description

Lubrication system

Main-beam headlamps

Dipped-beam headlamps

Side lamps

Trailer turn signals

Front foglamps

Rear foglamp

Lights general



Symbol Description

Lighting fault

Main-beam headlampsfaulty

Dipped-beam headlampsfaulty

Side lamps faulty

Trailer turn signals faulty

Front foglamps faulty

Rear foglamp faulty

Brake lamps

Symbol Description

Brake lamps faulty

Reversing lamp

Reversing lamp faulty

Windscreen heating

Driver's window demisterset to MAX

Mirror heating

Side window heating

Windscreen washer fluidlevel too low

Symbol Description

Emergency valve for door1 or door 2 operated

Emergency hammer re-moved

Ready to depart

Door 1 open

Door 1 malfunction

Door 2 open

Door 2 malfunction

Disabled passengers' liftextended



Symbol Description

Stop request

Ramp request

Pushchair request

Service call

Disabled passengers'space stop request

Driver’s area blower

Blower speed

Auxiliary heating unit pro-gram 1

Symbol Description



AC compressor in opera-tion

Air-conditioning system orreheat not available

Auxiliary heating switch-on duration

Auxiliary heating unit re-maining time

Comfort temperature set-ting

Passenger compartmentblower

Symbol Description

Interior temperature /malfunction message forheating/ventilation/air-conditioning (HVAC)

Passenger-compartmentsetpoint temperature

Temperature lockout(requested function notavailable)

“Smog” air-recirculationmode for driver’s areaand passenger compart-ment

Passenger compartmentheating/ventilation/air-conditioning off

Front roof hatch in air-inposition

Front roof hatch in air-outposition



Symbol Description

Front roof hatch fullyopen

Rear roof hatch in air-inposition

Rear roof hatch in air-outposition

Rear roof hatch fully open

Roof hatch emergencyunlocked (emergency exit)

Heating - ventilation inpassenger compartment

Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning (HVAC) aircleaner dirty

Auxiliary heating unitcombustion indicator

Symbol Description

Auxiliary heating unit notavailable

Malfunction, general

Ignition switch malfunc-tion

Belt warning

Fire message

Reserve fuel level

Fuel tank level sensormalfunction

AdBlue® reservoir levelbelow approximately 33 %

Symbol Description

Fuel filter dirty

Fuel heater

Fuel-oil supply level toolow

WC, toilet

Water tank level too low

WC solid waste containernearly full

Refrigerator open

Flap warning indicator foropen flap


Practical adviceEngine oil level display

Symbol Description

Central locking of theleft-side luggage compart-ment flaps

Central locking of theright-side luggage com-partment flaps

Unauthorised door lock

Prompt to browse for-ward using display controlpushbutton

Prompt to acknowledgeusing the Quit pushbutton

Engine oil level display

M68_00-0216-71

Information about the engine oil levelis always displayed on screen (1). Oillevel messages are displayed when theoil level exceeds or falls below certainthresholds for the first time, and inform-ation about the oil level can be called upmanually in a specific on-screen menu.

Note:

Oil level information cannot be called upunless the bus is stationary.

Caution:

There is a risk of engine damage if theoil level is too low or too high. Therefore,correct the oil level as soon as possible.

Note:

The oil level messages that may be dis-played and the oil level information towhich these relate are described in thefollowing sections.


Practical adviceOil level alerts

Oil level alerts

M54.00-2095-71

Oil level alerts are displayed to the driverdirectly by means of “Engine oil level”symbol (3) in conjunction with a red (1)or yellow (2) warning level malfunction.

Note:

To be able to acknowledge oil level alertsof the yellow warning level (2), the driverhas to press the “Display control” push-button or the “Quit” button below thescreen.

Note:

To be able to acknowledge oil level alertsof the red warning level (1), the driverhas to press the “Quit” button below thescreen with the parking brake applied.

Oil level alert

The driver may see the following oil levelalerts:

Engine oil level at service limit

M54.00-2096-71

“Service reminder” symbol (1) is dis-played if the engine oil level has reachedthe point where maintenance is required.

The “Serviceübersicht” (Service overview)menu displaying the current message (2)must now be called up using the “Dis-play control” pushbutton or the “Quit”button below the screen. To call up theoil level information, the “Betriebsanzei-gen Motor” (Engine operating displays)menu can be called up using the “Dis-play control” pushbutton (refer to “Oillevel information”).

Note:

Correct the oil level within the next 1,000km.

Note:

“Service reminder” symbol (1) may alsobe displayed as a maintenance indicat-or for other systems or assemblies andis displayed until the necessary mainten-ance work is carried out on the system orassembly concerned.


Practical adviceOil level alerts


M54.00-2097-71

If the engine oil level is too low, this isindicated by yellow warning level mes-sage (1) and “Engine oil level” icon (2).To be able to acknowledge this alert,the driver has to press the “Display con-trol” pushbutton or “Quit” button (3) be-low the screen. To call up the oil levelinformation, the “Betriebsanzeigen Mo-tor” (Engine operating displays) menucan now be called up using the “Displaycontrol” pushbutton (refer to “Oil levelinformation”).

Caution:

There is a risk of engine damage if the oillevel is too low. For this reason, correctthe oil level at the earliest opportunity.

Engine oil level too high

M54.00-2097-71

If the oil level is too high, this is indic-ated by yellow warning level message (1)and “Engine oil level” symbol (2). To beable to acknowledge this alert, the driverhas to press the “Display control” push-button or “Quit” button (3) below thescreen. To call up the oil level informa-tion, the “Betriebsanzeigen Motor” (En-

gine operating displays) menu can nowbe called up using the “Display control”pushbutton (refer to “Oil level informa-tion”).

Caution:

There is a risk of engine damage if the oillevel is too high. For this reason, correctthe oil level at the earliest opportunity.

Engine oil level critical

M54.00-2098-71

If the oil level is critical, this is indic-ated by red warning level message (1)and “Engine oil level” symbol (2). At the


Practical adviceOil level information

same time, a warning buzzer sounds. Tobe able to acknowledge this alert, thedriver has to press the “Quit” button be-low the screen with the parking brakeapplied. The oil level must be correctedimmediately. To call up the oil level in-formation, the “Betriebsanzeigen Motor”(Engine operating displays) menu canbe called up using the “Display control”pushbutton (refer to “Oil level informa-tion”).

Danger.

Risk of accident. Red warning level mal-function warnings (1) indicate that theoperating safety or roadworthiness of thebus is at risk. The driving and brakingcharacteristics of the bus may change.Stop immediately (traffic conditions per-mitting) and switch off the engine.

Oil level information

M68.00-0664-71

To call up the oil level information, the“Betriebsanzeigen Motor” (Engine oper-ating displays) menu must be called upusing “Display control” pushbutton (1)on the instrument panel. The oil levelinformation informs you whether the oillevel is correct or not.

Note:

The oil level cannot be measured unlessthe engine is switched off and the igni-tion starter switch is in the ON position.When the engine is switched on, the mostrecently recorded oil level value shown onthe screen remains frozen. The actual oillevel is not displayed again until the igni-tion starter switch has been switched toOFF and back to ON.

Caution:

The bus must be level when the oil levelis measured. If the oil level is measuredwith the bus on an incline, an incorrectoil level will be displayed on the screenand a yellow or red alert may appear onthe instrument panel.



Danger.

Risk of accident. Calling up informationmanually while the vehicle is in motionwill distract you from the road and trafficconditions. This could result in an acci-dent with serious or fatal injuries. There-fore: Do not call up information manuallyunless the bus is stationary and the park-ing brake is applied.

Oil level information

The following oil level information can bedisplayed:

Engine oil level OK

M54.00-2099-71

If the engine oil level is within the nor-mal range, this is indicated by the “En-gine oil level” symbol and OK.

Note:

If the oil level is OK, it is not possible tocall up any further oil level information.


M54.00-2100-71

If the engine oil level is too low, this isindicated by the “Engine oil level” sym-bol and the top-up amount in litres (4.5litres in this display example).

Note:

If the top-up amount required is not suf-ficient for a service or yellow alert to beshown, the oil level must be correctedwithin the next 2,000 km.



Caution:

If the top-up amount required is displayedby means of a service notification, thisamount should be added within the next1,000 km, or within the next 200 km inthe event of a yellow alert.

Danger.

If a critical engine oil level is displayed inconjunction with a red alert, the bus mustbe stopped immediately (traffic conditionspermitting) and the engine switched off,otherwise there is a risk of severe enginedamage.

Caution:


Engine oil level too high

M54.00-2101-71

If the engine oil level is too high, this isindicated by the “Engine oil level” symboland “> max”. In addition, yellow warninglevel indicator lamp (1) lights up.

Caution:

There is a risk of engine damage if the oillevel is too high. For this reason, correctthe oil level at the earliest opportunity.

Caution:


Engine oil level cannot bemeasured

M54.00-2102-71

If the oil level cannot be measured, e.g.due to a sensor fault, this is indicated bythe “Engine oil level” symbol and “- - - - -L”. This display will also appear if the oil


Practical adviceChecking the engine oil level with the dipstick (option)

level is called up while the vehicle is inmotion.

Caution:

Check the oil pressure with the enginerunning and visit the nearest Service Part-ner. Adopt a cautious driving style.

Checking the engine oil level withthe dipstick (option)

Note:

Park the bus on horizontal ground.

Danger.

Prevent the engine from being switchedon. Remove the key from the ignitionstarter switch. M01.00-0147-71

Pull out dipstick (1) with the engineswitched off and at normal operatingtemperature.

Note:

After you have switched off the engine,wait approximately 10 minutes to allowthe oil to collect in the oil sump.


Practical adviceSafety precautions for work carried out in the engine compartment

Note:

The oil level must be visible between theminimum and maximum markings.

At filler opening (2), add the top-up volume required in accordancewith the Specifications for ServiceProducts.

Note:

The engines have an electronic oil levelsensor that provides a definitive reading.

Note:

Top up by the amount required as shownon the display screen. Then run the en-gine for approximately 20 minutes (idlingspeed or vehicle in motion). The screendisplay is updated only after this time haselapsed.

Safety precautions for work carriedout in the engine compartment

Danger.

Never leave the engine running whenwork is being carried out in the enginecompartment.

Danger.

Prevent the engine from being switchedon without authorisation. Remove the keyfrom the ignition starter switch.

Danger.

If the engine is at operating temperature,leave it to cool down - risk of burns.

The replacement V-belts, spare parts andassembly tools required are not suppliedwith the bus as standard.

If the bus has broken down and it is ne-cessary to replace a drive belt but nosuitable gauge is available for checking

the tension of the new belt, drive thebus to the nearest OMNIplus ServicePartner as soon as possible and havethe belt tension and tightening torqueschecked.


Practical adviceRemoving the drive belts (OM 470)

Removing the drive belts (OM 470)

Danger.

Do not carry out work in the engine com-partment unless the engine has beenswitched off and the ignition key hasbeen removed. If the engine is at normaloperating temperature, give it sufficienttime to cool down: risk of burns.

Caution:

Replacement V-belts and some of thetools listed below are not supplied withthe bus as standard. Only the use ofOMNIplus original replacement V-beltsis permitted.

Removing the fan drive belt

M01_00-0132-71

Loosen lock nut (3.2) of adjustmentscrew (3.1) on the belt tensioner car-rier.

Unscrew adjustment screw (3.1).

Loosen screws (3.3) securing the beltpulley tensioning lever mounting.

Move tensioning lever mounting withbelt pulley to the stop against thecarrier and remove the drive belt.

Removing the drive belt for therefrigerant compressor

Note:

Required tools: 1/2” tommy bar.

M01_00-0134-71

Fit the 1/2” tommy bar into thesocket on tensioning pulley (2.1), pullthe tensioning pulley down in the dir-ection of the arrow using the tommybar and hold in place.

Remove the drive belt from the beltpulleys.


Practical adviceRemoving the drive belts (OM 470)

Removing the drive belt for theright-side alternator

M01.00-0139-71

Loosen lock nuts (5.2).

Loosen the screws at the alternatorhinge point and at the tensioningspindle.

Loosen tensioning screw (5.1) untilthe drive belt is lying loosely on thebelt pulleys.

Remove drive belt (5) from the beltpulleys.

Removing the drive belt for theleft-side alternator

M01.00-0153-71

Loosen lock nut (1.2) and loosenthe screws at the alternator hingepoint (1.5/1.6) and at the tensioningspindle.

Loosen clamp nut (1.1) until the drivebelt is lying loosely on the belt pul-leys.

Remove drive belt (1) from the beltpulleys.

Removing the drive belt for thewater pump and centre alternator

Note:

Required tools: 1/2” tommy bar.

M01_00-0135-71


Remove the drive belt from the beltpulleys.


Practical adviceFitting the drive belts (OM 470)

Fitting the drive belts (OM 470)

Danger.

Do not carry out work in the engine com-partment unless the engine has beenswitched off and the ignition key hasbeen removed. If the engine is at normaloperating temperature, give it sufficienttime to cool down: risk of burns.

Danger.

Do not use force (e.g. by using an as-sembly lever) to pull drive belts onto thebelt pulley edges during assembly. Doingso could result in hidden damage to thecord, which would considerably reducethe service life of the belt.

Fitting the drive belt to theleft-side alternator

M01.00-0153-71

Manually lay new drive belt (1) onthe belt pulleys for the alternator andair-conditioning compressor.

Caution:

Make sure that the belt profile is alignedwith the pulley profile.

Tighten tensioning nut (1.1) usingan open-ended spanner until therequired belt tension has beenachieved.

Note:

The drive belt tension must not be toohigh under any circumstances. It muststill be possible to twist the drive beltthrough at least 90° at measuring point(1.4) using two fingers.

Caution:

Visit your nearest OMNIplus Service Part-ner to have the drive belt tension adjus-ted correctly using a tension meter and tohave the screws tightened to the correcttorque.

Tighten lock nut (1.2) of the tension-ing spindle using an open-endedspanner. Tighten the screws at thealternator hinge point (1.5/1.6) andat the tensioning spindle.



Fitting the drive belt for the waterpump and centre alternator

M01_00-0135-71

Manually lay new drive belt (4) onthe belt pulleys for the crankshaftand on the idler pulley and belt pul-ley for water pump and alternator.

Fit the 1/2” tommy bar into thesocket on tensioning pulley (4.1),turn the tensioning pulley down inthe direction of the arrow using thetommy bar and hold in place.

Lay drive belt (4) on tensioning pulley(4.1).

Caution:


Note:

Tensioning pulley (4.1) is spring-loaded;the drive belt is therefore adjusted to thecorrect tension automatically.

Fitting the drive belt to theright-side alternator

M01.00-0139-71

Manually lay new drive belt (5) onthe belt pulleys for the right-side al-ternator and crankshaft.

Caution:


Tighten the tensioning screw untilthe required belt tension has beenachieved.



Caution:


Caution:

Visit your nearest OMNIplus Service Part-ner to have the drive belt tension adjus-ted correctly using a tension meter.

Tighten lock nuts (5.2) of the ten-sioning screw using an open-endedspanner. Tighten the screw at thealternator hinge point and at the ten-sioning spindle.

Fitting the refrigerant compressordrive belt

M01_00-0134-71

Manually lay new drive belt (2) onthe belt pulleys for the crankshaftand on the idler pulley and belt pul-ley for the refrigerant compressor.


Lay drive belt (2) on the tensioningpulley.

Caution:


Note:

Tensioning pulley (2.1) is spring-loaded;the drive belt is therefore adjusted to thecorrect tension automatically.


Practical adviceChecking the coolant level of the engine and heating system

Fitting the fan drive belt

M01_00-0132-71

Manually lay new drive belt (3) onthe belt pulleys for the crankshaftand fan drive.

Screw adjustment screw (3.1) in-to the carrier until it makes contactwith the tensioning lever mounting.

Caution:


Note:

Visit your nearest OMNIplus Service Part-ner to have the drive belt tension adjus-ted correctly using a tension meter.

Secure the position of adjustmentscrew (3.1) using lock nut (3.2)

Secure the tensioning lever mountingto the carrier using securing screws(3.3).

Checking the coolant level of theengine and heating system

M54.00-2108-71

Read off the coolant level

Danger.

Risk of scalding to skin and eyes fromhot coolant spraying out. Wear protectiveclothing (gloves/safety goggles). Do notopen the sealing cap on the coolant ex-pansion tank unless the coolant temper-ature is below 90 °C. Open the sealingcap slowly to relieve the excess pressure.Then turn the cap a little further and re-move it. Risk of poisoning if coolant isswallowed.


Practical adviceTyres - operating safety and roadworthiness

Note:

The coolant level must be between theupper and lower marks (minimum (1.1)and maximum (1.2)) at expansion tankinspection glass (1) when the engine iscold (below 50 °C).

Add coolant

Caution:

Do not top up unless the engine is cold.

Note:

Use clean water – well filtered and assoft as possible (drinking water quality) –mixed with corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze(comply with the Specifications for Ser-vice Products).

Note:

Only the use of a coolant specified on MBSpecifications for Service Products sheet325.5 or 326.5 (G40) is permitted. (Thecolour of the coolant is pink.)

Note:

For notes on bleeding the heating sys-tem coolant circuit, refer to the “Practicaladvice” section.

Tyres - operating safety androadworthiness

Tyres are particularly important for theoperating safety and roadworthiness ofthe bus.

Note:

The pressure, tread and condition of thetyres should therefore be checked on aregular basis.

Caution:

The use of wheel balancing agents, suchas balancing powder, beads or gel, is notpermitted as these may lead to undesir-able pulsations and/or vibrations.


Practical adviceTyre pressure

Tyre pressure

Check the specified tyre pressure regu-larly – at least once a week and beforelonger journeys – when the tyres arecold.

Danger.

Always observe the specified tyre pres-sures for your bus. The temperature andpressure of the tyres increase when thebus is in motion. For this reason, youshould never reduce the pressure of warmtyres. The tyre pressures would then betoo low once the tyres had cooled. If thetyre air pressure is too low, the tyre is li-able to burst, particularly with increasingnumbers of passengers/load and speed.This could result in you losing control ofyour bus and causing an accident, therebyinjuring yourself and other people.

Note:

If the tyre pressure is too low, this leadsto intensive heating of the tyres, in-creased tyre wear, changes in directionalstability and increased fuel consumption.

Note:

If the tyre pressure is too high, this res-ults in a longer braking distance, poorertyre grip and increased tyre wear.

Caution:

Caps on the tyre inflation valves pro-tect the valve inserts from moisture anddirt. The caps on the tyre inflation valvesshould therefore always be screwed ontightly.

Tyre tread

A minimum tyre tread depth is specifiedby law. Comply with the legal specifica-tions for the relevant country.

As the remaining tread depth reduces,the less effective the road grip and hand-ling characteristics of the bus become,particularly on wet or snowy roads.

In the interest of safety, have the tyresreplaced before the legally-specified min-imum tread depth is reached.

Danger.

Always ensure that there is sufficient tyretread. Insufficient tyre tread depth in-creases the risk of aquaplaning if the busis driven at high speed during heavy rainor in slush. The tyre tread can no longerdeflect the water away. This could res-ult in you losing control of your bus andcausing an accident, thereby injuring your-self and other people.


Practical adviceTyre condition

Tyre condition

Before setting off, check the tyres on thebus for:

external signs of damage

foreign objects in the tyre tread

foreign objects between twin tyres

cracks, bulges

Danger.

Please note that cracks, bulges or extern-al damage can cause a tyre to burst. Thiscould result in you losing control of thebus and causing an accident, thereby in-juring yourself and other people. Havedamaged tyres replaced with new onesimmediately.

Tyre age

Have the tyres changed at least everysix years, irrespective of wear. This alsoapplies for the spare wheel.

Danger.

The sun's rays and environmental factorscause tyres to age. The rubber fromwhich the tyre is made loses elasticity.Tyres harden and become brittle, cracksappear due to ageing. Tyres which aremore than six years old are no longer reli-able.

Invisible tyre damage

Avoid crushing tyres against the kerb orswitching off the bus when a part of thetyre tread is up on the kerb.

Danger.

Driving over the edge of the kerb orsharp edged objects can cause damageto the tyre substructure which is notvisible externally. Damage to the tyresubstructure only becomes noticeablemuch later and could cause the tyre toburst. This could result in you losingcontrol of your bus and causing anaccident, thereby injuring yourself andother people.


Practical adviceTyre load capacity, top speed of tyres and types of tyres

Tyre load capacity, top speed oftyres and types of tyres

Danger.

Exceeding the specified tyre load capa-city or the approved maximum tyre speedcould lead to tyre damage or tyre failure.You could then lose control of your busand cause an accident, which could res-ult in injury to yourself and others. Forthis reason, use only the tyre types andsizes approved for your bus model andobserve the required tyre load capacityand speed index for your bus. Pay par-ticular attention to country-specific tyreapproval regulations. These regulationsmay specify a particular type of tyre foryour bus or prohibit the use of particulartyre types that may be approved in othercountries. In addition, it may be advisableto use a specific type of tyre in certainregions or areas of use. You can obtaininformation on tyres from any OMNIplusService Partner.

Where twin tyres are fitted, the twintyres must have the same external dia-

meter, otherwise the tyre that has thelargest diameter will be overloaded. Tip:The simplest and most reliable measure-ment method is to check circumferencesusing a circumference tape.

Note:

The maximum tolerance for twin tyresis 0.5% of the tyre diameter. The largertyre must always be fitted in the outboardposition.

Retreaded tyres

It is advisable to use only tyres andwheels that EvoBus has tested and ap-proved specifically for your vehicle.


Practical adviceTyre pressures table 295/80 R 22.5

Tyre pressures table 295/80 R 22.5


Practical adviceOn-screen tyre pressure monitor

The numbers in the tableshow the respective axle loadin kg. The table's first linegives the tyre pressure that isto be set in bar.

* For Michelin tyres, also note:the tyre pressures at the frontaxle must be adjusted in ac-cordance with the table valueplus 1 bar, but to no morethan a maximum of 8.5 bar.

Note:

The tyre pressures tableshown here cannot be con-sidered complete and isprimarily provided for guid-ance only. The tyre catalogueof the manufacturer con-cerned is the decisive pointof reference for the precisetyre pressures to be set inaccordance with the currentaxle load.

On-screen tyre pressure monitor

The “Tyres” menu window is availablein buses equipped with electronic tyrepressure monitoring.

The tyre pressure monitor is a conveni-ence system designed to help you tocheck tyre pressures regularly and is-sues a warning if a tyre is overinflated orloses pressure.

Danger.

It is always your responsibility to ensurethat the tyres are inflated to the correctpressure.

Note:

Tyre pressure increases or decreases byapproximately 30 to 40 kPa (0.3 to 0.4bar, 4.4 to 5.8 psi) with every 10 °C in-crease or decrease in air temperature re-spectively. Bear this temperature-relatedchange in tyre pressure in mind if you arechecking tyre pressures indoors and thetemperature indoors is higher than thetemperature outdoors. Example: Room

temperature is approximately 20 °C. Out-side temperature is approximately 0 °C.In this case, the tyre pressure would be60 to 80 kPa (0.6 to 0.8 bar, 8.7 to 11.6psi) higher than the value specified in thetyre pressures table.

The tyre pressure monitor monitors thepressure in all tyres while the bus is sta-tionary and while the bus is in motion.

Note:

The warnings issued by the tyre pressuremonitor cannot be reliable unless thetyres have been inflated to the correctnominal pressure. The tyre pressure mon-itor would work with an incorrect valueif, for example, your vehicle were over-laden or laden incorrectly or if you wereto fit wheels with a different tyre size tothe vehicle and did not correct the nom-inal pressure in the on-board computeror entered an incorrect value. Refer tothe tyre pressures table to check that thenominal pressure has been set correctly.An underinflated tyre would lead to in-stability while the bus is in motion andtherefore an increased risk of accident.


Practical adviceSafety measures to be taken in the event of a flat tyre or a wheel change

Have the correct nominal pressure set inthe on-board computer at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Note:

If radio transmitting equipment (e.g. ra-dio headphones, two-way radios) is beingoperated inside the bus or nearby, thiscould interfere with the correct function-ing of the tyre pressure monitor. The dis-play screen in the instrument cluster dis-plays “- -” in place of the respective tyrepressure if a tyre pressure sensor is tem-porarily suffering interference, e.g. fromradio transmitting equipment, or if thetyre pressure sensor has not yet suppliedany values. Wait a few minutes and/ordrive the vehicle away from the area af-fected by the radio transmitting equip-ment. The tyre pressure values shownon the display screen may differ from thereadings obtained with an air pressuregauge. The tyre pressure displayed bythe on-board computer relate to sea level.At higher locations, air pressure gaugesdisplay a higher tyre pressure than thedisplay screen does. Do not reduce tyrepressure in this situation. The tyre pres-

sure monitor detects new wheels or newtyre pressure sensors automatically. Drivethe bus for a few minutes at a speed ofover approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

Safety measures to be taken inthe event of a flat tyre or a wheelchange

Danger.

Park the bus as far away as possible fromthe traffic and on firm ground. Switch onthe hazard warning lamps. Let all passen-gers disembark and move them out of thedanger zone (e.g. behind the crash barri-er). Position a warning triangle or hazardwarning light at a suitable distance. Ob-serve the legal requirements of the coun-try concerned.

Danger.

Only change the wheel on a level, firmand non-slip surface. The bus or jackmay slip out to the side on a soft or slip-pery surface (snow, ice, smooth surface,etc.).


Practical adviceFitting snow chains

Danger.

Never lie under the bus if it is raised upand is not supported by axle stands. Donot start the engine as there is a risk offatal injury. Safeguard the engine againstbeing switched on without authorisation.Remove the key from the ignition switch.

Fitting snow chains

Snow chains

Note:

Comply with the manufacturer's fittinginstructions and legal requirements.

Note:

Only RUD-MATIC MAXI chains are permit-ted.

Note:

Snow chains may be fitted more easily,especially on the rear axle, by raising thebus using the raising/lowering system.

Danger.

Make sure that the snow chains are fit-ted tightly. Do not exceed the permittedmaximum speed of 25 mph (40 km/h).

Note:

Check the snow chains for firm seatingafter you have driven a certain distance(dependent on prevailing conditions) andretighten them if necessary.


Practical adviceRemoving the spare wheel from the spare wheel cover

Removing the spare wheel from thespare wheel cover

M00_00-0084-01

Pull handle (1) at the entrance ofthe front right door to open the frontcover

Note:

The spare wheel is located behind thefront cover in the front end under thedriver's station

Note:

The openings below the spare wheelin the front compartment must not besealed or covered by objects as trouble-free operation of the heating, ventilationand air-conditioning system would nolonger be guaranteed.

The front cover opens forwardsgently

Note:

If the cover opens only a little, reach intothe gap and pull the cover open

M40_00-0072-01

Unhook retaining strap (4) from pos-ition (b) and hook back into position(a).

Note:

Hold the spare wheel cover as you dothis to avoid damage.

The spare wheel cover is now in thehorizontal position and it is possibleto pull the spare wheel out.


Practical advicePositioning the jack

Undo and remove the spare wheelretaining strap

M40_00-0072-01

Pull spare wheel (1) forwards overroller bar (3)

Positioning the jack

Observe the safety precautions.

Danger.

Follow the jack manufacturer's instruc-tions.

Danger.

Either a 10 t jack or a 5 t and a 10 tjack are on the bus depending upon thebus type. Use in accordance with inten-ded use.

Danger.

Secure the bus against rolling away (applythe parking brake). Also chock at leastone front wheel if there is a defectivewheel on the rear axle.

M00_00-0497-71

Positioning the jack

Danger.

The jacking points on the skeleton aremarked on the outside of the bus by ajack symbol. Make sure that you followthe instructions in the relevant section ofthis manual for positioning the jack whenchanging a wheel.


Practical adviceRemoving the wheel nut cover or wheel trim (option)

Danger.

In order to prevent damage to the skel-eton, jacks should be positioned at thedesignated jacking points only. If axlestands are not available, the good sparewheel or the defective wheel must be po-sitioned at a suitable position under thebody for the duration of the wheel fitting/removal procedure to provide protectionin case the jack should fail.

Removing the wheel nut cover orwheel trim (option)

Danger.

Risk of accident. Secure the bus againstrolling away. Switch off the ignition andremove the key. Risk of injury. Take par-ticular care around hot, rotating and mov-ing parts.

Removing the wheel nut cover

W40_20-0057-01

The wheel nut cover cap (1) isfastened to the wheel by two wheel

nuts. Slacken and remove these twowheel nuts.

Remove the wheel nut cover cap (1).

Removing the wheel trim (option)

M40_00-0007-01

Reach into ventilation openings (1.1)in wheel trim (1) with both hands.


Practical adviceRemoving the wheels

M40_00-0008-01

After you have reached into thewheel trim, firstly detach clampring (2) from retaining clip (3). Thisreduces the compression force onclamp ring (4) and the wheel trimcan be removed more easily.

Removing the wheels

Removing a front wheel

M40_00-0084-71

Place a ramp at the defective wheeland drive the bus onto it

Note:

If the ground is very slippery and hard,the ramp may slide out from under thewheel when the bus is driven onto it.Make sure you follow the instructions onthe ramp instruction plate.

M40_00-0023-01

Loosen the wheel nuts using thewheel nut wrench from the vehicletool kit.

Note:

Roller bar (3), over which the spare wheelis pulled from the spare wheel cover,can be used as an extension. It can bepulled out of the retaining bracket afterthe spring clip has been removed.



M40_00-0011-01

Place the telescopic jack (10 t) on alaminated wood base and jack up thebus at the control arm jacking point(arrowed)

Organisational resource

Telescopic jack (10 t)

Tools to be self-made

Laminated wood base

Note:

Extend the telescopic jack the maximumdistance so that there is a gap betweenthe wheel and the ramp

Danger.

If axle stands are not available, the sparewheel or the defective wheel must bepositioned at a suitable position under thebody for the duration of the tyre changeto provide protection in case the jackshould fail.

Remove the ramp

Unscrew and remove all wheel nutsapart from three offset to one anoth-er

Do not unscrew the last three wheelnuts until you have checked that thewheel is seated on the wheel boltswithout tension

Take off the defective wheel

Caution:

When you remove the wheel you mustmake sure that the wheel is not pulledover the threads on the wheel bolts. Thiswould damage the bolt threads and makeit difficult to screw on the wheel nuts. Inthe worst case the wheel nut could seizeon the damaged wheel bolt.

Removing a wheel from the drivenaxle

M40_00-0012-01

Place a ramp at the good wheel ofthe twin tyres and drive the bus ontoit



Note:


M40_00-0023-01


Note:


M40_00-0013-01

Place the telescopic jack (10 t) on alaminated wood base and jack up thebus at the jacking point (arrowed)



Tools to be self-made

Laminated wood base

Note:

Extend the telescopic jack the maximumdistance so that there is a gap betweenthe wheel and the ramp

Danger.


Remove the ramp


Do not unscrew the last three wheelnuts until you have checked that the



wheel is seated on the wheel boltswithout tension


Caution:


Removing a wheel from the trailingaxle

M40_00-0014-01

Drive the defective wheel onto ramp(1)

Note:


M40_00-0023-01


Note:




M40_00-0021-01

Firstly fully jack up the body with thetelescopic jack (10 t) (3) at the jack-ing point to the rear of the trailingaxle so that the trailing axle is notoverloaded.



Danger.


M40_00-0015-01

Then raise the trailing axle by theshock absorber mounting plate (2)using a screw-type jack (5 t) until thedefective wheel is relieved of load.



Danger.

The trailing axle must not be laden withthe weight of the bus.

Remove the ramp


Do not unscrew the last three wheelnuts until you have checked that thewheel is seated on the wheel boltswithout tension.


Caution:



Practical adviceFitting the spare wheel

Fitting the spare wheel

M40_00-0016-01

Caution:

Where necessary, remove rust and dirtfrom the contact surfaces on the wheel,wheel hub, centring lugs and wheel nuts.

Danger.

The thread of the wheel bolts and wheelnuts must be free of oil and grease. De-grease the thread if necessary.

Fit the spare wheel

Danger.

If the bus is equipped with pressed-steelwheels, the spare wheel to be fitted mustalso be a pressed-steel wheel. Similarly,an aluminium disc wheel must be fittedduring a wheel change if the bus isequipped with aluminium disc wheels.Light-alloy wheels and pressed-steelwheels require a different type of wheelnut.

Note:

Disc wheels (1) are centred by the cent-ring lugs on hub (2).

M40_00-0053-01

Fit the wheel nuts and screw themon into contact with the wheel.

Danger.

Note the different flat collar nuts. A:Wheel nuts for pressed-steel wheels (steelrims) do not have any marking, B: Wheelnuts for aluminium wheels (aluminiumrims) bear the inscription “VA FA” forsingle tyres, “HA RA” for twin tyres anda marking with 3 rings on the integralthrust washer (see illustration).


Practical adviceFitting the spare wheel

Danger.

Always select the correct nuts for thetype of wheel concerned.

M40_00-0061-01

For vehicles with light-alloy wheels(aluminium rims), slide the assemblysleeves (vehicle tool kit) over 2 op-posing wheel bolts to avoid damageduring removal and refitting.

Place the ramp back under thewheel, lower the bus and take thejack away.

Note:

If you do not push the ramp under thewheel, it will not be possible to removethe jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts in a crosswisepattern

Tightening torque

Wheel nuts: 600 Nm

Danger.

Tighten the wheel nuts using the availabletool and drive cautiously to the nearestOMNIplus Service Partner. Have thewheel nuts tightened to the specifiedtorque.

Danger.

If you use an impact wrench, tighten thewheel nuts only slightly in a crosswisepattern first and then tighten the nutsto the specified torque using a torquewrench.

Drive the bus off the ramp

Danger.

The wheel nuts must be retightened afterthe bus has covered 50 km.


Practical adviceFitting the wheel nut cover or wheel trim (option)

Fitting the wheel nut cover orwheel trim (option)

Danger.

Risk of accident. Secure the bus againstrolling away. Switch off the ignition andremove the key. Risk of injury. Take par-ticular care around hot, rotating and mov-ing parts.

Note:

Before fitting the wheel nut cover, cleanthe contact surfaces on the wheel nutcover, wheel and wheel nut of any rustand dirt.

W40_20-0057-01

Place wheel nut cover (1) over thewheel bolts.

Screw the wheel nuts onto the wheelbolts and move the wheel nut coverinto full contact with the wheel.

Tighten the wheel nuts to the spe-cified torque in a crosswise patternand in a number of passes.

Tightening torque

Wheel nuts for steel rims: 600 Nm

Tightening torque

Wheel nuts for aluminium rims: 600 Nm

Fitting the wheel trim (option)

M40_00-0008-01

Place the wheel trim on the clampring (4). When you do this youshould insert the retaining clip lugs(3) of the wheel trim into the clampring cut-out (4). Attach the lowerretaining clips and press on. Thenpress the wheel trim into the otherretaining clips.


Practical adviceInflating tyres using the tyre inflator connection (option)

Danger.

Make sure that the wheel trim is seatedcorrectly. All retaining clips (3) must befixed behind clamp ring (4).

M40_00-0008-01

Push in the last top retaining clipswith the clamp ring detached. Thisconsiderably reduces the amount offorce required and you also avoidthe possibility of damaging the wheeltrim. After you have fitted the wheeltrim, reach into the ventilation open-ings and hook clamp ring (2) intoretaining clip (3) again. The retain-

ing clips must not rest on a balanceweight.

Inflating tyres using the tyreinflator connection (option)

M40_00-0078-71

Remove protective cap (1) from tyreinflator connection (2)

Note:

When the engine is running, a pressureup to 12 bar (pressure regulator cutoffpressure) can be drawn off. Compressedair cannot be drawn off unless the pres-sure regulator is in the fill position. Ifthe pressure regulator has switched off(idle position - blows into the open air),the pressure must be reduced using the



pedal-operated brake valve until the pres-sure regulator switches on again.

Caution:

Since the pressure in the system may betoo high for inflating a tyre, the inflationprocedure should be monitored by ob-serving the compressed-air reservoir pres-sure operating display on the instrumentcluster screen.

Pump air out of the compressed-airsystem (using the pedal) until thereservoir pressure for circuits 1 and2 indicated by the reservoir pressureoperating display drops below 6.5 - 7bar.

M40_00-0020-01

Screw on valve connector (4), if notalready fitted, to the other end ofthe tyre inflation hose using the wingnut.

M40_00-0019-01

Screw tyre inflation hose (3) onto thetyre inflator connection to the stopusing the wing nut (3.1).

Note:

Position the hose so that the engine com-partment flap can be closed.

Unscrew the protective cap from thetyre valve and connect valve connect-or (4).

Close the engine compartment flap

Start the engine and fill the tyres upto the specified pressure (approx-



imately 8.5 bar), then switch off theengine.

Note:

Observe the operating display for reser-voir pressure circuits 1 and 2.

M40_00-0019-01

After you have finished pumping upthe tyres, unscrew tyre inflation hose(3) and seal the tyre inflator connec-tion with the rubber cap.

Danger.

Never drive the bus when the tyre infla-tion hose is connected.

Danger.

Pump up the tyres to the specified pres-sure at the next opportunity.


Practical advicePneumatic system test ports under the driver's area

Pneumatic system test ports underthe driver's area


Practical advicePneumatic system test ports under the driver's area

Pneumatic test ports (behindthe left-hand service coverunder the driver's area).

TP 1 Auxiliary consumers supplypressure

TP 2 Spring-actuated parking brakesupply pressure

TP 3 Front axle brake supply pres-sure

TP 4 Driven axle brake supply pres-sure

TP 5 Brake pressure regulated onthe left-hand side of the frontaxle

TP 6 Brake pressure regulated onthe right-hand side of the frontaxle

TP 7 Spring-actuated parking brakecontrol pressure

TP 8 Spring-actuated parking brakeemergency release controlpressure

TP 9 Driven axle brake pressure(redundancy)

TP 10 Not assigned

TP 11 Not assigned

TP 12 Suspension supply pressure


Practical advicePneumatic test ports behind door 2

Pneumatic test ports behind door 2


Practical advicePneumatic test ports behind door 2

Pneumatic test ports (behindthe right-hand luggage com-partment flap to the front ofthe driven axle).

TP 13 Brake pressure regulated onthe right-hand side of the driv-en axle

TP 14 Brake pressure regulated onthe right-hand side of the trail-ing axle (only on buses withthird axle)


Practical adviceOther pneumatic test ports

Other pneumatic test ports


Practical adviceCharging the compressed-air system of another bus (option)

TP 15 Brake pressure regulated onthe left-hand side of the driv-en axle (at the axle modulatorof the driven axle, port 21)

Door 2 Pneumatic test port

Note:

This test port is located onthe door valve in the step ofthe doorway of door 2.

Charging the compressed-airsystem of another bus (option)

Note:

Compressed air cannot be drawn off un-less the pressure regulator is in the fillposition.

If the pressure regulator has beendeactivated (idle position - blows intothe open air), reduce the pressure inthe compressed-air system by oper-ating the pedal-operated brake valveuntil the pressure regulator switcheson again (charge position).

M42_00-0104-01

Charging hose (1) can be used to fillthe compressed-air system of anoth-er bus via tyre inflator connection(4), which is located in the enginecompartment.

Danger.

The bus must not be driven under anycircumstances if the charging hose is stillconnected.


Practical adviceCharging the compressed-air system of another bus (option)

M42_00-0105-01

Filling via nipple connector

Note:

Optional equipment 1: compressed-airconnection via nipple connector (1/2”)(34) behind the front flap and in the en-gine compartment

M42_00-0326-01

Filling via coupling head

Note:

Optional equipment 2: compressed-airconnection via coupling head (1) behindthe front cover and in the engine com-partment.

Note:

The bus concerned can be filled or thecompressed-air system of a 2nd bus sup-plied with compressed air using an ad-apter hose suitable for the existing con-nections.

Caution:

Do not fill the compressed-air system ofthe 2nd bus beyond the cutoff pressureof the pressure regulator fitted to thisbus.


Practical adviceOperating the bus stop brake/drive-off lock emergency release switch (option)

Operating the bus stop brake/drive-off lock emergency releaseswitch (option)

Danger.

This switch has a tamper-evident seal andis intended to be operated only in theevent of a malfunction in the bus stopbrake or drive-off lock.

Danger.

Make absolutely sure that the parkingbrake is applied before you operate thebus stop brake emergency release switch.The bus could otherwise roll away.

Remove the tamper-evident seal fromthe emergency valve.

M42_00-0595-71

Fold open red cover (1) of the emer-gency valve.

Press the switch.

The bus stop brake/drive-off lockfunction is no longer active.

Note:

This symbol appears on the instrumentcluster display screen.

Danger.

Have the malfunction rectified as soon aspossible by an OMNIplus Service Partner.


Practical adviceOperating/malfunction displays: steering system

Operating/malfunction displays:steering system

Steering hydraulics oil level toolow (only on buses with electronicoil level detection)

If the oil level in the steering hydraulicsexpansion tank is too low, this icon willbe displayed on the screen in conjunc-tion with a yellow alert.

Danger.

Have the bus checked immediately by anOMNIplus Service Partner.

RAS system pressure too low(3-axle buses only)

A yellow alert together with this iconwill be displayed on the screen if thepressure in the additional RAS trailingaxle steering system is too low.

Danger.

Have the bus checked immediately byan OMNIplus Service Partner. Avoid re-versing. There is a risk of damage tothe trailing axle or suspension from thewheels turning uncontrollably. Drive care-fully and straight-ahead as the trailingaxle no longer has a stabilising effect.

Bleeding the fuel system using theelectric fuel pump (option)

M47_00-0121-71

The electric fuel pump can be usedto bleed the fuel system. Press but-ton (1) briefly to switch on the elec-tric fuel pump. The pump will switchoff after 85 seconds.

Start the engine and check the fuelsystem for any leaks that may still bepresent.


Practical adviceReplacing the water heater fuel filter

Replacing the water heater fuelfilter

Danger.

Risk of explosion from ignition of fuel,risk of poisoning from inhalation andswallowing of fuel as well as risk of in-jury if fuel comes into contact with skinand eyes.

M47_00-0052-01

Close the fuel feed shut-off valve(above the filter), if fitted.

Place a container underneath.

Note:

Make sure that the water heater cannotbe switched on.

Loosen and remove filter cartridge(1).


Dispose of the filter cartridge in an envir-onmentally responsible manner.

Lightly oil the sealing ring of newfilter cartridge (1).

Fill filter cartridge (1) with diesel fueland screw it back on.

Screw it on hard by hand.

Note:

Do not use any form of tool.

Switch on the water heater andcheck for leaks and correctoperation.

Electrical system safety precautions

M54.00-2004-71

For safety reasons, always switch off thebattery isolating switch (01S01) beforework is carried out on the electrical sys-tem or the batteries are disconnected/reconnected.

Do not connect or disconnect wiringharness connectors to/from electroniccontrol units unless the ignition starterswitch is OFF.

During engine washes, always protectthe starter, alternator and electrical plugconnections from moisture.

Never attempt to bridge or repair fuses.


Practical adviceGeneral safety precautions for batteries

Use only fuses of the specified amper-age. Never replace fuses with those of ahigher ampere rating as this could leadto damage to the electrical system.

General safety precautions forbatteries

Danger.

Risk of short circuit. Do not place anymetal objects on batteries.

Caution:

Do not loosen or disconnect the terminalswhen the engine is running and electricalequipment is switched on.


Dispose of defective batteries in an envir-onmentally responsible manner. Observelegal requirements.

Safety precautions for handlingbatteries

M54_10-0004-01

1 - Fire, sparks, naked flames andsmoking are forbidden. Prevent sparking.

2 - Risk of explosion.

3 - Observe the operating instructions.

4 - Risk of acid burns. Battery acid iscorrosive. Always observe the safety in-structions and safety precautions whenhandling batteries or battery acid. Bat-tery acid must never come into contactwith skin, eyes or clothing. Rinse off allacid splashes immediately with copious


Practical adviceMeasures required for the prevention of damage to buses or components during electric welding work

amounts of clean water. Seek medicalattention if necessary.

5 - Wear safety goggles.

6 - Keep children away.

Danger.

Naked flames and smoking are strictlyforbidden whenever work is being carriedout on the vehicle batteries. Avoid thecreation of sparks. Wear safety goggles.Keep children away. There is a risk ofacid burns. The Operating Instructionsmust be observed. There may be a riskof explosion.

Danger.

Only lead-acid batteries are permitted tobe fitted, never gel batteries. All cells ofthe batteries must be fitted with specialcaps that are interlinked by vent hoses,thereby allowing any gases produced tobe directed into the open air.

Measures required for the pre-vention of damage to buses orcomponents during electric weldingwork

To prevent damage to variouscomponents of the bus, the followingmeasures must be taken beforeundertaking welding work:

Have a fire extinguisher on standby.

The clip on the negative terminal ofthe battery must be disconnectedand the negative terminal covered.(Observe the notes on disconnectingthe vehicle batteries.)

The pieces of foam fitted in some ofthe cavities in the body as sound-proofing must be removed before thecommencement of panel work, weld-ing and tin-plating.

Connect the earth connection of theelectric welder directly to the partto be welded. When doing so, makesure that there are no electricallyinsulating parts between the earthconnection and the weld point.

Heat-sensitive parts, such as plastictubes, are to be protected or re-moved.

Lines routed in cavities, and contain-ers or electronic components thathave been fitted concealed, must beremoved from the danger area beforethe start of welding.

The passenger compartment andglazing must be covered with pro-tective mats to protect them fromweld splatter and flying sparks.

Shield off areas at risk of damagecaused by flying sparks and radiantheat.

Do not allow electronics housings orelectrical lines to come into contactwith the welding electrode or theearth connection of the welder.

If two parts are to be welded togeth-er, both parts must be connected tothe negative clip of the welder.

The seam points of the part on thebus to be welded and of the earthterminal on the electric welder mustbe as bare as possible – paint, cor-


Practical adviceMeasures required for the prevention of damage to buses or components during electric welding work

rosion, oil, grease and dirt shouldtherefore be thoroughly removed.

The earth terminal of the weldermust not be connected to the trans-mission. The welding current maycause sparking at the bearing pointsinside the transmission. The result-ant changes in crystalline structurewould lead to premature failure ofthe assembly.

Danger.

The heating effects may cause densesmoke or fires.


Practical advice


Practical adviceElectrical system (illustration shows 15 RHD as an example)

Electrical system (illustration shows15 RHD as an example)


Practical adviceElectrical system (illustration shows 15 RHD as an example)

01/C/D Driver's area interior switchpanel, diagnostics connec-tion, socket for download andself-healing, electrical systemvehicle data CD

Note:

A detailed layout of electricalcomponents (control units,fuses, relays and connectors,etc.) can be found on theelectrical system vehicle dataCD.

01S01 Battery isolating switch

Note:

On the 16 RHD (2-axle bus),the battery isolating switchis located on the auxiliaryswitch panel on the right-hand side above the drivenaxle when viewed in the dir-ection of travel.

02 Main switch panel (under thedriver’s area)

03 Auxiliary switch panel

Note:

On the 16/17 RHD (3-axlebus) on the right-hand sideat the rear above the trailingaxle.

06 Fuse switch panel (PDB)

Note:

On the 16 RHD (2-axle bus),the fuse switch panel (PDB)is located on the auxiliaryswitch panel on the right-hand side above the drivenaxle when viewed in the dir-ection of travel.

09 Ceiling switch panel

10 Battery compartment

Note:

On the 16 RHD (2-axle bus),the batteries are located tothe rear of the driven axleon the right-hand side whenviewed in the direction oftravel.

HVAC Electrical connection for theroof-mounted system (heating,ventilation, air-conditioning)


Practical adviceBattery isolating switch (with switch-off authorisation LED)

Battery isolating switch (withswitch-off authorisation LED)


Practical adviceBattery isolating switch (with switch-off authorisation LED)

01S01 Battery isolating switch

1 Switch-off authorisation LED

Caution:

If this LED is lit, it is prohib-ited to turn the battery isolat-ing switch to the “OFF” pos-ition. Otherwise, the exhaustgas aftertreatment systemcould be damaged.

Note:

Similarly, the battery isolatingswitch should not be turnedto the “OFF” position withthe anti-theft alarm system(option) primed as this wouldtrigger an alarm.

Note:

Battery isolating switch(01S01) is located in thebattery compartment.


Practical adviceDriver's area interior switch panel

Driver's area interior switch panel


Practical adviceDriver's area interior switch panel

C Socket for FPS downloadand self-healing (flexibly pro-grammed controller)

D Diagnostics socket

Note:

This switch panel also housesfuses for consumers in thefront section of the bus.

Note:

The cover of the driver's areacontrol panel also houses theelectrical system vehicle dataCD. This CD must remainin the bus since it containsimportant bus-specific datanecessary for maintenanceand service work.


Practical adviceMain switch panel (under the driver’s area)

Main switch panel (under thedriver’s area)


Practical adviceMain switch panel (under the driver’s area)

Note:

Various electronic controlunits such as the EBS, re-tarder, etc., are located here.Various fuses (1) are alsofound here.


Practical adviceAuxiliary switch panel

Auxiliary switch panel


Practical adviceAuxiliary switch panel

Note:

Auxiliary switch panel (1) alsohouses fuses for consumersin the rear section of the bus.The auxiliary switch panel islocated above the driven axleor the trailing axle on theright-hand side.


Practical advicePDB fuse switch panel

PDB fuse switch panel


Practical advicePDB fuse switch panel

Note:

The PDB (Power DistributionBoard) fuse switch panel (1)accommodates main fusesand various other fuses in-cluding those for the flexiblyprogrammed controller sys-tem. Fuse switch panel (1) islocated behind a cover in theluggage compartment to therear of the front axle on theleft-hand side when viewed inthe direction of travel.

Note:

On the 16 RHD (2-axle bus),the fuse switch panel is loc-ated on the auxiliary switchpanel on the right-hand sideabove the driven axle whenviewed in the direction oftravel.


Practical adviceCeiling switch panel

Ceiling switch panel


Practical adviceCeiling switch panel

Note:

There are also various fuseslocated on the ceiling switchpanel for consumer units inthe ceiling. This is located inthe ceiling duct on the frontleft.


Practical adviceElectrical connection for the roof-mounted system (heating, ventilation, air-conditioning)

Electrical connection for theroof-mounted system (heating,ventilation, air-conditioning)


Practical adviceElectrical connection for the roof-mounted system (heating, ventilation, air-conditioning)

Note:

The electrical connection forthe roof-mounted system islocated on the right-handside in the area above doorII or above the on-board kit-chenette. This area is onlyaccessible from the passengercompartment.

Note:

Various consumers of theroof-mounted system, such asthe condenser blowers, pas-senger compartment blowers,etc., are protected by thefuses here (2).


Practical adviceBattery compartment

Battery compartment


Practical adviceNotes on fuse assignments

Note:

The battery compartment isfound at the front on the leftabove the front axle.

Note:

On the 16 RHD (2-axle bus),the batteries are located tothe rear of the driven axleon the right-hand side whenviewed in the direction oftravel.

Notes on fuse assignments

The following information in respect offuse assignments should be observed:

Note:

This description is based on the standardassignment of fuses in the bus. Bus-spe-cific assignment may differ from bus tobus. Not all fuse slots necessarily haveto be assigned on every bus. Further-more, fuses may occupy unassigned slotsbecause they are protecting special cus-tomer options or retrofitted equipment,for example.

Note:

The bus-specific fuse assignment and fuseratings can be found on the vehicle dataCD located in the driver's area interiorswitch panel.


Practical adviceFuse assignment for the driver's area interior switch panel, Tourismo RHD

Fuse assignment for the driver'sarea interior switch panel, TourismoRHD


Practical adviceFuse assignment for the driver's area interior switch panel, Tourismo RHD

F1 7.5 A - Co-driver's readinglamp (31F01)

F2 7.5 A - Mirror adjustment(32F05)

F2a 15 A - Front coldbox (80F06)

F3 7.5 A - Radio (audio) system(70F01)

F4 7.5 A - Lavatory inverter(80F34)

F5 7.5 A - Power supply switch(61F01)

F6 15 A - Driver's seat (81F01)

F7 7.5 A - Intercom (72F18)

F8 7.5 A - Download/diagnostics(05F01)

F9 7.5 A - Charge line 2 battery(02F28)

F10 7.5 A - C3 signal I-module/satellite (60F01)

F11 15 A - Video monitor 1-4(70F03)

F12 15 A - 24 V socket (02F07)

F13 7.5 A - Mirror adjuster(32F05)

F14 15 A - Front box (50F02)

F15 7.5 A - Transmission (13F06)

F16 3 A - Recording system, gen-eral (65F07)

F17 15 A - Throttle valve (17F08)

Note:

(2-axle buses only)

F18 7.5 A - Accident data record-er (60F06)

F19 15 A - Driver's power window(32F09)

F20 7.5 A - Driver's seat vibrationmotor supply (81F06)

F21 7.5 A - Distance sensor(10F28)

F22 7.5 A - Door 1 doorway light-ing (41F04)

F23 3 A - Attendant call system(83F01)

F24 15 A - Driver's window heat-ing (32F07)

F25 7.5 A - Throttle valve (17F09)

F26 7.5 A - Co-driver's roller sun-blind (32F11)

F27 7.5 A - Telephone, radio(communications) (72F09)

F28 25 A - Wiper (33F02)

F29 3 A - Recording system, gen-eral (65F06)

F30 15 A - Heating for fuel filter(15F34)

F31 7.5 A - Door 1 door control(41F06)

F32 7.5 A - Accident data record-er (60F05)

F33 15 A - 24 V socket (02F07)

F34 15 A - 24 V/12 V voltageconverter (01F18)

F35 15 A - 12 V socket (02F08)

F36 7.5 A - Engine warning/malfunction indicator lamp(10F39)

F37 15 A - Intercom system(70F20)

F38 15 A - Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning HVAC (50F01)

F39 3 A - Tyre pressure monitor

F40 7.5 A - Navigation computer(76F06)

F41 7.5 A - Driver's seat (81F02)

F42 7.5 A - Download/diagnosticssocket (05F02)


Practical adviceFuse assignment for the main switch panel (under the driver's area), Tourismo RHD

Fuse assignment for the mainswitch panel (under the driver'sarea), Tourismo RHD


Practical adviceFuse assignment for the main switch panel (under the driver's area), Tourismo RHD

Fuse block A

F1 15 A - 12-volt sockets (02F08)

F2 7.5 A - Video monitoring sys-tem (70F06)

F3 7.5 A - Parking aid (70F07)

F4 7.5 A - Navigation computer(76F04)

F5 7.5 A - Radio (communica-tions) (72F03)

F6 7.5 A - Telephone/radio(72F09)

F7 15 A - 12 V cigarette lighter(02F15)

F8 7.5 A - 12 V video system(70F10)

F9 Not assigned

F10 Not assigned

F11 1 A - Brake circuit pressuresensors (20F11)

F12 Not assigned

F13 7.5 A - Radio (communica-tions) (72F02)

F14 7.5 A - 12 V Travel Pilot(76F02)


Practical adviceFuse assignment for the auxiliary switch panel, Tourismo RHD

Fuse assignment for the auxiliaryswitch panel, Tourismo RHD



F1 7.5 A - Automated manualtransmission (12F03)

F2 15 A - Coldbox (80F04)

F3 7.5 A - Lavatory (80F24)

F4 15 A - Lavatory inverter(80F26)

F5 7.5 A - Driver's rest area(81F04)


F7 15 A - Lavatory terminal 15(80F11)

F8 15 A - Coldbox, kitchenette(80F08)

F9 Not assigned

F10 7.5 A - On-board kitchenettewater pump (80F23)

F11 7.5 A - Retarder RET terminal15 (14F02)

F12 7.5 A - Driver's day-bed inmulti-purpose room (81F05)

F13 Not assigned

F14 Not assigned

F15 7.5 A - Flexibly programmedcontroller (FPS) terminal 15(04F17)

F16 10 A - Automatic engine oilreplenishment (15F02)


F18 10 A - SCR exhaust gas after-treatment supply line (17F01)

F19 7.5 A - Trailer anti-lock brak-ing system (ABS) (20F07)

F20 7.5 A - Compressed-air supply(24F01)

F21 7.5 A - Blower motor, entry 2(53F10)

F22 7.5 A - D+ (01F04)

F23 5 A - Trailing axle NLA RAS-EC (22F06)

Note:

3-axle buses

F24 7.5 A - Smoke detection sys-tem (64F12)

F25 Not assigned

F26 Not assigned

F27 7.5 A - Door 2 doorway light-ing (42F02)

F28 7.5 A - Door 2 door-controllersupply (42F04)

F29 15 A - Socket for auxiliaryswitch panel/engine compart-ment lighting (02F01)

F30 7.5 A - Engine compartmentand lighting socket (02F04)

F31 20 A - SCR exhaust gas after-treatment supply line (17F02)

F32 15 A - AdBlue line heatingresistor (17F03)

F33 25 A - Trailer anti-lock brak-ing system (ABS) (20F08)

F34 7.5 A - Door 2 door-controllersupply (42F05)

F35 15 A - Heater for heating-oilfilter (54F05)

F36 7.5 A - Substation 1 (51F30)


F38 7.5 A - Sidewall heater 1(53F01)

Note:

(on Travego)




Note:

(on Travego)



F42 15 A - Roof mixing circuitpump (53F16)

F43 155 A - Automated manu-al transmission GO 240-8(12F04)

F43 7.5 A - Automated manu-al transmission AS Tronic(12F04)

F44 15 A - Automated manu-al transmission GO 240-8(12F05)

44 7.5 A - Automated manu-al transmission AS Tronic(12F05)

F45 7.5 A - Fuel level sensor(65F08)

Note:

(3-axle buses only)

F46 15 A - Lavatory (winter-proof)(80F10)

F47 7.5 A - Starter control relay(10F38)

F48 1 A - Tank data recorder(65F04)

Note:

(on CC400)

F49 5 A - Trailing axle NLA RAS-EC (22F05)

Note:

3-axle buses

F50 7.5 A - Retarder RET (14F3)

F51 Not assigned

F52 Not assigned

F53 Not assigned

F54 Not assigned

F55 Not assigned

F56 Not assigned


Practical advice


Practical adviceFuse assignment for auxiliary switch panel with PDB

Fuse assignment for auxiliaryswitch panel with PDB



F1 Not assigned

F2 15 A - Automated manualtransmission terminal 30 withnew AMT (12F04)

F2 7.5 A - Automated manualtransmission terminal 30 withAS Tronic (12F04)

F3 15 A - Automated manualtransmission terminal 30 withnew AMT (12F05)

F3 7.5 A - Automated manualtransmission terminal 30 withAS Tronic (13F04)

F3 15 A - Transmission terminal30 (13F04)

F4 15 A - Inverter in lavatory(80F26)

F5 7.5 A - Driver's rest area(81F04)


F7 15 A - Lavatory terminal 15(80F11)

F8 7.5 A - Retarder terminal 30(14F03)

F9 7.5 A - Driver's day-bed inmulti-purpose room (81F05)

F10 25 A - Fuel pump (15F15)

F11 10 A - Automatic engine oilreplenishment (15F02)

F12 7.5 A Lavatory terminal 15(80F24)

F13 7.5 A - Smoke detection sys-tem (64F12)

F14 7.5 A - Fire detection sys-tem/fire extinguishing system(64F13)

F15 7.5 A - FPS terminal 15(04F17)

F16 3 A - Fuel pump switch(15F16)


F18 Not assigned

F19 Not assigned

F20 7.5 A - Compressed-air supply(14F01)

F21 7.5 A - Water pump for kit-chenette (80F23)

F22 Not assigned

F23 5 A - Trailing axle RAS-ECterminal 15 (22F06)

F24 15 A - Coldbox (80F04)

F25 7.5 A - Driver's day-bed /multi-purpose room (81F05)

F26 Not assigned

F27 7.5 A - Doorway 2 lighting(42F02)

F28 7.5 A - Door 2 door controlterminal 15 (42F04)

F29 7.5 A - Door 2 blower motor(53F10)

F30 7.5 A - Engine compartmentand lighting socket (02F04)

F31 15 A - Coldbox, kitchenette(80F08)

F32 7.5 A - Alternator voltagesensing terminal 30 (01F20)

F33 5 A - Trailing axle terminal 30(22F05)

F34 7.5 A - Door 2 door controlterminal 30 (42F05)

F35 15 A - Heater for heating-oilfilter (54F05)

F36 7.5 A - Trailer ABS terminal15 (20F07)


F38 7.5 A - Substation 0 (51F35




F40 Not assigned

F41 25 A - Trailer ABS terminal 30(20F08)

F42 15 A - Roof mixing circuitpump (53F16)

F43 Not assigned

F44 Not assigned

F45 Not assigned

F46 Not assigned

F47 3 A - LIN/CAN gateway2 control unit terminal 15(01F71)

F48 3 A - LIN/CAN gateway2 control unit terminal 30(01F72)

F49 15 A - CAN gateway terminal15 (10F64)

F50 Not assigned

F51 Not assigned

F52 Not assigned

F53 Not assigned

F54 Not assigned

F55 Not assigned

F56 Not assigned

F57 7.5 A - FPS 1 (04F09)

F58 7.5 A - FPS 2 (04F10)

F59 7.5 A - FPS 3 (04F11)

F60 7.5 A - FPS 4 (04F12)

F61 7.5 A - FPS 5 (04F13)

F62 Not assigned

F63 7.5 A - Tachograph/instru-ment node (60F03)

F64 15 A - Lighting strip (31F05)tourist coach ceiling

F64 7.5 A - Lighting strip (31F05)public service bus ceiling

F65 15 A - Lighting strip (31F06)tourist coach ceiling

F65 7.5 A - Lighting strip (31F06)public service bus ceiling

F66 25 A - Auxiliary heating(54F01)


F68 15 A - Central locking(82F01)

F69 7.5 A - Horn (for buses withNorwegian emergency switch-off) (33F01)

F70 15 A - Master safety switch(03F01)


Practical advice


Practical adviceFuse assignment for the power distribution board (PDB), Tourismo RHD

Fuse assignment for the powerdistribution board (PDB), TourismoRHD



F1 15 A - Lighting strip (31F05)

F2 15 A - Lighting strip (31F06)

F3 15 A - Central locking(82F01)

F4 Not assigned



F7 Not assigned

F8 Not assigned

F9 7.5 A - Flexibly programmedcontroller (FPS 1) (04F09)



F12 5 A - Flexibly programmedcontroller (FPS 4) (04F12)


F14 Not assigned

F15 Not assigned

F16 7.5 A - Alternator voltagesensor (01F20)

F17 Not assigned

F18 5 A - Starter battery (01F12)

F19 5 A - Modular switch panelMSF (61F02)

F20 5 A - Central gateway CGW(05F03)

F21 5 A - Electronic ignitionswitch EIS terminal 30 (08F0)

F22 5 A - Tachograph (60F07)

F23 15 A - Master safety switch(03F01)

F24 7.5 A - Tachograph/instru-ment node (60F03)




F28 Not assigned

F29 70 A - Kitchenette (80F01)

F30 50 A - Kitchenette (80F02)

F31 70 A - Microwave/boiler(80F03)

F32 50 A - Integrated electron-ics systems IES terminal 30(01F05)

F33 Not assigned

F34 50 A - Control units terminal30 (08F05)

F35 Not assigned

F36 Not assigned



F39 Not assigned

F40 Not assigned

F41 150 A - Inverter (01F47)

F42 80 A - Terminal 15 (01F17)

F43 50 A - Main fuse terminal 15(01F02)

F44 150 A - Air-conditioning sys-tem (51F01)

F45 80 A - Mobility lift power sup-ply (46F02)

F46 Not assigned

F47 150 A - Grid heater controlunit (10F41)




F48 30 A - Engine managementMCM main fuse (01F51)


F51 30 A - Exhaust gas aftertreat-ment control module ACMterminal 30 (17F11)


Practical advice


Practical adviceFuse assignment for the ceiling switch panel, Tourismo RHD

Fuse assignment for the ceilingswitch panel, Tourismo RHD


Practical adviceFuse assignment for the ceiling switch panel, Tourismo RHD

Fuse block A

F1 5 A - Rain sensor for roofhatch (52F04)

F2 7.5 A - Travel Pilot (76F01)

F3 30 A - Destination display, left(71F06)

F4 7.5 A - Clock, terminal 30(65F01)

F5 7.5 A - Destination system(71F01)

F6 15 A - Reading lamps (31F04)

F7 7.5 A - Video system (70F40)

F8 7.5 A - Clock, terminal 15(65F02)


F10 7.5 A - 12 V power supply(01F16)


F12 5 A - Roof hatch (52F01)

F13 5 A - Roller sunblind (32F16)

F14 15 A - Reading lamps (31F03)


Practical adviceFuse assignment for roof-mounted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Webasto)

Fuse assignment for roof-moun-ted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Webasto)


Practical adviceFuse assignment for roof-mounted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Webasto)

51F03 15 A - Fuse for evaporatorblower, left



51F06 15 A - Fuse for evaporatorblower, right



51F09 20 A - Fuse for condenserblower

51F10 20 A - Fuse for condenserblower

Note:

All fuses in the roof-moun-ted heating, ventilation andair-conditioning system areaccessible from the vehicleinterior.

Note:

Bus-specific fuse assignmentand rating for the roof-moun-ted heating, ventilation andair-conditioning system aredescribed on the label next tothe fuses.


Practical adviceFuse assignment for roof-mounted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Konvekta)

Fuse assignment for roof-moun-ted heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system (Konvekta)


Practical adviceHandling fuses

F1 15 A - Roof-mounted systemblower speed-module fuse(51F03)








F9 25 A - Condenser blowerspeed module fuse (51F09)



F12 Not assigned

F13 Not assigned

F14 Not assigned

F15 7.5 A - Refrigerant line shut-off valve fuse

F16 Not assigned

Note:

All fuses in the roof-moun-ted heating, ventilation andair-conditioning system areaccessible from the vehicleinterior.

Note:

Bus-specific fuse assignmentand rating for the roof-moun-ted heating, ventilation andair-conditioning system aredescribed on the label next tothe fuses.

Handling fuses

Always carry some extra fuses in thebus for emergencies.

Caution:

Fuses provide protection against excess-ive current loads (impermissible heating ofthe wires) in the electrical system.

Note:

There are fuses located on the driver’sarea interior switch panel (01), on theswitch panel under the driver’s area (02),on the auxiliary switch panel (03) and onthe ceiling switch panel (09), as well as inthe roof-mounted heating, ventilation andair-conditioning system in the ceiling ductabove the WC and on fuse switch panel(PDB) (06).


Practical adviceDisconnecting vehicle batteries

M54_00-1058-71

These notes must be observedwithout fail.

Danger.

Make sure that you correct the causeof the short circuit before you change ablown fuse. Check that the connectionshave a good contact.

Danger.

Never bridge or repair fuses.

Danger.

Only use fuses of the specified amper-age. Never replace fuses with those of ahigher ampere rating as this could lead todamage to the electrical system.

Danger.

Always switch off the battery isolatingswitch (01S01) before work is carried outon the electrical system.

Disconnecting vehicle batteries


M54_00-1058-71

Switch off the battery isolating switch(01S01).

Danger.

There is a risk of explosion from the ig-nition of oxyhydrogen gas by separationsparks while the batteries are being dis-connected. To rule out this risk of injury,there is a battery isolating switch (01S01)that bears an appropriate warning label tothis effect.


Practical adviceDisconnecting vehicle batteries

Danger.

Switch the battery isolating switch to theOFF position (key can be removed) beforeworking on parts of the vehicle electric-al system, especially the batteries. Thebattery isolating switch interrupts themain line from the positive terminal ofthe battery to the entire vehicle electric-al system; for this reason, it must not beswitched off until the ignition switch hasbeen switched off and the water heater'srun-on period has ended (risk of overheat-ing).

Danger.

Only lead-acid batteries are permitted tobe fitted, never gel batteries. All cells ofthe batteries must be fitted with specialcaps that are interlinked by vent hoses,thereby allowing any gases produced tobe directed into the open air.

M54_00-0904-01

Remove the negative terminal clampfrom the battery.

Remove the positive terminal clampfrom the battery.

Reconnect the batteries in reverseorder.

M54_00-0839-01

Push the battery carriage back in asfar as the stop until pins (2) with ahole in the side are revealed, andthen secure using two split pins (1)on the left- and right-hand side.

Danger.

Securing split pins (1) for the battery car-riage must always be fitted on both theleft- and right-hand side to prevent thebatteries from working their way out whilethe bus is in motion.


Practical adviceRecharging vehicle batteries

Recharging vehicle batteries

Note:

Recharge out-of-service batteries once amonth.

Connect the charger.

Danger.

Risk of explosion from oxyhydrogen gasformation. Make sure that the area iswell ventilated when you are rechargingthe vehicle batteries.

Note:

Check that the charging voltage (24 or12 V) and charging current (approximately1/10 of the rated capacity, e.g. 200 Ahbattery with 20 A charging current) arecorrect.

Switch off the charger after charginghas finished.

Danger.

Do not disconnect the connection termin-als until the gases have stopped escapingfrom the battery (wait a few minutes).

Notes on jump-starting

Follow the instructions for the jump-start procedure.

Caution:

Before you connect the jump leads, checkthat the operating voltage (24 V) and po-larity are the same.

Caution:

Only jump leads (cable cross-section ap-proximately 70 mm²) are permitted to beused as a starting aid – never use a rapidcharger. Comply with the safety regula-tions.

Caution:

Use only jump leads that have insulatedterminal clips.


Practical adviceJump-start procedure

Note:

A discharged battery can freeze attemperatures below -10 °C. It must bethawed before the jump-start operation.

Danger.

Risk of acid burns. Do not lean over thebattery during the jump-start procedure.

Jump-start procedure

Turn the key back to the stop in theignition switch.

Connect one end of the positivecable to the (+) terminal of the dis-charged battery first, then connectthe other end of the positive cable tothe (+) terminal of the donor battery.

Connect the negative cable to the (-) terminal of the donor battery, andthen connect the other end of thenegative cable to an earthed metalpart that is bolted onto the bus skel-eton.

Note:

As far as possible from the dischargedbattery.

Run the engine of the donor vehicleat an elevated speed.

Start the engine of the bus to bejump-started in the normal way andlet it run at idling speed.

Switch off the engine of the donorvehicle.

Fully disconnect the earth connectionof the jump leads then disconnectthe positive cable.

Note:

To prevent voltage peaks, switch on themore powerful consumers of the jump-started bus, such as the lighting, heatedwindows or ventilation, before you discon-nect the jump leads.


Practical adviceActivation of on-board diagnostics

Activation of on-board diagnostics

Note:

On-board diagnostics cannot be regardedas a substitute for off-board diagnostics(STAR Diagnosis) because off-boarddiagnostics is the only means by whichsome functions can be monitored andtested (e.g. the channel assignment forthe sensor system and actuators of theEBS or ABS/ASR system).

M68_00-0214-71

Press System button (14) repeatedlyuntil the relevant system is shown ondisplay screen (10).

Note:

The on-board diagnostics cannot be ac-tivated unless: - the bus is stationary -the parking brake is applied - the ignitionswitch is in the ON position

Danger.

All work carried out on the bus in orderto rectify displayed faults must be per-formed by authorised personnel only.

BS Brake control

GS Automated manual transmission(ASG)

FR Drive control or CPC (commonpowertrain controller)

PLD Engine control (PLN MR)

RS Retarder control

TCO Tachograph

FPS Flexibly programmed controller

DM Driver's station display multiplex-er

HLK Heating, ventilation, air-condi-tioning (ATC-CAN)

ZV Central locking (option)


Practical adviceInterpreting the on-board diagnostics screen display

Press Info button (17).

Note:

The following information can be dis-played: MBS Mercedes-Benz part number(control unit) F Fault code (current/storedfault) MW Measured values (actual values)BW Binary values.

Interpreting the on-board dia-gnostics screen display

M54_00-0193-01

Example:

Note:

FPS system (14.1)

Note:

Fault 2 (14.2)

Note:

Current faults (14.3)

Note:

Fault severity 2 = serious (14.4)

Note:

Fault code 1001 (14.5)

Note:

Channel 7 (14.6)


Practical adviceClearing the fault memory of the selected system

Clearing the fault memory of theselected system

M68_00-0214-71

Press and hold “Reset” button (16).Also press “Quit” button (15) until“Reset” is shown on display screen(10).

Ending on-board diagnostics

M68_00-0214-71

Press “Quit” button (15).

Changing bulbs

Note:

Bulbs and lamps are an integral part ofbus safety. Make sure that all bulbs arealways in working order.

Danger.

Bulbs can become extremely hot. Thereis a risk of burns. Before changing bulbs,allow them to cool off completely.

Danger.

Always wear safety goggles and non-slipgloves to prevent injury when changingbulbs.

Caution:

To prevent a short circuit, always switchoff the lighting before you change a bulb.


Practical adviceChanging bulbs

Danger.

Do not use a bulb that has been droppedor has scratches on the glass. The bulbis pressurised and may explode. Youcould be injured by glass splinters frombroken bulbs.

Caution:

Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-tion and do not allow them to come intocontact with fluids.

Caution:

Marks on the glass diminish the servicelife of the bulb. Do not touch the glassbulb with your bare hands. If you do,clean the glass bulb while cold using al-cohol or spirit and rub dry with a lint-freecloth.

Note:

Bulbs must be operated only in theclosed lamp units for which they areintended. Always use replacement bulbsof the same type and the correct voltagerating.

Note:

Check the contacts for corrosion; clean ifnecessary.

Caution:

Check the seals for correct seating; re-place damaged seals with new ones.

Danger.

Keep children away from bulbs.


Comply with legal requirements when youdispose of bulbs or fluorescent tubes.

Danger.

Gas discharge bulbs operate at highvoltage, high pressure and high temperat-ure. There is a risk of fatal injury if liveparts of the lamp and ballast unit aretouched. Do not touch the gas dischargebulb if the headlamp is damaged.

Danger.

Do not change gas discharge bulbs your-self. Always have defective gas dischargebulbs changed at a qualified special-ist workshop which has the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools for thework required. EvoBus recommends anOMNIplus Service Partner for this pur-pose.



Danger.

It is essential that work relevant to safetyor work on safety-related systems be car-ried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Changing bulbs in theheadlamps/front foglamps/frontturn signal

Remove cover (4 quick-release lockson right).

Note:

The headlamp is accessible from thevehicle interior (right) or via the servicecover under the driver's area (left). Thiscover can be opened using the handle onthe left next to the driver's seat.

When changing the turn signals, turnthe bulb socket anti-clockwise andtake it out. Press the bulb in, turn itanti-clockwise and remove.

Note:

Refit in reverse order.

M54_00-0102-01

To replace the bulb, push the wireloop for the main headlight/frontfoglamp to the side and remove theplastic cover.

Disconnect bulb cable (5).

Detach retaining spring (6) and takeout the bulb.

Note:

Insert the new bulb so that the guides onthe socket plate engage in the recesseson the headlamp mirror neck.

Note:


Changing the bulb in the clearancelamp

M54_00-0103-01

Pull out bulb socket (7) to the rear.



Pull glass-base bulb (8) out of thesocket.

Note:


Changing the bulb in the side-mounted turn signal

M54_00-0105-01

Unscrew securing screws (3) andremove the housing.

Press bulb (4) in, turn it anti-clock-wise and remove.

Note:


Changing a bulb in the rear lampcluster

Open the left or right service cover.

Turn the base of the relevant bulb45° anti-clockwise.

Press the bulb in, turn it anti-clock-wise and remove.

Note:


Changing a bulb in the upper rearlamp cluster

M54_00-0882-01

Remove cover caps (1), unscrew thescrews and open the plastic cover onthe left or right.



M54_00-0678-01

Turn base (2) of relevant lamp (3) or(4) 45° anti-clockwise.

Press the bulb in, turn it anti-clock-wise and remove.

Note:


Changing the bulb in the doorwaylamp

M54_00-0110-01

Unscrew and remove two securingscrews (1) and remove the lamp.

Take out the bulb.

Note:


Changing the fluorescent tube ofthe lavatory lighting

M54_00-0114-01

Remove cover (3) using a screw-driver.

Turn the fluorescent tube through90° and remove it.

Note:



Practical adviceAdjusting the headlamps for driving on the left or right (only in buses with bi-xenon headlamps)

Adjusting the headlamps for drivingon the left or right (only in buseswith bi-xenon headlamps)

Caution:

In vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps, itis possible to adjust the headlamps forright-hand-drive or left-hand-drive opera-tion. Please observe the rules and regula-tions of the country in which the vehicleis operated.

Switch off the lighting.

Danger.

Bulbs and bulb holders may be hot andbulbs are pressurised.

Remove the cover.

Note:

The headlamp is accessible from thevehicle interior (right) or via the servicecover under the driver's area (left).

Switch off the lighting.

Danger.

Remove the ignition key. The lighting sys-tem must be de-energised. Caution: gasdischarge lamps operate at high voltages.

Open the plastic cover by turninganti-clockwise and remove.

M82.00-0142-71

The headlamp is adjusted with metalbar (1).

Note:

Push metal bar (1) upwards: driving onthe right.

Note:

Push metal bar (1) downwards: driving onthe left.

Note:



Practical adviceEmergency operation of the doors (depressurising the doors using the emergency valves)

Emergency operation of the doors(depressurising the doors using theemergency valves)

Danger.

All doors must remain unlocked while thebus is in motion. - refer to Operating In-structions sections: “Opening/Locking”,“Unlocking the door circuit at the frontright door / Unlocking the centre rightdoor / Unlocking the door circuit usingthe radio remote control (option)” M72_00-0023-01

Remove the security seal from theemergency valve.

Note:

3 Exterior emergency valve, front rightdoor

Note:

3.1 Interior emergency valve, front rightdoor

Note:

3.2 Exterior emergency valve, centre rightdoor

Note:

3.3 Interior emergency valve, centre rightdoor

Turn interior emergency valve(3.1/3.3) or exterior emergency valve(3/3.2) in the direction of the arrow.

Note:

When the emergency valve is operated,the door valve is vented of air. At thesame time, the emergency valve also re-leases the air in the door system. Thedoor system is now depressurised and itmust now be possible to move the doormanually.


Practical adviceEmergency unlocking of the luggage compartment flaps in the event of a compressed-air supply failure

The warning buzzer sounds in thedriver's area. The red warning lampin the relevant door pushbutton mustflash. This symbol appears on theinstrument cluster display screentogether with a red alert.

Restoring operation of the door sys-tem: - move the emergency valveinto the normal position – the doorcompressed-air system is slowlyrefilled through a door actuationthrottle valve and returns to the con-dition it was in before the emergencyvalve was operated.

Danger.

Risk of injury. Make sure that nobody iswithin the sweep of the door leaf whenoperation of the door system is restored.Doors must not move with a jerky orjolting action after normal operation hasbeen restored.

Provide the emergency valve with anew security seal.

Emergency unlocking of the luggagecompartment flaps in the event of acompressed-air supply failure

Note:

If there has been a complete failure ofthe central compressed-air supply andthe electrical power supply, the luggagecompartment flaps can be emergency-un-locked by means of an emergency oper-ating facility (spare wheel compressed-airreserve).


Practical adviceEmergency unlocking of the luggage compartment flaps in the event of a compressed-air supply failure

M00_00-0084-01

Open the front cover of the bus us-ing lever (1) at the front right doorentrance

Remove the spare wheel

M40_00-0073-01

Take the hose with tyre connection(2) from the plate behind the heat-ing front cabinet and connect it tothe tyre inflation valve on the sparewheel.

Note:

The spare wheel has a pressure of ap-proximately 8 bar. The compressed air inthe spare wheel passes through shuttlevalves to the cylinders of the luggagecompartment locking system and un-locks the luggage compartment flaps. Theluggage compartment flaps can then beopened.

Note:

Reinflate the spare wheel to the specifiedpressure as soon as possible.


Practical adviceRemoving the exterior mirror, fitting the emergency mirror (option)

Removing the exterior mirror, fittingthe emergency mirror (option)

Note:

The emergency mirror (option) is locatedin the luggage compartment and can befitted to both sides. Tools needed forassembly: WAF 6 Allen key, screwdriver,WAF 15 open-ended spanner

Danger.

Always make sure that the ladder you useis suitable for the task. Secure the ladderagainst sliding away.

M88_70-0002-01

Remove the upper cover cap fromthe mirror arm. To do this, push inthe two quick-release locks (1) androtate through 90° (position trans-verse to the direction of travel).

M88_70-0004-01

Disconnect electrical plug connec-tion (2) from the plug. Pull retainingclip (7) outwards, twist through 30°.Loosen clamp bolts (3) a few turns.If lock (8) is installed (option) it mustbe unlocked. Pull mirror head (4) for-wards out of mirror arm (5).

Unscrew securing screws (10) frommirror arm (5). Remove mirror arm(5).


Practical adviceEmergency operation for heating in driver's area

M88_70-0003-01

Unscrew securing screws (1.1) foremergency mirror (1) and remove theemergency mirror.

Fit the emergency mirror to the at-tachment points on the mirror armand tighten securing screws (10).

Danger.

Check the emergency mirror is securelyattached, adjust the emergency mirror.

Danger.

The exterior mirrors reduce the size ofimages. Objects may actually be closerthan they seem.

Emergency operation for heating indriver's area

M83_00-0176-01

Remove front service cover (1). Todo this, unscrew securing screws (2).


Practical adviceEmergency operation of the passenger-compartment heating

M83_00-0098-01

Disconnect electrical connector (7.6)with water control valve (7.1) discon-nected from the power

Pull emergency lever (7.7) in the dir-ection of the arrow

Move emergency lever (7.7) towards“A” = close valve, towards “B” =open valve

Note:

An end stop can be felt which indicatesthat the respective limit position has beenreached. During emergency operation,it is not possible to regulate the outlettemperature of the heating in the driver'sarea electronically.

Emergency operation of thepassenger-compartment heating

M83.00-0939-71

Operate supply line manual shut-offvalve (1)

Note:

In the event of uncontrollable heating,ventilation and air-conditioning (leakyheating control valve/heating in sum-mer) and if the heating system is nolonger leak-tight, it is possible to isolatethe heating system coolant circuit fromthe engine coolant circuit using the twomanual shut-off valves in heater supplyline (1) and in the heater return line.


Practical adviceMaintenance tasks for the air-conditioning system in the bus (filter maintenance)

Caution:

Do not switch on the heating or waterheater.

M83.00-0940-71

Operate return line manual shut-offvalve (1)

Note:

Manual shut-off valve (1) is located abovethe engine in the engine compartment.

Maintenance tasks for the air-con-ditioning system in the bus (filtermaintenance)

Cleaning/replacing therecirculated-air filters

M83_00-0505-71

Switch the ignition starter switch toOFF.

Cover seats and floor linings for pro-tection.

Remove left- and right-siderecirculated-air filter cassettes (3).

Note:

Recirculated-air filter cassettes (3) areeach secured by 4 plastic screws (quick-release locks). To open, press the screwsupwards slightly and turn them through90° anti-clockwise.

M83_00-0423-01

Clean or exchange filter material (2)and refit the recirculated-air filtercassettes.


Practical adviceMaintenance tasks for the air-conditioning system in the bus (filter maintenance)

Note:

To close, press plastic screws (1) (quick-release locks) upwards slightly and turnthem through 90° clockwise.

Note:

Installation position: colouring (labelling)facing up.

Cleaning or replacing the fresh-air/recirculated-air filters

M83.00-0901-71

Switch the ignition starter switch toON

Press button (7) on the HVAC controlpanel and wait 10 seconds.

Switch the ignition starter switch toOFF.

Fold down the recirculated-air filtercassettes on the left- and right-handside.

M83_00-0422-01

Remove all fresh-air/recirculated-airfilters (1) on the left- and right-handside.

Clean or replace the filters with newones.

Assembly in reverse order

Cleaning the fresh-air filter in thedriver's area

Open the spare wheel flap at thefront of the bus (lever in entrance offront right door)


Practical adviceScopes of maintenance for the air-conditioning system

M83_00-0796-71

Lift the fresh-air filter mat up withboth hands (approximately 6 mm)and then pull it out downwards andtowards you.

Clean the fresh-air filter mat by beat-ing out the dust, vacuuming or blast-ing with compressed air against theintake direction and then refit it. Ex-change the filter mat if necessary.

Scopes of maintenance for the air-conditioning system

Cleaning the condenser

Note:

Check and clean condenser (4) only withthe engine and air-conditioning systemswitched off

M83_00-0105-01

Fully unscrew condenser fans (4.1)

Danger.

The condenser is accessible for cleaningonly from the roof. Secure the bus in sta-tionary position so that it cannot be setin motion by an unauthorised person. Im-plement the necessary safeguards to pre-vent a fall from the roof (safety harness,scaffold, ladder, etc.).

For normal levels of dirt, blow outthe dust that has deposited in thefins with compressed air in the direc-tion of arrow (4.2)

For stubborn dirt, spray into the finswith a grease-dissolving substance(cold cleaner), allow it to work andthen spray it off with water. Blow itdry with compressed air in the direc-tion of arrow (4.2)



Note:

To prevent deformation of the fins, thejet of air or water must always be direc-ted perpendicular (90°) to the condensersurface.

Then check condenser fans (4.1) forcorrect operation: air drawn in theopposite direction to the arrow (4.2)

Note:

A dirty condenser causes an increase inpressure in the refrigerant system and asafety switch response (high pressure).The cleaning interval depends on thelength of operation and the load to whichthe system is subjected.

Carrying out the compressormaintenance program

M83.00-0901-71

Press and hold A/C enable button (6)and rocker switch (12) on the controlpanel simultaneously with the ignitionstarter switch OFF. Switch the igni-tion starter switch to ON and startthe engine. The LED in Smog button(7) starts to flash and the LED in but-ton (6) lights up. The air-conditioningsystem is switched on after a delayof approximately 60 seconds, and the“Air-conditioning compressor in oper-ation” symbol appears on the screen.

The maintenance program is endedautomatically after approximately 5minutes and the LED in Smog but-ton (7) stops flashing. The only wayto interrupt the program prematurelyis to switch off the engine (ignitionstarter switch OFF).

Note:

To ensure that the slide ring seal on thecompressor crankshaft does not dry outand start to leak, the air-conditioning sys-tem must be operated at least once amonth (even in the cold season).

Note:

The maintenance program for the com-pressor cannot be carried out unless theoutside temperature is above 0 °C andthe coolant temperature (engine circuit) isabove 50 °C.



Checking the oil level in therefrigerant compressor

M83_00-0425-01

Check the inspection glass on the re-frigerant compressor when the com-pressor is running (after approxim-ately 10 - 15 minutes). The oil levelshould be between the marks (min.and max.).

Note:

Refrigerator oil is circulated together withthe refrigerant in the entire refrigerantsystem. For this reason, the oil level maydiffer with each check but must still bebetween the min. and max. marks on theinspection glass. Have underfilled refriger-ator oil topped up only by the authorisedspecialists of an OMNIplus Service Part-ner.

Note:

To ensure that the slide ring seal on thecompressor crankshaft does not dry outand start to leak, the air-conditioning sys-tem must be operated once a month forapproximately 10 - 15 minutes by press-ing Reheat button (8) on the HVAC con-trol panel. At outside temperatures ofbelow +5 °C, the procedure should becarried out indoors otherwise the systemwill be switched off by the low-pressureswitch or ice sensor.

Checking the coolant level

M83_00-0409-01

Open the rear right-hand service cov-er on the roof

Danger.

Secure the bus in stationary position sothat it cannot be set in motion by an un-authorised person. Implement the ne-cessary safeguards to prevent a fall fromthe roof (safety harness, scaffold, ladder,etc.).

Heat up the vehicle interior to >26 °C


Practical adviceCleaning the heating system water filter

Switch on the air-conditioning system

Note:

Engine speed approximately 1,500 rpm.

Check the refrigerant level in inspec-tion glass (6) after an operating timeof 15 - 20 minutes:

Note:

The refrigerant must be flowing in inspec-tion glass (8) without any bubbles.

Note:

Have the underfilled refrigerant topped uponly by the authorised specialists of anOMNIplus Service Partner.

Cleaning the heating system waterfilter

M83_00-0719-72

Switch off water heater (1) using thebattery isolating switch before remov-ing water filter (3)

Danger.

Risk of scalding to skin and eyes fromhot coolant spraying out. Wear protectiveclothing (gloves/safety goggles). Risk ofpoisoning if coolant is swallowed.

Close shut-off valve (4) upstream ofthe water filter and shut-off valve (6)in the heater supply line

M20_00-0002-01

To isolate the water supply at thewater filter or drain the filter hous-ing (approximately 1.5 litres), closeshut-off valve (5) on the coolant filter(WAF 32).


Practical adviceCleaning the heating system water filter

Unscrew cover (1) from the coolantfilter (WAF 32) and remove filter in-sert (3) from filter housing (4).

Clean filter insert (3) in running wa-ter.

Note:

If the filter insert is heavily contaminated,it can be cleaned with compressed air(maximum 5 bar).

Check the cleaned filter insert fordamage.


Damaged filter inserts must always bereplaced with new ones.

Insert filter insert (3) into filter hous-ing (4) and screw on cover (1) with anew O-ring (2).

M20_00-0003-01

Reopen shut-off valve (5) on thecoolant filter (WAF 32).

Note:

Position: A = open; B = closed

M83_00-0719-72

Reopen shut-off valve (4) upstream ofthe water filter and shut-off valve (6)in the heater supply line.


Practical adviceBleeding the coolant circuit for the heating system

M54.00-2108-71

Check the coolant level in the expan-sion tank and top it up if necessary.

Bleeding the coolant circuit for theheating system

Danger.

There is a risk of scalding to skin andeyes from hot coolant spraying out.Wear protective clothing (gloves/safetygoggles). Do not open the sealing capon the coolant expansion tank unless thecoolant temperature is below 50 °C. Riskof poisoning if coolant is swallowed.

Note:

The heating, ventilation and air-condition-ing control panel features an integrated“filling program”. This program providesall the necessary functions (control of re-circulation pumps and coolant valves) forfilling and bleeding the heating systemcoolant circuit completely.

M54.00-2108-71

Open sealing cap (2) slowly to relievethe excess pressure. Then unscrewand remove the sealing cap.



M83.00-0901-71

Start the filling program. The fillingprogram is started with the ignitionstarter switch in the OFF position.Press and hold Smog button (7) androcker switch (12) on the controlpanel simultaneously. Turn the igni-tion starter switch to the ON position(position 2). Keep Smog button (7)and rocker switch (12) pressed untilthe LEDs in buttons (6, 7, 8, 11) lightup. The LED in rocker switch (12)flashes.

Note:

The filling program is divided into 3stages. You can switch to the nextprogram stage using rocker switch (12).An LED on the right-hand section of thecontrol panel goes out as each programstage is completed. There is a forcedpause of 10 seconds between eachstage. The pause lasts 6 minutes in stage2. It is not possible to switch to thenext stage until the forced pauses haveelapsed (LED in rocker switch (12) startsto flash). From program stage 2 onwards,the engine must be running, otherwise itis impossible for the program to proceed.In program stages 2 and 3, set anelevated idling speed (approximately 750rpm) using the retarder lever (refer to theretarder lever operating instructions).

Note:

The coolant level in the engine coolantexpansion tank must be checked, andtopped up if necessary, during and aftereach program stage.

M54.00-2108-71

Program stage 1 (LEDs in buttons 6,7, 8, 11 light up, engine off): Addcoolant at filler opening (1) until theexpansion tank is completely filledwith coolant. Press rocker switch(12) on the control panel - the LED inbutton (6) goes out.

Note:

Use clean water – well filtered and assoft as possible (drinking water quality) –mixed with corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze(comply with the Specifications for Ser-vice Products).



Danger.

If no corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze isavailable, pure water may be used tem-porarily (drinking quality). The bus mustbe driven to the nearest OMNIplus Ser-vice Partner to have corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze added to the coolant in thespecified ratio (refer to the “Practical ad-vice” section). Automatic heating/ventil-ation/air-conditioning mode must be dis-abled at the HVAC control panel (LED inthe A/C button not lit) to prevent the air-conditioning system from being switchedon (refer to the “Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning” section for notes on opera-tion).

M83_00-0403-01

Program stage 2 (engine running atan elevated idling speed of approx-imately 750 rpm/duration approx-imately 6 minutes): Recirculationpumps (2, 5) and auxiliary heat-ing unit (1) are switched on. Bleedthe coolant circuit and fill up thecoolant expansion tank completelywith coolant.

Danger.

Risk of injury. Take particular care aroundhot, rotating and moving parts.

Note:


Danger.




Danger.


M83.00-0901-71

Press rocker switch (12) on the con-trol panel - the LED in button (8)goes out. Program stage 3 (enginerunning at an elevated idling speedof approximately 750 rpm): The re-circulation pumps and the auxiliary

heating unit are switched on. Bleedthe coolant circuit and fill up thecoolant expansion tank completelywith coolant.

Press rocker switch (12) on the con-trol panel - the LEDs in buttons 7and 11 go out and the filling programis ended.

M54.00-2108-71

Read off the coolant level and fill upto maximum mark (1.2).


Technical dataTable of contents

Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Overview of bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497


Technical dataVehicle data

Vehicle data

Designation Value

Vehicle length 15 RHD:12,140 mm16 RHD-2:12,960 mm16 RHD:12,960 mm17 RHD:13,990 mm

Vehicle width 2,550 mm

Vehicle height

(including air-condi-tioning system)

Approximately3,620 mm

Permissible grossvehicle weight

(depending on thecountry of regis-tration - e.g. Ger-many)

15 RHD:18,000 kg

16 RHD-2:18,000 kg

16 RHD:24,000 kg

17 RHD:24,000 kg

Designation Value

Technically permiss-ible front axle loads(depending on thecountry of registra-tion, operation, etc.- e.g. Germany)

15 RHD:7,100 kg

16 RHD-2:7,100 kg

16 RHD:7,100 kg

17 RHD:7,100 kg

Technically per-missible driven axleloads(depending on thecountry of registra-tion, operation, etc.- e.g. Germany)

15 RHD:11,500 kg

16 RHD-2:11,500 kg

16 RHD:11,500 kg

17 RHD:11,500 kg

Designation Value

Technically permiss-ible trailing axleloads(depending on thecountry of registra-tion, operation, etc.- e.g. Germany)

16 RHD:5,750 kg

17 RHD:5,750 kg

Wheelbase 1st-2ndaxle

15 RHD:6,080 mm16 RHD-2:6,900 mm16 RHD:6,080 mm17 RHD:7,110 mm

Wheelbase 2nd-3rdaxle

16 RHD:1,350 mm17 RHD:1,350 mm


Technical dataOverview of bulbs

Designation Value

Turning circle (w tow)

15 RHD:20,980 mm16 RHD-2:23,070 mm16 RHD:21,190 mm17 RHD:23,670 mm

Front overhang 2,760 mm

Rear overhang 15 RHD:3,300 mm16 RHD-2:3,300 mm16 RHD:2,770 mm17 RHD:2,770 mm

Total fuel tankvolume

RHD:approx. 440 l

Designation Value

AdBlue additivetank volume

RHD:approx. 40 l

Windscreen washerreservoir

approx. 22 l

Overview of bulbs

Designation Value

Main-beamheadlamps, frontfoglamps

24V 70W H1

Dipped-beam head-lamps

24V 70W H7

Clearance lamps,front lower

24V 5W glassbase

Clearance lamps,front upper

LED

Turn signals, frontand rear lower

24V 21W BA15yellow

Rear turn signalsand brake lamps,reversing lamps,rear foglamps

24V 21W BA15

Lower tail lamps 24V 5W BA15


Technical dataOverview of bulbs

Designation Value

Licence plate lamps LED

Side marker lamps LED

End outline markerlamps

24V 4W T8/4

Centre aisle over-head lighting

T5 F35W fluor-escent tube

Centre aisle low-level lighting

LED

Reading lamps 24V 10W BA15

Night lighting LED

Service call lamp LED

Doorway lamps 24V 20W halo-gen

Driver's area light-ing

24V 10W halo-gen

Designation Value

Lavatory lighting 24V 8W fluor-escent tube


Index

2230/400 V systems (option)

Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 70

AAcceleration skid control (ASR) . . 54

Activating the slip increasefunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Accident data recorderPushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Accident data recorder (ADR)Function description . . . . . . . . 47-48

AdBlue®Service product . . . . . . . . . . . 37-38

ADR buttonAccident data recorder . . . . 91, 168

Air suspensionSafety precautions . . . . . . . . . . 142

Air-conditioning systemOperating instructions . . . . . . . . 218Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Attendant call system . . . . . 91, 159Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Automatic speed limiterFunction description . . . . . . . . . 209

Auxiliary heatingSafety precautions . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Auxiliary heating unitActivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229-230Activating a programmedswitch-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Deactivating an activatedswitch-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Programming switch-ontimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231-232Programming the switch-onduration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Auxiliary switch panel . . . . 434-435Axle load transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

BBall hitch trailer coupling

Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Batteries

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . 466-467Recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . 422

Battery compartment . . . . . . . . . 442Battery isolating switch . . . 428-429

Bi-xenon headlampsAdjusting the headlamps fordriving on the left or right . . . . . 477

BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaningsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-36Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Brakes with anti-locking protec-tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Braking and stopping . . . . . . . . . . 49Bus

raising/lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Bus stop brake . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 166

Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . 145Emergency releaseswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 167, 419

CCare and cleaning

Covers, upholstery and ceiling . . . 77Fabric covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78-79Leather covers . . . . . . . . . . . . 81-83Light-alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Micro-fibre covers . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 75


Index

CC pumpGreasing the impeller . . . . . . . . 361

Ceiling switch panel . . . . . . 438-439Central locking

Left-side luggage compart-ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 162Right-side luggage compart-ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 163System description . . . . . . . 251-253

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 472-476Checking the residual currentdevice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Compressed-air system

Charging another bus . . . . . 417-418Coolant level of the engine andheating system

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Cruise control

Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214-215

DDaytime driving lights . . . . . 92, 123Deactivating creep mode . . . 92, 155Departure check

Daily tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Monthly tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Weekly tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Destination displayControl panel . . . . . . . . . . . 104-105

Diesel particulate filterImportant information . . . . . . . 40-41Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-43

Display controlPushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 156

Door pushbuttonDoor I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 167Door II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 167

Door pushbutton in thedriver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 241Doors

Anti-entrapment protection(reversing) as the doors areclosed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Emergency valveoperation . . . . . . . . . . 255-256, 478Protection against entrapment inthe door opening direction . . . . 242

Drive beltsFitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386-388Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384-385

Driver's areaOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Switches on the left section ofthe instrument panel . . . . . . . . 89-92Switches on the right section ofthe instrument panel . . . . . . . . 94-95

Driver's area heatingEmergency operation . . . . . . . . 482

Driver's area interior switchpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430-431Driver's area lighting . . . . . . 91, 156Driver's power window . . . . . 91, 160Driver's rest area

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-111Switches/controllers . . . . . . 236-237

Driver's seatGrammer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172-173ISRI 6860/875 . . . . . . . . . . 174-175

Driver's seat microphone . . . 92, 164Driver's window heating/mirror heating . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 161Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Driving systems

Automatic speed limiter . . . . . . 209


Index

Combined drive/brake cruisecontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Variable speed limiter (Temposet) 210

EEBS brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Electrical system

Measures required for theprevention of damage . . . . . 423-424Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426-427Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . 421

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Function description . . . . . . . . 62-63Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 154System description . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Emergency hammer . . . . . . 108-109Emergency mirror

Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481Engine

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-24Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Engine oil levelChecking with the dipstick . . . . 382

Engine oil level display . . . . . . . . 376Exterior flaps

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

FFire detection system

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . 107First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Fresh water tank

Draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Filling inside the bus . . 272-273, 323Filling outside the bus . . . . 274, 324

Fuel consumption indicator 140-141Fuel system

Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Fuse assignment

Auxiliary switch panel . . . . . 448-450Ceiling switch panel . . . . . . 460-461Driver's area interior switchpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444-445Main switch panel (under thedriver’s area) . . . . . . . . . . . 446-447

Power distribution board(PDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456-458Roof-mounted heating, ventilationand air-conditioning system(Konvekta) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464Roof-mounted heating, vent-ilation and air-conditioningsystem (Webasto) . . . . . . . . 462-463

FusesHandling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

HHazard warning lamps . . . . . 95, 166Heating system coolant circuit

Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491-494Cleaning the water filter . . . 489-490

Heating/ventilation/air-conditioningActivating the air-conditioning . . 227Activating the reheat function . . 228Control panel . . . . . . . . 95, 220-222Filter maintenance . . . . . . . 484-485Manually regulating the blowerspeed in the driver's area . . . . . 223Manually regulating the blowerspeed in the passenger compart-ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226


Index

Preselecting the passenger-compartment temperature . . 224-225Scopes of maintenance forthe air-conditioning system . 486-488

Horn changeover . . . . . . . . . 92, 162

IIdentification plate . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 129Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . 96-97Instrument cluster display screen

Basic settings menu . . . . . . . . . 131Brightness setting . . . . . . . . . . . 132Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 133-139Operating, function andmalfunction displays . . . . . . 368-375

IntercomDriver's rest area/kit-chenette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 165Hanging up . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 164

JJump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Jump-starting

Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

LLavatory

Emptying the fresh water storagetank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350-351Enabling switch . . . . . . . . . 92, 163Switchover between water (WC)and chemical (CC) operation . . . 352

LockingDoor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Using the radio remote control(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Luggage compartment flapsEmergency unlocking . 257, 479-480

MMaster safety switch(emergency-off switch) . . . . . 89, 152Mirror adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 153

NNight lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 158Normal level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 160

Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Note symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

OOn-board diagnostics

Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470Clearing the fault memory . . . . . 472Ending on-board diagnostics . . . 472Interpreting the screen display . . 471

On-board kitchenetteChecking and cleaning thefresh water filter . . . . . . . . 274, 324Enabling switch . . . . . . . . . 92, 163First use . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 320General information . . 266, 308, 319Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . 300, 342Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 325Replacing fuses . . 298-299, 339-341Switching off . . . . 305-306, 346-347Switching on . . . . . . . 271, 321-322Winter operation . . . . . . . . 293, 336

Open-jaw trailer coupling and ballhitch trailer coupling

Detachable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Operating/malfunction displays

ABS/ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-61Brake system . . . . . . . . 56-57, 65-69


Index

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243-244Fire detection system . . . . . 119-120Fuel system/exhaust gas cleaningsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Overview of bulbs . . . . . . . 497-498

PParking brake

Applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51General information . . . . . . 89, 130Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Passenger seatAdjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Passenger seat service set . 182-183Passenger stop requestsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 161Passenger-compartment heating

Emergency operation . . . . . . . . 483Passenger-compartmentlighting position I+II . . . . . . . 91, 157PDB fuse switch panel . . . . 436-437Pedal-activated continuous braking

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 165

Pneumatic test portsAxle modulator/door 2 . . . . . . . 416Behind door 2 . . . . . . . . . . 414-415Under the driver’s area . . . . 412-413

Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . 399PSH (pneumatic shift aid) transmis-sion shift system

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

RRaising/lowering the bus . . . 92, 160Reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 157Refrigerator

On-board kitchenette . . . . . 112-113Tour guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114-115

RefuellingAdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Reverse warning feature . . . 91, 159Roof hatches

Emergency exit . . . . . . . . . . 260-261Opening/closing manually . . . . . 259Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Roof-mounted system (heating,ventilation, air-conditioning)

Electrical connection . . . . . . 440-441Rotary light switch . . . . . . . . 92, 123Running-in guideline . . . . . . . . . . . 23

SSchool bus operation . . . . . . 91, 159Seat belt

Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Jump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Passenger-compartment seating 179

Seat belt reminder . . . . . . . 117, 180Seat squab

Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Service cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Skibox

Additional operating instructions . 74fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71-72swivelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397Spare mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398


Index

SteeringImportant information . . . . . . . . 147

Steering columnadjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 129

Steering column switchLight and wiper functions . . 89, 124Retarder and cruise control . 124-128

Storage space for hand luggage . . . 9Switch panel under thedriver's area (main switchpanel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432-433

TTachograph

DTCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 100-101Installation position . . . . . . . . . . 98

ToiletEmptying the solid wastecontainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Filling the fresh water storagetank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Operation, maintenance . . . . . . 353Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Tools and emergency equipment 107Tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Towing and tow-starting . . . . . 27-29Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . 31Loading a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Trailer coupling maintenance . . . . 33

Transmission shift systemSafety precautions . . . . . . . . . . 186Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Transmission shift system (GO 250-8PowerShift)

Failsafe mode . . . . . . . . . . . 203-206Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191-202

Transmission shift system (GO250-8)

System description . . . . . . . 187-188Tyre pressure monitor . . . . . . . . 395Tyre pressures table

295/80 R 22.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Tyres

Flat tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Inflating using the tyreinflator connection . . . . . . . 409-411Invisible tyre damage . . . . . . . . 392

Operating safety and roadworthi-ness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Retreaded tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Tyre age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Tyre condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Tyre load capacity, top speed oftyres and types of tyres . . . . . . 393Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

UUnlocking

Door circuit at the front rightdoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Door circuit using the radioremote control (option) . . . . . . . 246Door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Luggage compartment flaps usingthe pushbuttons in the driver'sarea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Luggage compartment flaps usingthe remote control (option) . . . . 248

VVariable speed limiter (Temposet)

Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211-212


Index

Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

WWater heater fuel filter

Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421Wheel trims

fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

WheelsFitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406-407Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401-405

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . 92, 162Windscreen roller sunblind . . 91, 153Windscreen washer reservoir . . . 116


Documents

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB · 2019. 2. 25. · 10.2014EvoBusGmbH Nottobereprinted,reproducedortranslatedinanyformwithoutpriorpermission. Addressfororders: EvoBusGmbH ServiceDocumentation